Kasco Safety Manual Current

SAFETY POLICY
and
PROCEDURE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Safety and Health Policy .................................................... 1

Safety and Health Objectives ............................................. 2
Job Site Inspections ........................................................... 3
Contractor Safety Administrator.......................................... 4
Personal Protective Equipment .......................................... 5
Safety Rules ....................................................................... 6
Job Safety Training ............................................................ 9
Safety Discipline ............................................................... 10
Power Lockout Procedure ................................................ 11
Confined Space Entry ...................................................... 14
Confined Space Entry Procedures ................................... 15
Emergency Procedures .................................................... 16
Caring For Bites and Stings.............................................. 17
Hazard Communication Program ..................................... 18
I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
VI.
VII.
VIII.
IX.
X.
General................................................................ 18
Hazard Determination .......................................... 18
Labeling ............................................................... 18
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) ................... 18
Employee Information and Training ..................... 19
Hazardous Non-Routine Tasks ............................ 19
Informing Contractors .......................................... 20
Pipes and Piping Systems ................................... 20
Hazardous Chemicals.......................................... 20
List of Hazardous Chemicals ............................... 21
SAFETY AND HEALTH POLICY

The intent of this policy is to provide guidelines for maintaining a safe work environment for all
Kasco employees and its contractors. This policy in conjunction with continuing education will
help maintain a safe work environment.
Kasco Inc. believes that NO JOB OR TASK IS MORE IMPORTANT THAN WORKER HEALTH
AND SAFETY.
Pre task planning, jobsite inspections and toolbox talks are all a part of daily safety procedures.
If a job represents a potential safety or health threat, every effort will be made to plan a safe
way to perform the task.
Every procedure must be a safe procedure. Shortcuts in safe procedures by either foremen or
workers will not be tolerated.
If a worker observes any unprotected job, which may pose a potential threat to their health or
safety, he or she must inform management and management must take adequate precautions.
IF A JOB CANNOT BE DONE SAFELY IT WILL NOT BE DONE.
.
___________________________________________
Geoffrey Hutchison V.P Operations
SAFETY AND HEALTH OBJECTIVES
Kasco Inc. plans to achieve worker safety and health through the following:
A.
Using a qualified safety person
B.
Making regular job site safety inspections
C.
Enforcing the use of safety equipment
D.
Following safety procedures and rules
E.
Providing on-going safety training
F.
Enforcing safety rules and using appropriate discipline
G.
Using MIOSHA Standards as a minimum guideline
JOB SITE INSPECTIONS
The safety person or other designated person will tour each job site and observe potential
safety/health hazards, including the potential hazards of confined spaces and develop a plan for
safeguarding this company's workers and contractors which may include the following:
1.
Pre task planning
2.
Removing the hazard
3.
Guarding against the hazard as required by MIOSHA
4.
Providing/requiring personal protective equipment and enforcing its use
5.
Training workers in safe work practices
6.
Coordinating protection of workers through other contractors
7.
Providing fire extinguishers in the appropriate location
8.
Provide adequate lighting and ventilation
9.
Promote good housekeeping practices
A record of all safety inspections and correctional steps will be kept in the superintendents
jobsite binder.
CONTRACTOR SAFETY PERSON
Geoffrey Hutchison, V.P Operations

is the designated person to administer the safety and health program for this organization. The
responsibilities for this position are as follows:
1.
Being knowledgeable of potential job hazards
2.
Assuring compliance
requirements
3.
Making regular safety inspections
4.
Establishing safety procedures
5.
Correlating regular safety training with lead persons
6.
Maintaining safety records
with
MIOSHA
construction
safety
and
health
standard
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
1.
Head protection will be worn on job sites when there are potentials of falling objects, hair
entanglement, burning, or electrical hazards. See MIOSHA PART 6. PROTECTIVE
EQUIPMENT
2.
Eye protection will be worn when there are potentials of hazards from flying objects or
particles, chemicals, arcing, glare, or dust. See MIOSHA PART 6. PROTECTIVE
EQUIPMENT
3.
Protective footwear shall be worn to protect from falling objects, chemicals, or stepping
on sharp objects. Athletic or canvas-type shoes shall not be worn. See MIOSHA PART
6. PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
4.
Protective gloves or clothing shall be worn when required to protect against a hazard.
See MIOSHA PART 6. PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
5.
Harnesses and lanyards shall be utilized for fall protection as required in MIOSHA
Construction Safety Standards. See MIOSHA PART 45. FALL PROTECTION
SAFETY RULES
ALL OF OUR SAFETY RULES MUST BE OBEYED- FAILURE TO DO SO WILL RESULT IN

STRICT DISCIPLINARY ACTION BEING TAKEN.
1.
Keep your mind on your work at all times. No horseplay on the job. Injury or termination
or both can be the result.
2.
Personal safety equipment must be worn as prescribed for each job, such as: safety
glasses for eye protection, hard hats at all times within the confines of the construction
area where there is a potential for falling materials or tools, gloves when handling
materials, and safety shoes are necessary for protection against foot injuries.
3.
Precautions are necessary to prevent sunburn and to protect against burns from hot
materials.
4.
If any part of your body should come in contact with an acid or caustic substance, rush to
the nearest water available and flush the affected part. Secure medical aid immediately.
5.
Watch where you are walking. Don't run.
6.
The use of illegal drugs or alcohol or being under the influence of the same on the
project shall be cause for termination. Inform your supervisor if taking strong prescription
drugs that warn against driving or using machinery.
7.
Do not distract the attention of fellow workers. Do no engage in any act which would
endanger another employee.
8.
Sanitation facilities have been or will be provided for your use. Defacing or damaging
these facilities is forbidden.
9.
A good job is a clean job, and a clean job is the start of a safe job. So keep your working
area free from rubbish and debris.
10.
Do not use a compressor to blow dust or dirt from your clothes, hair, or hands.
11.
Never work aloft if you are afraid to do so, if you are subject to dizzy spells, or if you are
apt to be nervous or sick.
12.
Never move an injured person unless it is absolutely necessary. Further injury may
result. Keep the injured as comfortable as possible and utilize job site first-aid equipment
until an ambulance arrives.
13.
Know where firefighting equipment is located and be trained on how to use it.
14.
Lift correctly - with legs, not the back. If the load is too heavy, GET HELP. Stay fit.
Control your weight. Do stretching exercises. Approximately twenty percent of all
construction related injuries result from lifting materials.
15.
Nobody but operator shall be allowed to ride on equipment unless proper seating is
provided.
16.
Do not use power tools and equipment until you have been properly instructed in the
safe work methods and become authorized to use them.
17.
Be sure that all guards are in place. Do not remove, displace, damage, or destroy any
safety device or safeguard furnished or provided for use on the job, nor interfere with the
use thereof.
18.
Do not enter an area which has been barricaded.
19.
If you must work around power shovels, trucks, and dozers, make sure operators can
always see you. Barricades are required for cranes.
20.
Never oil, lubricate, or fuel equipment while it is running or in motion.
21.
Before servicing, repairing, or adjusting any powered tool or piece of equipment,

disconnect it, lock out the source of power, and tag it out.
22.
Barricade danger areas. Guard rails or perimeter cables may be required.
23.
Trenches over five feet deep must be shored or sloped as required. Keep out of
trenches or cuts that have not been properly shored or sloped. Excavated or other
material shall not be stored nearer than two feet from the edge of the excavation.
Excavations less than 5 ft may also require cave in protection in some instances.
24.
Use the "four and one" rule when using a ladder- one foot of base for every four feet of
height.
25.
Portable ladders in use shall be equipped with safety feet unless ladder is tied, blocked
or otherwise secured. Step ladders shall not be used as a straight ladder.
26.
Ladders must extend three feet above landing on roof for proper use.
27.
Defective ladders must be properly tagged and removed from service.
28.
Keep ladder bases free of debris, hoses, wires, materials, etc.
29.
Build scaffolds according to manufacturers' recommendations

Construction Safety Standard Part 12 - Scaffolding.
30.
Scaffold planks shall be properly lapped, cleated or otherwise secured to prevent

shifting.
31.
Use only extension cords of the three-prong type. Use ground fault circuit interrupters at
all times and when using tools in wet atmosphere (e.g. outdoors) or with any temporary
power supply. Check the electrical grounding system daily.
32.
The use of harnesses with safety lines when working from unprotected high places is
mandatory. Always keep your line as tight as possible.
7
and
MIOSHA
33.
Never throw anything "overboard." Someone passing below may be seriously injured.
34.
Open fires are prohibited.
35.
Know what emergency procedures have been established for your job site (location of
emergency phone, first aid kit, stretcher location, fire extinguisher locations, evacuation
plan, etc.)
36.
Never enter a manhole, well, shaft, tunnel or other confined space which could possibly
have an un-breathable atmosphere because of lack of oxygen, or presence of toxic or
flammable gas, or has a possibility of engulfment by solids or liquids. Make certain a
qualified person tests the confined area with an appropriate detector before entry, that
the necessary safety equipment is worn. Standby person may be required to be
stationed at the entrance.
JOB SAFETY TRAINING
A.
After inspecting a job site, the safety person or other designated person will identify and
evaluate all potential hazards for:
1.
Injury Severity potential
2.
Probability of an accident
B.
This person will also appraise the skill and knowledge level of exposed workers
C.
Appropriate Training will be given

1.
Hazards will be pointed out
2.
Necessary precautions will be explained
3.
The higher the hazard the more detailed will be the training
D.
Records will be maintained for all training sessions with descriptions of topics covered
and the names of workers trained.
E.
Use of the safety checklist located in the Superintendent's binder.
.
SAFETY DISCIPLINE
A.
B.
Three-Step System
First violation:
Written warning;
employee's file
Second violation:
Written warning; suspension for 1/2 or full day

without pay
Third violation:
Written report for file and immediate termination
A record will be maintained of all discipline
10
copies
to
employee
and
POWER LOCKOUT PROCEDURE
Lockout procedure for Kasco Inc.

I.
PURPOSE
The purpose of this procedure is to assure that employees are protected from
unintended machine motion or unintended release of energy which could cause injury.
II.
III.
IV.
MANAGEMENT RESPONSIBILITIES
A.
Each supervisor shall train new employees and periodically instruct all of their
employees regarding provisions and requirements of this lockout procedure.
B.
Each supervisor shall effectively enforce compliance of this lockout procedure

including the use of corrective disciplinary action where necessary.
C.
Each supervisor shall assure that the locks and devices required for compliance
with the lockout procedure are provided to their employees.
D.
Prior to setting up, adjusting, repairing, servicing, installing, or performing

maintenance work on equipment, machinery, tools, or processes, the supervisor
shall determine and instruct the employees of the steps to be taken to assure
they are not exposed to injury due to unintended machine motion or release of
energy.
EMPLOYEES RESPONSIBILITY
A.
Employees shall comply with the lockout procedure.
B.
Employees shall consult with their supervisor or other appropriate knowledgeable

management personnel whenever there are any questions regarding their
protection.
C.
Employees shall obtain and care for the locks and other devices required to
comply with the lockout procedure.
GENERAL
A.
The power source of any equipment, machine, tool, or process to be set-up,

adjusted, repaired, serviced, installed, or where maintenance work is to be
performed and unintended motion or release of energy could cause personal
injury, such a power source shall be locked out by each employee doing the
work. Sources of energy, such as springs, air, hydraulic and steam shall be
evaluated in advance to determine whether to retain or relieve the pressure prior
to starting the work.
B.
Safety locks are for the personal protection of the employees and are only to be
used for locking out equipment.
11
V.
C.
Safety locks, adapters, and "Danger Tags" can be obtained from a supervisor.
D.
Equipment locks and adapters can be obtained from a supervisor. The sole
purpose of the "Equipment" lock and adaptor is to protect the equipment during
periods of time when work has been suspended or interrupted. The locks are not
to be used as a substitute for the employee's personal safety lock.
E.
Personal locks shall contain a tag with employee's name on it.
F.
One key of every lock issued shall be retained by the employee to whom it was
issued and the only other key to the lock shall be retained by the superintendent.
G.
Employees shall request assistance from their supervisor if they are unsure of
where or how to lockout equipment.
H.
Any questions concerning the lockout procedure should be directed to the

employee's supervisor.
LOCKING OUT AND ISOLATING THE POWER SOURCE

A.
Equipment, machines, or processing main disconnect switches shall be turned off

and locked in the off position only after the electrical power is shut off at the point
of operator control. Failure to follow this procedure may cause arching and
possibly an explosion.
B.
Equipment/tools connected to over a 110 volt source of power by a plug-in cord

shall have a locking device applied to the plug attached to the cord leading to the
machine to be considered locked out.
C.
Equipment/tools connected to a 110 volt source of power by a plug-in cord shall

be considered locked out if the plug is disconnected and tagged with a "do not
start tag."
D.
After locking out power source, the employee shall try the equipment, machine,
or process controls to ensure no unintended motion will occur; or test the
equipment, machine or process by use of appropriate test equipment to
determine that the energy isolation has been effective.
E.
When two or more employees work on the same equipment, each is responsible
for attaching his/her lock. Safety locks and adapters are to be fixed on levers,
switches, valves, etc. in the non-operative (off) position.
F.
An employee who is assigned to a job and upon arrival finds an "Equipment

Lock," "Adaptor," and "Danger Tag" affixed to the equipment shall take the
following action:
1.
Affix his/her personal lock to the "Equipment Adaptor."
12
VI.
VII.
2.
Determine who placed the equipment out of service and contact all parties
who have locks on the equipment to determine if the assignment to be
performed would affect their safety. The assignment will proceed only if
safe to do so with all parties involved.
3.
Try the controls to ensure no unintended motion will occur before starting
work or qualified personnel shall test the equipment, machine, or process
by use of appropriate test equipment to determine that the energy
isolation has been effective. (Such testing equipment is only to be
employed by trained qualified personnel.)
PERFORMING TEST AND ADJUSTMENTS DURING LOCKOUT

A.
Power may be turned on when it is required to perform tests or adjustments. All

of the rules pertaining to removing locks and restoring power shall be followed.
The equipment or process shall again be locked out if it is necessary to continue
work after completing the test or adjustments.
B.
If the employee leaves the job before its completion, such as job reassignment,
the employee shall remove his/her personal lock and adaptor and replace it with
an "Equipment" lock and adaptor. In addition, the employee will prepare and
attach a "Danger Tag" indicating the reason the equipment is locked out (should
more than one employee be assigned to the job, the last employee removing
his/her lock will be responsible for affixing the "Equipment" lock, adaptor and the
"Danger Tag").
C.
Upon completion of the work, each employee will remove his/her lock, rendering
the machine operable when the last lock is removed.
D.
The employee responsible for removing the last lock, before doing so, shall
assure that all guards have been replaced, the equipment, machine, or process
is cleared for operation, and appropriate personnel notified that power is being
restored. This employee is also responsible for removing the "Equipment" lock
and returning it to the supervisor.
EMERGENCY SAFETY LOCK REMOVAL

A.
The superintendent, or other designated management person, will be authorized

to remove an employee's lock under the following conditions:
1.
Receipt of a written request signed by the appropriate supervisor which

shall state the reason the employee is not able to remove the lock.
2.
The supervisor is responsible for making certain all the requirements for
restoring power are followed.
13
CONFINED SPACE ENTRY
It is the responsibility of contractors to educate their employees on confined space entry. No

employee shall enter areas defined below without authorization:
1.
A space that is NOT DESIGNED FOR CONTINUOUS employee OCCUPANCY
2.
Is large enough and so configured that a person can bodily enter into and perform
assigned work
3.
Has LIMITED or RESTRICTED means for ENTRY or EXIT
4. May have a POSSIBLE HAZARDOUS ATMOSPHERE that may expose employees to the
risk of death, incapacitation, impairment of ability to self rescue caused by:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Flammable gas
Airborne combustible dust
Atmospheric oxygen concentration below 19.5 or above 23.5%
A toxic atmosphere or substance
Danger of engulfment
UNTIL AN AUTHORIZED PERSON EVALUATES THE AREA AND AUTHORIZES ENTRY.
14
MIOSHA/CET-5530 (12/04)
GENERAL CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PROCEDURE
1.
There shall be no unauthorized entry into a confined space by any person.
2.
An authorized person shall examine, test and evaluate a potential entry space and
determine if it is a "NON-PERMIT SPACE" and meets the following requirements:
A.
B.
It does NOT contain any atmospheric hazards or dangers of engulfment capable of

causing death or serious physical harm;
The space has been PROVEN SAFE, has been VERIFIED, DOCUMENTED, and has
a CERTIFIED GUARANTEE of a safe environment.
3.
If the conditions in #2 have been satisfied, the ALTERNATE ENTRY

PROCEDURE may be followed.
4.
If conditions in #2 are not met and has any of the following, the PERMIT ENTRY
PROCEDURE must be followed:
THE SPACE:
A.
B.
C.
D.
Contains or has a potential to contain a HAZARDOUS ATMOSPHERE.

Contains a material that has a potential for ENGULFING an entrant.
Has an internal configuration such that an entrant could be trapped or asphyxiated by
inwardly converging wall or by a floor which slopes downward and tapers to a
smaller cross section; or
Contains any other recognized serious safety or health hazard.
15
MIOSHA/CET-5530 (12/04)
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
In case of an emergency on site the following procedures should be instituted at each site:
1.
Method of communication should be determined at each site, telephone, radio, etc.
2.
Emergency telephone numbers should be posted:

a.
b.
c.
Police
Fire
Medical Response Team
3.
Post near communication station the address of your site.
4.
Post names of first aid responders on site.
5.
Designate person to direct emergency crews to site of emergency.
6.
Instruction to each employee if known harmful plants, reptiles, animals, or insects, are
present regarding all of the following:
a.
b.
c.
The potential hazards.

How to avoid injury.
Applicable first aid procedures to be used in the event of injury.
16
MIOSHA/CET-5530 (12/04)
CARING FOR BITES AND STINGS
Insect Bites
Signals
Spider Bite /
Scorpion Sting
Bite Mark
Marine Life
Snake Bites
Stings
Possible marks Bite Mark
Animal Bites
Pain
Swelling
Pain
Pain
Bleeding
Swelling
Pain
Swelling
Possible allergic
reaction
Nausea and vomiting
Possible
allergic
reaction
Wash wound
If bleeding is minor
wash wound
Stinger may be
present
Difficulty breathing or
swallowing
Care
Remove stinger
scrape it away or
use tweezers
Wash wound
Wash wound
Get medical care to

receive antivenin
Apply a cold pack
Cover
Apply a cold pack
Watch for signals
of allergic reaction
Call local emergency

number, if necessary
Initially, soak
area in salt
water
Apply cold
pack or paste
of baking soda
or meat
tenderizer
Call local
emergency
number, if
necessary
Bite Mark
Keep bitten
part still, and
lower than the
heart
Call local
emergency
number
Control bleeding
Apply antibiotic
ointment
Cover
Get medical
attention if wound
bleeds severely or
if you suspect
animal has rabies
Call local
emergency number
or contact animal
control personnel
17
MIOSHA/CET-5530 (12/04)
Hazard Communication Program

General
The following hazard communication program has been established for Kasco, Inc.
This program will be available for review by all employees.
Hazard Determination
Kasco, Inc. will rely on material safety data sheets obtained from product suppliers to meet
hazard determination requirements.
Labeling
A. The job site superintendant will be responsible for seeing that all containers entering the
workplace are properly labeled.
B. All labels shall be checked for:
1. Identity of the material
2. Appropriate hazard warning for the material
3. Name and address of the responsible party (only if the container is received from the
manufacturer, distributor, or importer)
C. Each supervisor shall be responsible for ensuring that all portable containers used in
their work area are labeled with the appropriate identity and hazard warning.
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)
A. Geoff Hutchison will be responsible for compiling and maintaining the master MSDS file.
The file will be kept at the main office.
B. Additional copies of MSDSs for employee use are located at each job site.
C. MSDSs will be available for review to all employees during each work shift. Copies will
be available upon request.
D. Posters identifying the person responsible for maintaining MSDSs and where the
MSDSs are located are posted at the main office. Posters notifying employees when
new or revised MSDSs are received will be located in the same location.
E. If a required MSDS is not received, Geoff Hutchison shall contact the
supplier, in writing, to request the MSDS. If an MSDS is not received after two such
requests,
Geoff Hutchison shall contact the MIOSHA's Construction Safety and Health Division at
(517) 322-1856 or General Industry Safety and Health Division (GISHD) at (517) 3221831, for assistance in obtaining the MSDS.
The MIOSHA program does not maintain a library of MSDSs. However, either of the
above divisions will assist an employee in obtaining a copy of an MSDS by contacting
their employer.
18
MIOSHA/CET-5530 (12/04)
Employee Information and Training

A. Geoff Hutchison shall coordinate and maintain records of employee hazard
communication training, including attendance rosters.
B. Before their initial work assignment, each new employee will attend a hazard
communication training class. The class will provide the following information and
training:
Information:
Requirements of the MIOSHA Hazard Communication Standard
All operations in their work area where hazardous chemicals are present
Location and availability of the written hazard communication program, the list of
hazardous chemicals, and the MSDS
Training:
Methods and observations that can be used to detect the presence or release of
hazardous chemicals in the work area
Physical and health hazards of the hazardous chemicals
Measures the employees should take to protect from these hazards
Details of the hazard communication program--including explanation of labeling
system and MSDSs and how employees can obtain and use hazard information
C. The employee shall be informed that:
1. The employer is prohibited from discharging, or discriminating against, an employee
who exercises his/her rights to obtain information regarding hazardous chemicals
used in the workplace.
2. As an alternative to requesting an MSDS from the employer, the employee can seek
assistance from the MIOSHA Construction Safety and Health Division, at (517) 3221856, or the MIOSHA General Industry Safety and Health Division at (517) 3221831, to obtain the desired MSDS. A sign or MIOSHA poster will be posted with the
address and telephone number of the MIOSHA Divisions responsible for such
requests.
D. Before any new physical or health hazard is introduced into the workplace, each
employee who may be exposed to the substance will be given information in the same
manner as during the hazard communication training class.
Hazardous Non-routine Tasks
A. Occasionally, employees are required to perform non-routine tasks (i.e., clean reactor
vessels, enter confined spaces, etc.). Prior to starting work in such areas, each
employee will be given information about the hazards of the area or procedure. This
information will include:
1. Specific chemical hazards
2. Protection/safety measures the employee can take to lessen risks of performing the
task
3. Measures the company has taken to eliminate or control the hazard, including:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
air monitoring
ventilation requirements
use of respirators
use of attendants to observe procedures
emergency procedures
19
It is the policy of Kasco, Inc. that no employee will begin performance of a non-routine task
without first receiving appropriate safety and health training.
B. Hazardous non-routine tasks we have at our facility include: List hazardous non-routine
tasks.
Multi-Employer Worksites -- Informing Contractors

A. If our company exposes any employee of another employer to any hazardous chemicals
that we produce, use, or store, the following information will be supplied to that
employer:
1. The hazardous chemicals they may encounter
2. Measures their employees can take to control or eliminate exposure to the
hazardous chemicals
3. The container and pipe labeling system used on-site
4. Where applicable MSDSs can be reviewed or obtained
B. Periodically, our employees may potentially be exposed to hazardous chemicals brought
on our site by another employer. When this occurs we will obtain from that employer
information pertaining to the types of chemicals brought on-site, and measures that
should be taken to control or eliminate exposure to the chemicals.
C. It is the responsibility of Geoff Hutchison to ensure that such information is provided
and/or obtained prior to any services being performed by the off-site employer. To
ensure that this is done the following mechanism will be followed: List all method(s)
used to ensure the required information is provided or obtained.
Pipes and Piping Systems

Information on the hazardous contents of pipes and piping systems will be identified by: List
means of identification for pipes and piping systems (i.e., label, sign, placard, written
operating
instructions, process sheet, batch ticket, etc.). Natural gas, steam and
compressed air lines (with
pressures exceeding 25 psig) must be identified in all
industrial facilities. ANSI A13.1-1981
recommends the following colorations: blue
for low-medium pressure oxygen and compressed air
lines, yellow for variable-high
pressure oxygen and compressed air lines, and yellow for acetylene
and natural gas
lines.
List of Hazardous Chemicals
A list of all hazardous chemicals used by Kasco, Inc. and our subcontractors will be
developed as necessary per job. Further information regarding any of these chemicals can
be obtained by reviewing its respective MSDS.
Materials which can be purchased by the ordinary household consumer, and which are used
in the same fashion and amount as by the ordinary household consumer, are not required to
be included in this list. (It is suggested that you maintain a separate list of all materials you
consider to be "consumer use" materials.)
20
Hazardous Chemical List
21
MIOSHA
CONSTRUCTION SAFETY STANDARDS
1. MASONRY WALL BRACING
2. PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
3. WELDING AND CUTTING
4. EXCAVATION AND SHORING
5. LADDERS
6. SCAFFOLD
7. FIRE PROTECTION
8. GUARDING OF WALKS AND WORKSITE
9. FALL PROTECTION
10. KASCO SAFETY CHECKLISTS
1
MASONRY WALL BRACING
MIOSHA-STD-1302 (08/05)
3 Pages
DEPARTMENT OF LABOR & ECONOMIC GROWTH

DIRECTOR'S OFFICE
Filed with the Secretary of State on November 15, 1989
These rules take effect 15 days after filing with the Secretary of State
(By authority conferred on the director of the department of consumer and industry services by sections 19 and 21 of Act No. 154 of the
Public Acts of 1974, as amended, and Executive Reorganization Order No. 1996-2, being 408.1019, 408.1021 and 445.2001 of the
Michigan Compiled Laws)
Visit our website at: www.Michigan.gov/mioshastandards
PART 2. MASONRY WALL BRACING

TABLE OF CONTENTS
R 408.40201 Scope. ................................................................ 1
R 408.40202 Applicability......................................................... 1
R 408.40203 Definitions; C to U............................................... 1
R 408.40204 Maximum unsupported height tables. ................. 1
R 408.40205 Wind velocity; determination by qualified person.2
R 408.40206 Wall bracing design. ........................................... 2
GENERAL PROVISIONS
R 408.40201 Scope.
Rule 201. This part pertains to the temporary bracing of
unsupported masonry walls during construction which are
exposed to wind forces.
R 408.40202 Applicability.
Rule 202. This part is designed to ensure a safe work
environment for all personnel on the construction site through
the use of temporary bracing of unsupported masonry walls.
The requirements of this part are as follows:
(a) Identifying masonry walls requiring temporary bracing
(R 408.40204(1)).
(b) Proposing an acceptable temporary bracing system
(R 408.40207).
(c) Vacating the collapse area during winds of 35 mph or
more (R 408.40204(9) and R 408.40205).
(d) Standard sign requirements for collapse areas (R
408.40208), which are all designed to prevent onsite
injury. While winds of more than 35 mph may cause
collapse of walls braced in accordance with this part,
compliance with all of the other provisions of this
same part will ensure that no one will be within the
collapse area.
R 408.40203 Definitions; C to U.
Rule 203. (1) Cavity wall means a masonry wall with a
continuous insulated or uninsulated air space of 2 to 4 1/2
inches between wythes that are connected with rigid metal ties.
(2) Collapse area means that area which is within the
height of the wall, plus 4 feet, measured at right angles to the
wall on both sides.
(3) Composite wall means a bonded masonry wall with
2 or more wythes of different masonry units.
R 408.40207 Typical wall bracing system................................ 2

R 408.40208 Signing. .............................................................. 3
R 408.40209 Inspection........................................................... 3
R 408.40210 Wall bracing system; responsibility for installation;
responsibility for replacing system and danger signs.............. 3
(4) Qualified person means a person who, by

knowledge, training, or experience, has the ability to solve or
resolve problems relating to the subject matter or the work.
(5) Single wythe hollow masonry means a masonry wall
1 unit in thickness made up of units with bearing surfaces that
are less than 75% solid.
(6) Solid masonry unit means a masonry unit with
bearing surfaces that are 75% or more solid.
(7) Unsupported masonry wall means a masonry wall
that has not obtained its final lateral stability from design
features when required, such as roofs, floors, buttresses,
crosswalls, and piers.
R 408.40204 Maximum unsupported height tables.
Rule 204. (1) The maximum unsupported height of a
masonry wall shall not be more than the height shown in tables
2 to 5 of this rule. Unbraced walls exceeding the heights
specified in these tables are in imminent danger of collapse.
(2) The exposure to which a wall is subjected for use in
tables 2 to 5 shall be determined from table 1, which reads as
follows:
TABLE 1
Exposure Selection
Exposure
A
(3)
(4)
Example
Center of large cities and very
rough hilly terrain.
B
Suburban areas, towns, city
outskirts, wooded areas, and rolling
terrain.
C
Flat, open country, open flat
coastal belts, and grasslands.
Exposure A shall not be used in Michigan.
Table 2 reads as follows:
2
R 408.40205 Wind velocity; determination by qualified
person.
Rule 205. For the purpose of this part, the wind velocity
shall be determined by a qualified person.
TABLE 2
Single Wythe Hollow Masonry
Maximum Unsupported Height
Width of
Wall
Minimum
Weight psf
Exposure B
(1)
6 ft.
6 ft.
7 ft.
10 ft.
14 ft.
24 ft.
4 in.
25
6 in.
34
8 in.
40
10 in.
48
12 in.
56
16 in.
75
*See subrule (8) of this rule.
(5)
Exposure C
(2)
(2 ft.)*
(5 ft.)*
(7 ft.)*
(10 ft.)*
(14 ft.)*
(24 ft.)*
(1)
6 ft.
6 ft.
6 ft.
6 ft.
9 ft.
16 ft.
(2)
(1 ft.)*
(2.5 ft.)*
(4 ft.)*
(6 ft.)*
(9 ft.)*
(16 ft.)*

TABLE 3
Solid Brick Walls
Width of Wall
Minimum
Weight psf
4 in.
40
8 in.
80
12 in.
120
16 in.
160
(6)
Exposure B
(1)
6 ft.
12 ft.
20 ft.
26 ft.
Exposure C
(2)
(3 ft.)*
(12 ft.)*
(20 ft.)*
(26 ft.)*
(1)
6 ft.
8 ft.
19 ft.
26 ft.
(2)
(2 ft.)*
(8 ft.)*
(19 ft.)*
(26 ft.)*
TABLE 4
Composite Walls 4-inch Brick and Hollow Block Units
(Various Widths)
Width of
Wall
Total
Brick
Block
8 in.
4 in.
4 in.
10 in.
4 in.
6 in.
12 in.
4 in.
8 in.
14 in.
4 in.
10 in.
16 in.
4 in.
12 in.
(7)
Exposure B
Min.
Weight
psf
(1)
9 ft.
13 ft.
16 ft.
19 ft.
26 ft.
65
74
80
88
96
Exposure C
(2)
(9 ft.)*
(13 ft.)*
(16 ft.)*
(19 ft.)*
(26 ft.)
(1)
6 ft.
9 ft.
11 ft.
14 ft.
17 ft.
(2)
(5 ft.)*
(9 ft.)*
(11 ft.)*
(14 ft.)*
(17 ft.)*
TABLE 5
Cavity Walls 4-inch Brick and Hollow Block Units
(Various Widths)
Wall Section
Brick + Block
Minimum
Weight psf
4 in.
4 in.
4 in.
6 in.
4 in.
8 in.
4 in.
10 in.
4 in.
12 in.
65
74
80
88
96

Exposure B
Exposure C
(1)
6 ft.
6 ft.
8 ft.
11 ft.
27 ft.
(2)
(2.5 ft.)*
(5 ft.)*
(8 ft.)*
(11 ft.)*
(27 ft.)*
(1)
6 ft.
6 ft.
6 ft.
7 ft.
18 ft.
(2)
(1.5 ft.)*
(2.5 ft.)*
(4.5 ft.)*
(7 ft.)*
(18 ft.)*
(8) If employees within the collapse area are working

from elevations that are lower than the bottom elevator of the
wall, the maximum unsupported height of a masonry wall shall
be determined from values given in column (2) of tables 2 to 5.
(9) No one shall be permitted within the collapse area of
an unbraced or braced wall subjected to winds of more than 35
miles per hour.
R 408.40206 Wall bracing design.

Rule 206. (1) When the height of a masonry wall exceeds
the maximum unsupported height as shown in tables 2 to 5 of
R 408.40204, the masonry wall shall be braced on both sides
upon completion. Crosswalls are acceptable instead of bracing
an interior wall if the crosswalls are not spaced more than 20
feet apart. If crosswalls are spaced more than 20 feet apart,
wall bracing in accordance with the requirements shall be
provided.
(2) On masonry projects that require temporary bracing,
the wall bracing system shall be determined before a masonry
wall exceeds the maximum unsupported height limits specified
in tables 2 to 5 of R 408.40204.
(3) The wall bracing system for a masonry wall shall be
designed by a qualified person in accordance with acceptable
engineering practices or as prescribed in this part and shall be
capable of providing stability to the wall for a wind with a
velocity of 35 miles per hour.
(4) If pilasters, buttresses, or other reinforcing is part of
the wall design, the unsupported height of walls according to
tables 2 to 5 of R 408.40204 may be exceeded by complying
with accepted engineering practices. Calculations or plans and
specifications shall be available at the jobsite.
(5) If scaffolding, because of work operations, remains
erected on 1 side of the completed wall, the collapse area shall
be identified and marked. No one shall be permitted within the
collapse area when the wind velocity is more than 35 miles per
hour.
(6) The height of a masonry wall above the intersection of
the diagonal support with the vertical plane of the wall shall not
be more than the maximum unsupported height as shown in
tables 2 thru 5 of R 408.40204.
R 408.40207 Typical wall bracing system.
Rule 207. (1) A typical wall brace may consist of 4
essential parts as follows:
(a) A 16-foot, 2-inch by 10-inch vertical upright.
(b) A 16-foot, 2-inch by 10-inch diagonal strut.
(c) A 2-inch by 4-inch stiffner.
(d) A deadman.
(2) The angle of intersection of the 16-foot, 2-inch by 10inch diagonal strut and the ground should be between 35
degrees and 45 degrees and the diagonal strut should not
intersect the vertical brace below the midpoint of the masonry
wall.
(3) When using this typical wall brace, the total wall
bracing system shall be designed in accordance with the
provisions of this rule and R 408.40206.
(4) Other materials and designs may be used in the
construction of a wall bracing system if the design
requirements of this rule and R 408.40206 are met.
(5) The following figure is an example of a typical wall
brace.
FIGURE 1
Typical Wall Brace for Masonry Wall
this rule are only required for the unscaffolded portions of the
wall.
(4) The danger sign shall be placed in a conspicuous
location either on the wall or anywhere within the collapse
area.
(5) The danger signs shall be maintained in place and in
a legible condition until the masonry wall is permanently
supported.
(6) A danger sign as required by subrule (1) or (2) of this
rule shall comply with all of the following requirements:
(a) Be 10 inches in height by 14 inches wide.
(b) Have the word DANGER in white characters which
are, 2 1/6 inches high and which appear within a red
oval which is 4 1/8 inches high by 11 7/8 inches long
and which is in the top 1/2 of the sign.
(c) Have the lower 1/2 of the sign state, This
Unsupported Wall is Unstable in Windy Conditions.
(7) An illustration of a danger sign which compiles with
the requirements of subrule (6) of this rule is shown in the
following figure:
FIGURE 2
(6) The maximum spacing for typical exterior wall bracing

shall not be more than 20 feet. Table 6 specifies typical
exterior wall bracing requirements and reads as follows:
TABLE 6
Typical Exterior Wall
8 inch wall ............................. 18 feet maximum height
12 inch wall .............................. 22 feet maximum height
R 408.40208 Signing.
Rule 208. (1) Each unsupported masonry wall that is more
than 6 feet in height, braced or unbraced, and 50 feet or less in
length shall be posted with a danger sign on each side of the
wall.
(2) Each unsupported masonry wall that is more than 6
feet in height, braced or unbraced, and more than 50 feet in
length, shall be posted with danger signs at each end of the
wall and at intervals of not more than 100 feet along each side
of the wall.
(3) When scaffolding is in place along an unsupported
masonry wall, the posting requirements of subrule (1) or (2) of
R 408.40209 Inspection.
Rule 209. An unsupported masonry wall, including the wall
bracing system, shall be inspected for damage by a qualified
person after each windstorm if the wind velocity was more than
35 miles per hour. If any movement of the wall or other
physical damage, including damage to the wall bracing system,
is found, only those persons repairing the wall or wall bracing
system shall be permitted to work within the collapse area until
repairs have been made.
R 408.40210 Wall bracing system; responsibility for
installation; responsibility for replacing
system and danger signs.
Rule 210. The masonry contractor shall be responsible for
the initial installation of the wall bracing system. After a wall
bracing system and danger signs have been installed in
accordance with the provisions of this part, any party, including
a subcontractor, general contractor, or owner, who alters or
removes the bracing system or danger signs shall be
responsible for replacing the bracing system and danger signs
in accordance with the provisions of this part.
2
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE
EQUIPMENT
MIOSHA-STD-1126 (06/04)
15 Pages

DIRECTOR'S OFFICE
GENERAL INDUSTRY SAFETY STANDARDS
Filed with the Secretary of State on March 2, 1983 (as amended November 15, 1989)
(as amended May 31, 1995) (as amended May 14, 1997)
These rules take effect 15 days after filing with the Secretary of State.
(By authority conferred on the director of the department of consumer and industry services by sections 16 and 21 of
Act No. 154 of the Public Acts of 1974, as amended, and Executive Reorganization Order No. 1996-2, being 408.1016,
408.1021, and 445.2001 of the Michigan Compiled Laws)
R 408.13311, R 408.13312, R 408.13350, R 408.13370, R 408.13372, R 408.13383, R 408.13385, R 408.13387, R 408.13390
and R 408.13394, of the Michigan Administrative Code, appearing on pages 359 and 360 of the 1983 Annual Supplement to
the 1979 Michigan Administrative Code and pages 839 to 853 of the 1995 Annual Supplement to the Code, are amended to
read as follows:
Visit our website at: www.michigan.gov/mioshastandards
PART 33. PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

TABLE OF CONTENTS
R 408.13301. Scope. ............................................................ 1
R 408.13302. Definitions; A to E........................................... 1
R 408.13303. Definitions; F, G.............................................. 2
R 408.13304. Definitions; H, I. .............................................. 2
R 408.13305. Definitions; L to R. .......................................... 2
R 408.13306. Definitions; S to W.......................................... 2
R 408.13308. Hazard assessment and
equipment selection....................................................... 3
R 408.13309. Training. ......................................................... 3
R 408.13310. Employers and employees responsibilities. .. 3
R 408.13311. Certification. ................................................... 3
R 408.13312. Face and eye protection generally. ................ 3
R 408.13313. Maintenance and cleanliness of protectors. ... 6
R 408.13320. Purposes, types, styles, and marking. ............ 6
R 408.13321. Rigid helmet bodies........................................ 6
R 408.13322. Rigid helmet headgear or cradles................... 7
R 408.13323. Rigid helmet headgear substitutes. ................ 7
R 408.13324. Rigid helmet filter plates. ................................ 7
R 408.13325. Nonrigid helmets. ........................................... 7
R 408.13327. Hand shield. ................................................... 7
R 408.13329. Helmet and hand shield lift fronts
and chin rests. ............................................................... 7
R 408.13330. Helmet snoods, neck protectors, and aprons. 7
R 408.13332. Effect of head protection standards. ............... 7
R 408.13340. Purposes and uses......................................... 7
R 408.13342. Types and materials. ...................................... 8
R 408.13343. Components. .................................................. 8
R 408.13344. Windows......................................................... 8
R 408.13345. Headgear........................................................ 8
R 408.13346. Crown and chin protectors.............................. 8
R 408.13347. Marking; special operating conditions. ........... 8
R 408.13350. Prescription lenses. ........................................ 8
R 408.13352. Materials......................................................... 9
R 408.13353. Lenses. ...........................................................9

R 408.13355. Eyecup goggles; components. ........................9
R 408.13356. Eyecup goggles; types and models. ...............9
R 408.13357. Eyecup goggles; fit..........................................9
R 408.13359. Eyecup ventilation...........................................9
R 408.13360. Eyecup lenses and retaining rings. .................9
R 408.13362. Flexible and cushioned fitting
goggles; construction. ....................................................9
R 408.13363. Flexible and cushioned fitting goggles;
protection. ......................................................................9
marking. .........................................................................9
R 408.13366. Foundrymens goggles; construction. ...........10
R 408.13367 Foundrymens goggles; protection. ................10
R 408.13369. Metal, plastic, and combination
metal and plastic spectacles. .......................................10
R 408.13370. Head protection generally. ............................10
R 408.13372. Head protection; adoption of
standards by reference.................................................10
R 408.13375. Protective helmets. .......................................10
R 408.13376. Hoods. ..........................................................11
R 408.13378. Hair enclosures. ............................................11
R 408.13383. Certification. ..................................................11
R 408.13384. Toe protection. ..............................................11
R 408.13385. Foot protection generally. .............................11
R 408.13386. Foot protection; specific requirements. .........11
R 408.13387. Electrical protective equipment; design;
certification; use; storage. ............................................11
R 408.13390. General requirements; safety belts, safety
harnesses, lifelines, and lanyards generally.................14
R 408.13392. Hand protection generally. ............................15
R 408.13394. Body protection. ............................................15
R 408.13398. Rescission.....................................................15
GENERAL PROVISIONS
ways, and methods for the proper selection and safe use of
this equipment.
R 408.13301. Scope.
Rule 3301. This standard shall apply to all places of
employment in this state and includes requirements by the
employer and use by the employee of personal protective
equipment and provides reasonable and adequate means,
R 408.13302. Definitions; A to E.
Rule 3302. (1) Absorptive lens means a filter lens
whose physical properties are designed to attenuate the
effect of glare, reflective, and stray light.
2
(2) Apparatus means electrical equipment.
(3) Bare hand technique means a method of working on
energized conductors by isolating the employee from any
ground potential and by placing the employee in continuous
firm contact with the energized electric field.
(4) Bump hat or cap means a device worn on the head
to protect the wearer from bumps or blows but which does
not meet the requirements of class A, B, C, and D protective
helmets.
(5) Conductor means a material, such as a bus bar,
wire, or cable, suitable for carrying an electric current.
(6) Corrective lens means a lens ground to the wearers
individual prescription.
(7) Cover lens means a removable disc or colorless
glass, plastic-coated glass, or plastic that covers a filter lens
and protects it from weld spatter, pitting, or scratching when
used in a goggle.
(8) Cover plate means a removable pane of colorless
glass, plastic-coated glass, or plastic that covers a filter plate
and protects it from weld spatter, pitting, or scratching when
used in a helmet, hood, or goggle.
(9) Electrical worker means an operational or
maintenance employee working on electrical conductors or
equipment, except mining and construction operations.
(10) Energized, sometimes known as live, means to
be electrically charged, or that to which voltage is being
applied.
(11) Eye size means a measurement expressed in
millimeters and denoting the size of the lens-holding section
of an eye frame.
R 408.13303. Definitions; F, G.
Rule 3303. (1) Face shield means a device worn in front
of the eyes and a portion or all of the face, whose
predominant function is protection of the eyes and face.
(2) Filter lens means removable disc in the eyecup of a
goggle that absorbs varying proportions of the ultraviolet,
visible, and infrared rays according to the composition and
density of the lens.
(3) Filter plate means a removable pane in the window
of a helmet, hood, or goggle that absorbs varying proportions
of the ultraviolet, visible, and infrared rays according to the
composition and density of the plate.
(4) Foot or toe protection means a device or equipment,
such as, but not limited to, safety toe footwear, toe
protectors, or foot guards, that protects an employees foot or
toes against injury.
(5) Goggle means a device with contour-shaped
eyecups or facial contact with glass or plastic lenses, worn
over the eyes and held in place by a headband or other
suitable means for the protection of the eyes and eye
sockets.
R 408.13304. Definitions; H, I.
Rule 3304. (1) Hair enclosure means a hat, cap, or hair
net specifically designed to protect the wearer from hair
entanglement in moving machinery.
(2) Headband means that part of a goggle, helmet, or
hood suspension consisting of a supporting band that
encircles the head.
(3) Headgear means that part of a protective helmet,
hood, or face shield that supports the device on the wearers
head, usually consisting of a headband and crown strap.
(4) Hood means a device that is worn to provide
protection against acids, chemicals, abrasives, and
temperature extremes and entirely encloses the whole head
including face, neck, and shoulders. Air line hoods and hoods
used to protect wearers from inhalation or harmful
atmospheres are not included in this part.
(5) Interpupillary distance means the distance in

millimeters between the centers of the pupils of the eyes.
(6) Inservice load means an imposed physical load on a
safety belt or harness from a free fall of more than 3 feet.
(7) Insulated barrier means a separation from another
conducting surface by a dielectric substance or air space.
(8) Isolated means that all energized conductors or the
exposed energized parts of equipment are isolated from the
work area by an insulated barrier. Conductors may be
isolated by moving them out of reaching distance by use of
hot line tools.
R 408.13305. Definitions; L to R.
Rule 3305. (1) Lanyard means a tether attached to a
safety belt or harness at one end and to a lifeline or a fixed
object at the other.
(2) Lens means the transparent glass or plastic device
through which a wearer of protective goggles or spectacles
sees.
(3) Lifeline means a rope line, except where used in tree
trimming, attached at one end to a fixed object or attended by
a person and to which a safety belt or lanyard is secured.
(4) Lift front means a type of mounting frame for a
welding helmet, hood, or goggles which is made of 2
connected parts: the front part, which may be removed from
the line of vision, contains the high density filter plate with its
cover plate, and the back part, which is fixed to the helmet,
contains a low density or clear impact resistant plate.
(5) Plano lens means a lens which does not incorporate
correction.
(6) Protective helmet protective hat or cap, or safety
hat or cap means a rigid device, often referred to as a safety
cap or hat, that is worn to provide protection for the head or
portions thereof against impact, flying particles, or electric
shock, or any combination thereof, and which is held in place
by a suitable suspension.
(7) Protector means a device that provides eye or face
protection against the hazards of processes encountered in
employment.
(8) Radiant energy or radiation means the 3 kinds of
radiant energy which are pertinent to this standard:
(a) Ultraviolet.
(b) Visible light.
(c) Infrared.
(9) Reaching distance means the employees reach as
extended by a conductive material or equipment.
R 408.13306. Definitions; S to W.
Rule 3306. (1) Safety belt means a belt worn around
the waist and capable of restraining a pull or fall of an
employee.
(2) Safety harness means a belt with a shoulder strap
worn around the waist and shoulder and capable of
restraining a pull or fall of an employee.
(3) Safety strap means a restraining line secured at both
ends to a safety belt or harness to hold an employee to a
fixed object.
(4) Safety toe footwear means footwear containing a
safety toe box of steel or equivalent material capable of
meeting the requirements of this part.
(5) Sanitizing means an act or process of destroying
organisms that may cause disease.
(6) Shield means a device to be held in the hand, or
supported without the aid of the operator, whose
predominant function is protection of the eyes and face.
(7) Side shield means a device of metal, plastic, or other
material fixed to a spectacle lens frame to protect an eye
from side exposure.
3
(8) Snood means a flexible attachment to the back of a
hood or helmet for protection against injury to the back of the
head and neck.
(9) Spectacle means a device patterned after
conventional-type spectacle eyewear, but of more substantial
construction, with or without side shields, and with plano or
corrective impact resistant lenses of clear or absorptive filter
glass or plastic.
(10) Supplier means a manufacturer or an authorized
dealer representative.
(11) Temple means that part of a spectacle or other
protector extending to and dropping behind the ear of the
wearer and intended to position the device before the eyes.
(12) Temple length means the measured length of a
temple designated in inches.
(13) Working gloves means gloves used as personal
protective equipment to protect an employee from injuries on
the job.
R 408.13308. Hazard
assessment
and
equipment
selection.
Rule 3308. (1) An employer shall assess the workplace
to determine if hazards that necessitate the use of personal
protective equipment are present, or are likely to be present.
If the hazards are present or are likely to be present then the
employer shall do all of the following:
(a) Select, and have each affected employee use, the
types of personal protective equipment that will
protect the affected employee from the hazards
identified in the hazard assessment.
(b) Communicate selection decisions to each affected
employee.
(c) Select the personal protective equipment that
properly fits each affected employee.
(2) An employer shall verify that the required workplace
hazard assessment has been performed through a written
certification which identifies the document as a certification of
hazard assessment and which specifies all of the following
information:
(a) The workplace evaluated.
(b) The person who certifies that the evaluation has
been performed.
(c) The date of the hazard assessment.
(3) Defective or damaged personal protective equipment
shall not be used.
R 408.13309. Training.
Rule 3309. (1) An employer shall provide training to each
employee who is required by this part to use personal
protective equipment. Each employee who is required by this
part to use personal protective equipment shall be trained in
all of the following areas:
(a) When personal protective equipment is necessary.
(b) What personal protective equipment is necessary.
(c) How to properly don, doff, adjust, and wear the
personal protective equipment.
(d) The limitations of the equipment.
(e) The useful life of the equipment and the proper
care, maintenance, and disposal of the equipment.
(2) Each affected employee shall demonstrate an
understanding of the training specified in subrule (1) of this
rule and the ability to use the equipment properly before
being allowed to perform work requiring the use of personal
protective equipment.
(3) When an employer has reason to believe that any
affected employee who has already been trained does not
have the understanding and skill required by subrule (2) of
this rule, the employer shall retrain the employee. The
existence of any of the following circumstances requires
retraining:
(a)
Changes in the workplace that render previous

training obsolete.
(b) Changes in the types of personal protective
equipment to be used that render previous training
obsolete.
(c) Inadequacies in an affected employees knowledge
or use of assigned personal protective equipment
which indicate that the employee has not retained
the requisite understanding or skill.
(4) An employer shall verify that each affected employee
has received and understood the required training through a
written certification that contains the name of each employee
trained and the date of training and that identifies the subject
of the certification.
R 408.13310. Employers
and
employees
responsibilities.
Rule 3310. (1) An employer shall provide to an
employee, at no expense to the employee, the initial issue of
the type of personal protective equipment which is suitable
for the work to be performed as required by this standard or
any other general industry safety standard, unless
specifically indicated otherwise in this standard or any other
general industry safety standard. The employer shall also
provide replacement equipment if necessary due to wear and
tear on the previous equipment or if the equipment is lost due
to the work environment, unless covered by a collective
bargaining agreement.
(2) An employee shall use all of the personal protective
equipment provided by the employer.
FACE AND EYE PROTECTION

R 408.13311. Certification.
Rule 3311. (1) All eye and face protection devices
purchased after July 5, 1994, shall be in compliance with
occupational and educational eye and face protection of the
American national standards institute standard Z87.1-1989 or
the devices shall be demonstrated by the employer to be
equally effective. The standard is adopted by reference in
these rules and may be purchased from the American
National Standards Institute, 11 West 42 Street, New York,
New York 10036, or from the Safety Standards Division,
Michigan Department of Consumer and Industry Services,
7150 Harris Drive, Box 30643, Lansing, Michigan 48909, at a
cost at the time of adoption of these rules of $18.00.
(2) If it is impractical for eye and face protection devices
to be marked in compliance with ANSI standard Z87.1-1989,
then the containers for eye and face protection shall be in
compliance with the standard.
(3) Eye and face protection devices purchased before
July 5, 1994, shall be in compliance with the ANSI standard
entitled Occupational and Educational Eye and Face
Protection, Z87.1-1968, or the devices shall be
demonstrated by the employer to be equally effective. The
standard is adopted by reference in these rules and may be
purchased from the American National Standards Institute,
11 West 42nd Street, New York, New York 10036, or from the
Safety Standards Division, Michigan Department of
Consumer and Industry Services, Box 30643, Lansing,
Michigan 48909, at a cost at the time of adoption of these
rules of $18.00.
R 408.13312. Face and eye protection generally.
Rule 3312. (1) An employer shall ensure that each
affected employee shall use appropriate eye or face
protection as prescribed in R 408.13311 if a hazard exists
due to any of the following:
(a) Flying objects or particles.
(b) Harmful contacts.
4
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
Exposures.
Molten metal.
Liquid chemicals.
Acids or caustic liquids.
Chemical gases or vapors.
Glare.
Injurious radiation.
Electrical flash.
A combination of the hazards specified in this
subrule.
(2) Table 1 shall be used as a guide to select the proper
eye and face protection. Each affected employee shall use
eye protection that provides side protection when there is a
hazard from flying objects. Detachable side protectors, such
as clip-on or slide-on side shields, that are in compliance with
the pertinent requirements of this rule are acceptable.
(3) Contact lenses or federal drug administration (FDA)

standard hardened or plastic lenses are not eye protection as
required by these rules.
(4) A face or eye protector shall be in compliance with all
of the following minimum requirements:
(a) It shall protect against the particular hazards for
which it is designed.
(b) It shall fit snugly and shall not unduly interfere with
movements of the wearer.
(c) It shall be capable of withstanding sanitizing.
(5) A protector shall be distinctly marked to identify the
manufacturer.
(6) Limitations or precautions indicated by the
manufacturer shall be transmitted to the user and care taken
to see that the limitations or precautions are observed.
(7) Table 1 reads as follows:
NOTES:
(1) Care shall be taken to recognize the possibility of multiple and simultaneous exposure to a variety of hazards. Adequate
protection against the highest level of each of the hazards must be provided.
(2) Operations involving heat may also involve optical radiation. Protection from both hazards shall be provided.
(3) Faceshields shall only be worn over primary eye protection.
(4) Filter lenses shall meet the requirements for shade designations in Table 2.
(5) Persons whose vision requires the use of prescription (Rx) lenses shall wear either protective devices fitted with prescription
(Rx) lenses or protective devices designed to be worn over regular prescription (Rx) eyewear.
(6) Wearers of contact lenses shall also be required to wear appropriate covering eye and face protection devices in a
hazardous environment. It should be recognized that dusty and/or chemical environments may represent an additional hazard to
contact lens wearers.
(7) Caution should be exercised in the use of metal frame protection devices in electrical hazard areas.
(8) Refer to Section 6.5, Special Purpose Lenses. (ANSI Z87.1-1989)
(9) Welding helmets or handshields shall be used only over primary eye protection.
(10) Non-sideshield spectacles are available for frontal protection only.
5
ASSESSMENT
SEE NOTE (1)
I
M
P
A
C
T
H
E
A
T
Chipping, grinding,
machining,
masonry, work,
riveting, and
sanding.
Furnace
operations,
pouring, casting,
hot dipping, gas
cutting, and
welding.
C
H
E
M
I
C
A
L
Acid and chemicals

handling,
degreasing, plating.
D
U
S
T
Woodworking,
buffing, general
dusty conditions.
Flying fragments,
objects, large
chips, particles,
sand, dirt, etc.
Hot sparks
PROTECTOR
TYPE
B, C, D,
E, F, G,
H, I, J,
K, L, N
B, C, D,
E, F, G,
H, I, J,
K, L, N,
Spectacles, goggles,
face shields.
SEE NOTES (1) (3)
(5) (6) (10)
For severe exposure add
N
Face shields, goggles,

spectacles
*For severe exposure
Add N
SEE NOTE (2) (3)
Splash from molten

metals
*N
*Face shields worn over

goggles H, K
High temperature
exposure
Screen face shields,

Reflective face shields.
SEE NOTE (2) (3)
Protective devices do not

provide unlimited
protection.
Spectacles, cup and cover

type goggles not provide
unlimited protection.
SEE NOTE (3)

Ventilation should be
adequate but well
protected from splash
entry.
Irritating mists
Special purpose goggles.
SEE NOTE (3)
Nuisance dust
G, H, K
Goggles, eyecup and

cover types
Atmospheric conditions
and the restricted
ventilation of the protector
can cause lenses to fog.
Frequent cleaning may be
required.
10-14
Welding
Helmets
Or
Welding
Protection from optical

radiation is directly related
to filter lens density. SEE
NOTE (4). Select the
darkest shade that allows
adequate task
performance.
Shields
WELDING:
Gas
J, K, L,
M, N, O,
P, Q
CUTTING
GLARE
SEE NOTE (9)

Welding
Goggles
Or
Welding
Faceshields
3-6
TORCH BRAZING
TORCH SOLDERING
4-8
SEE NOTE (3)
3-4
B, C, D,
E, F, N
A, B
1.5-3
Spectacles
Or
Welding
Faceshield
Spectacle
SEE NOTE (9) (10)
Protectors that do not

provide protection from side
exposure.
SEE NOTE (2)
*For severe exposure

Add N.
Electric Arc

provide protection from side
exposure.
SEE NOTE (10)
Filter or tinted lenses that
restrict light transmittance,
unless it is determined that
a glare hazard exists. Refer
to OPTICAL RADIATION.
*N
TYPICAL
FILTER
LENS
PROSHADE TECTORS
SEE NOTE (9)
NOT RECOMMENDED
SEE NOTE (7)
Goggles, eyecup, and

cover types.
O, P, Q
R
A
D
I
A
T
I
O
N
LIMITATIONS
G, H, K,
Splash
WELDING:
O
P
T
I
C
A
L
PROTECTORS
Shaded or special Purpose

lenses as suitable
SEE NOTE (8)

provide protection from
optical radiation.
SEE NOTE (4)
6
(8) Each affected employee shall use equipment that has
filter lenses which have shade numbers appropriate for the
work being performed for protection from injurious light
radiation. Table 2 is a listing of appropriate shade numbers

for various operations.
TABLE 2
FILTER LENSES FOR PROTECTION AGAINST RADIANT ENERGY
OPERATIONS
Shield metal arc welding
ELECTRODE SIZE
1/32 INCH
Less than 3
3-5
More than 5-8
More than 8
Gas metal arc welding and flux cored arc welding
Gas tungsten arc welding
Air carbon
Air cutting
Plasma arc welding
(Light)
(Heavy)
Plasma arc cutting
(Light)**
(Medium)**
(Heavy)**
ARC CURRENT
Less than 60
60-160
161-250
251-550
Less than 60
60-160
161-250
251-500
Less than 50
50-150
150-500
Less than 500
500-1,000
Less than 20
20-100
101-400
401-800
Less than 300
300-400
401-800
Torch brazing
Torch soldering
Carbon arc welding
OPERATIONS
Gas welding:
Light
Medium
Heavy
Oxygen cutting:
Light
Medium
Heavy
MINUMUM* PROTECTIVE
SHADE
7
8
10
11
7
10
10
10
8
8
10
10
11
6
8
10
11
8
9
10
3
2
14
MINIMUM*PROTECTIVE
SHADE
PLATE THICKNESS
(INCHES)
(MM)
Under 1/8
1/8 to 1/2
Over 1/2
Under 3.2
3.2 to 12.7
Over 12.7
4
5
6
Under 1
1 to 6
Over 6
Under 25
25 to 150
Over 151
3
4
5
* As a rule of thumb, start with a shade that is too dark to see the weld zone. Then go to a lighter shade that gives a sufficient view
of the weld zone without going below the minimum. In oxyfuel gas welding or cutting where the torch produces a high yellow light, it
is desirable to use a filter lens that absorbs the yellow or sodium line in the visible light of the (spectrum) operation.
** These values apply where the actual arc is clearly seen. Experience has shown that lighter filters may be used when the arc is
hidden by the workpiece.
R 408.13313. Maintenance and cleanliness of protectors.
Rule 3313. (1) A face or eye protector shall be kept clean
and in good repair.
(2) Cleaning facilities for protectors shall be provided
away from the hazard, but readily accessible to the wearer.
(3) A slack, worn out, sweat-soaked, knotted, or twisted
headband shall be replaced.
(4) A face or eye protector is a personal item and shall be
for the individual and exclusive use of the person to whom it
is issued. If circumstances require reissue, the protector shall
be thoroughly cleaned, sanitized, and in good condition.
WELDING HELMETS AND HAND SHIELDS

R 408.13320. Purposes, types, styles, and marking.
Rule 3320. (1) The devices described in R 408.13320 to
R 408.13330 are designed to provide protection for the face,
eyes, ears, and neck against intense radiant energy and
spatter resulting from arc welding.
(2) A helmet and a hand shield are the only permissible
types.
(3) A helmet and a hand shield shall be made with the

same basic design and of the same basic materials: an
opaque, bowl-shaped or modified bowl-shaped device
containing a window with filter plate which allows the wearer
to see the radiant object, yet prevents harmful intensities or
radiation from reaching his eyes. A helmet shall be supported
on the head by an adjustable headgear. A hand shield shall
have a handle attached to the bottom by which it is held in
the hand. The basic designs may be modified to provide
protection against special hazards, but modified equipment
shall meet the same requirements as the basic design.
(4) A helmet and a hand shield shall bear a permanent
and legible marking by which the manufacturer may be
readily identified.
R 408.13321. Rigid helmet bodies.
Rule 3321. A helmet body of a rigid helmet shall be of
such size and shape as to protect the face, forehead, ears,
and neck to a vertical line back of the ears. It shall have 1 or
more openings in the front for filter plates or filter lenses. The
helmet body shall be attached to the headgear so that it will
7
not come in contact with any part of the head and so that it
can be lifted up from in front of the face and hold its position
in front of the head. The helmet body shall be made of
vulcanized fiber, reinforced plastic, or other suitable material
which shall be thermally insulating, noncombustible or slow
burning, opaque to visible, ultraviolet, and infrared radiations,
and capable of withstanding sanitizing. The inside of the
helmet body shall have a low light reflecting finish. Rivets or
other metal parts, if terminating on the inside surface, shall
be adequately separated from the wearers head.
R 408.13322. Rigid helmet headgear or cradles.
Rule 3322. A rigid helmet shall have a headgear or
cradle that shall hold the helmet body comfortably and firmly
on the wearers head, but shall permit the helmet body to be
tilted back over the head. The headgear shall be readily
adjustable for all head sizes from 6 1/2 to 7 5/8, without the
use of tools. The headgear shall be made of materials which
are thermally insulating, noncombustible or slow burning,
resistant to heat, and capable of withstanding sanitizing.
Where required, the headgear shall be fitted with a
removable and replaceable sweatband covering at least the
forehead portion of the headband. The sweatband shall be
made of leather or other suitable material which is slowburning and nonirritating.
R 408.13323. Rigid helmet headgear substitutes.
Rule 3323. A headgear for a rigid helmet may be
replaced by an impact resistant hat or cap that meets the
requirements of R 408.13370 to R 408.13378 of this part, or
other suitable device to which the helmet body is connected,
if the helmet body may be lifted and adjusted to permit
unobstructed vision or lowered to furnish complete
protection, as required. The alternative device shall meet the
requirements for sanitizing and resistance to heat and, in
addition, shall meet the applicable requirements of any
additional functions, such as protection against falling
objects.
R 408.13324. Rigid helmet filter plates.
Rule 3324. (1) A filter plate on a rigid helmet shall fit into
the frame and cover the window.
(2) Both surfaces of a filter plate shall be well polished
and shall be free from striae, waves, or other defects that
would impair the optical quality of the surfaces. Filter plate
surfaces shall be flat and substantially parallel.
(3) Table 2 of R 408.13312 shall be used to select the
proper shade number of filter lenses or plates during welding
operations.
(4) When specified, a filter plate shall be impactresistant,
unless impact-resistant eye protection is worn in conjunction
with a welding helmet.
(5) A filter plate shall be marked with the shade
designation and a permanent and legible marking by which
the manufacturer may be readily identified. In addition, a
glass filter plate, when treated for impact resistance, shall be
marked with the letter H.
(6) A cover plate made of plain glass, of glass coated on
1 or on both sides with plastic, or of a slow-burning solid
plastic sheet shall be used to protect a filter plate from
damage. A cover plate shall be the same peripheral size and
shape as the filter plate, and the thickness of a cover plate
shall not be less than 0.050 inches. A cover plate shall
transmit not less than 75% of the luminous radiation and
shall be substantially free from optical imperfections.
R 408.13325. Nonrigid helmets.
Rule 3325. A helmet may be made of nonrigid materials
where it is to be used in confined spaces, or may be
collapsible for convenience in carrying or storing. The helmet
may be of the same general shape as a rigid helmet, except

that a more complete covering of the top of the head is
necessary in order to maintain the face, side, and windows in
proper position. The requirements for the filter plates, cover
plates, and lens mounting frame are the same as for a rigid
helmet. A headgear may be used. The material shall be
nonconducting and opaque to ultraviolet, visible, and infrared
radiations. Stitched seams shall be welded. No stitching shall
be exposed.
R 408.13327. Hand shield.
Rule 3327. A hand shield shall be constructed of
materials similar to those used for a helmet and in like
manner. The materials, lens mounting arrangement, and filter
and cover plates shall conform to the requirements for the
corresponding parts of the helmet body with headgear. The
handle shall be made of a material that is a nonconductor of
electricity and is noncombustible or slow burning. It shall be
of such size and shape as to be held easily by 1 hand and
shall be firmly attached to the lower portion of the shield. A
hand shield intended for use by other than a welding operator
shall have filter and cover plates suitable for the intended
use.
R 408.13329. Helmet and hand shield lift fronts and chin
rests.
Rule 3329. (1) The lift front of the helmet shall be
fabricated from metal, plastic, or other suitable material. A
snap hinge shall be provided so that the front part will stay up
or down but will not remain in a partially opened position. The
lift front seal against the helmet shall be light tight. The lift
front shall be designed to accommodate 3 plates: a clear
impact-resisting plate in the back or fixed part; a filter plate,
impact-resisting, when specified; and a cover plate in the
front part. The back or fixed part plate shall be clear heat
treated glass or plastic not more than 3/16 inch thick or less
than 1/8 inch and capable of withstanding the impact test.
(2) To avoid contact of a helmet or hand shield with the
face of the wearer, a chin rest or adjustable position stop
shall be provided. They shall be constructed of suitable rigid
material and shall be detachable from the body of the hand
shield.
R 408.13330. Helmet snoods, neck protectors, and
aprons.
Rule 3330. (1) A snood or back-of-head-and-neck
protector where required shall be of material that is flame
resistant, that is a good insulator of heat and electricity, and
that is capable of withstanding sanitizing. They shall be
designed for easy attachment to the helmet, helmet
headgear, or cradle.
(2) An apron or bib, where required for a helmet, shall be
of nonflammable, nonconducting material that is flexible and
capable of withstanding sanitizing.
R 408.13332. Effect of head protection standards.
Rule 3332. The characteristics and performance
requirements of these rules for welding helmets shall in no
way be altered through their attachment to protective hats
and caps, as required by R 408.13370 to R 408.13378 of this
part.
FACE SHIELDS
R 408.13340. Purposes and uses.
Rule 3340. (1) The devices described in R 408.13340 to
R 408.13347 of this part are designed to provide protection to
the front part of the head, including forehead, cheeks, nose,
mouth, and chin, and to the neck, where required, from flying
particles and sprays of hazardous liquids, and to provide filter
8
protection where required. Such devices shall be worn over
suitable basic eye protection devices.
(2) Typical uses for face shields include, but are not
limited to, the following situations:
(a) Woodworking operations where chips and particles
fly.
(b) Metal machining causing flying particles.
(c) Buffing, polishing, wire brushing, and grinding
operations causing flying particles or objects.
(d) Spot welding.
(e) Handling of hot or corrosive materials.
R 408.13342. Types and materials.
Rule 3342. (1) Face shields are of 3 basic styles:
headgear without crown protector; headgear with crown
protector; and headgear with crown protector and chin
protector. Each of these styles shall accommodate any of the
following styles of windows:
(a) Clear transparent.
(b) Colored transparent.
(c) Wire screen.
(d) Combination of plastic and wire screen.
(e) Fiber window with filter plate mounting.
(2) Materials used in the manufacture of a face shield
shall be nonirritating to the skin when subjected to
perspiration and shall be capable of withstanding frequent
sanitizing. Metals, when used, shall be resistant to corrosion.
Plastic materials shall be slow burning. Clear or colored
plastic materials used in windows shall be of an optical
grade. Plastic windows shall not be used in connection with
welding operations unless they meet the requirements of
table 1 of this part.
R 408.13343. Components.
Rule 3343. A face shield shall consist of a detachable
transparent plastic window, wire screen window, or opaque
frame with window; a tilting support, an adjustable headgear;
and, as required, a crown protector and chin protector.
R 408.13344. Windows.
Rule 3344. (1) A window shall be designed to fit the
contour of the window support.
(2) A window supporting or window holding member,
which shall be a band or crown protector, shall be attached to
the headgear. The window support shall position the window
in front of the face to provide clearance for the nose and
eyeglasses of the wearer.
(3) The attachment of the window to the window support
shall be secure and shall permit easy removal and
replacement. The several sizes and types of windows for a
face shield shall be interchangeable for attachment to the
window support.
(4) A plastic or wire screen window without frame shall be
not less than 9 1/2 inches wide at the top and 8 inches
wide at the bottom, measured over its curved surfaces when
attached and in position on the window support, and not less
than 6 inches high. A window, when used in a frame, shall
not be less than 4 inches wide and 2 inches high, and the
frame shall conform to the dimensions specified for a window
without a frame. A plastic window shall be not less than
0.040 inch nominal thickness.
(5) The exposed borders of a wire screen window shall
be suitably bound or otherwise finished to eliminate sharp,
rough, or unfinished edges. A wire screen window shall not
be less than 20-mesh screen.
(6) A window support shall be pivotally attached to the
sides of the headgear to permit easy tilting, either upward or
downward, of the supporting member and of the window
attached thereto. The window shall be capable of being tilted
sufficiently upward so that the center of its bottom edge shall
be out of the line of horizontal vision. The tension of the tilting

mechanism shall be sufficient to hold the window without
slippage in either the up or down position.
R 408.13345. Headgear.
Rule 3345. (1) A headgear shall consist of at least a
headband and a crown strap. The headgear shall be made
from materials having a low heat conductivity. The design
shall hold the window and window support comfortably and
firmly in place on the wearers head and shall provide for
tilting the window away from the face.
(2) A headgear shall be readily adjustable to head sizes
from 6 1/2 to 7 5/8 without the use of tools. The crown strap
or band shall be attached to and extend between the front
and rear centers or from the middle sides of the headband. It
shall form an arc over the head to assist in positioning and
holding the headgear in place. An adjusting device shall be
positive and hold firmly in place after being adjusted. Its
mechanisms and movements shall be protected so that the
wearers hair cannot catch in the device.
(3) For greater protection, headgear may be replaced by
an impact resistant hat or cap to which the window support is
connected. The attachment may be either rigid or swiveled. If
swiveled, the design shall permit lifting and adjusting of the
window to permit unobstructed vision or lowering to furnish
protection.
R 408.13346. Crown and chin protectors.
Rule 3346. (1) A crown protector and chin protector shall
be made of material having an impact resistance not less
than that of the plastic window. When the crown protector is
used in conjunction with the chin protector for protection
against sprays of hazardous liquids, the assembly of the
crown protector and window support and the assembly of the
chin protector and window shall not allow liquids to pass
through any opening in the assembly and reach the face,
forehead, or chin of the wearer.
(2) A crown protector shall be shaped to cover at least
the frontal portion of the head and shall extend around each
side at least to a vertical line at the front of the ears. It may
be an integral part of the window support or a separate
assembly. The design shall provide a comfortable clearance
over the forehead and the head of the wearer.
(3) A chin protector shall be shaped to cover at least the
chin and upper part of the neck. The design shall provide a
comfortable clearance under the chin of the wearer.
R 408.13347. Marking; special operating conditions.
Rule 3347. (1) When a face shield is used in
atmospheres or working areas requiring special conditions of
nonconductivity or nonsparking, materials used shall meet
these requirements. A face shield shall be plainly and
permanently labeled, identifying it as a nonconductive face
shield or nonsparking face shield.
(2) A headgear and a plastic window shall bear a
permanent and legible marking by which the manufacturer
may be readily identified. A window offered for protection
against glare shall also bear its shade designation.
EYE PROTECTORS
R 408.13350. Prescription lenses.
Rule 3350. An employer shall assure that each affected
employee who wears prescription lenses while engaged in
operations that involve eye hazards shall wear eye protection
which incorporates that prescription in its design or shall
wear eye protection which can be worn over the prescription
lenses without disturbing the proper position for the
prescription lenses or protective lenses.
9
R 408.13352. Materials.
Rule 3352. Materials used in the manufacturing of eye
protectors shall combine mechanical strength and lightness
of weight to a high degree, shall be nonirritating to the skin
when subjected to perspiration, and shall withstand frequent
sanitizing. Metals, where used, shall be corrosion resistant.
Plastic materials, when used, shall be noncombustible or
slow burning. Cellulose nitrate, or materials having
flammability characteristics approximately those of cellulose
nitrate, shall not be used.
R 408.13353. Lenses.
Rule 3353. (1) Lenses intended for use in eye protectors
are of 4 basic types, as follows:
(a) Clear lenses which are impact-resisting and provide
protection against flying objects.
(b) Absorptive lenses of shades 1.7 through 3.0 which
are impact-resisting and provide protection against
flying objects and glare or which are impactresisting and provide protection against flying
objects, and narrowband spectral transmittance of
injurious radiation.
(c) Protective-corrective lenses which are impactresisting and either clear or absorptive, as specified
for persons requiring visual correction.
(d) Filter lenses which are impact-resisting and provide
protection against flying objects and narrow-band
spectral transmittance of injurious radiation.
(2) Glass filter lenses intended for use in eyecup goggles
shall be heat treated.
(3) The height of the safety lens shall not be less than 30
millimeters.
R 408.13355. Eyecup goggles; components.
Rule 3355. Eyecup goggles shall consist of 2 eyecups
with lenses and lens retainers, connected by an adjustable
bridge, and a replaceable and adjustable headband or other
means for retaining the eyecups comfortably in front of the
eyes. Recommended applications for the use of eyecup
goggles are shown in table 1 of R 408.13312(7).
R 408.13356. Eyecup goggles; types and models.
Rule 3356. (1) Eyecup goggles shall be of 2 types as
follows:
(a) Cup-type goggles designed to be worn by
individuals who do not wear corrective spectacles.
(b) Cover cup-type goggles designed to fit over
corrective spectacles.
(2) The 2 types of eyecup goggles are subdivided into the
following classes:
(a) Chippers models providing impact protection
against flying objects.
(b) Dust and splash models providing protection against
fine dust particles or liquid splashes and impact.
(c) Welders and cutters models providing protection
against glare, injurious radiations, and impact.
(3) The basic designs may be modified to provide more
protection against special hazards, but the modified
equipment shall meet the same requirements as the basic
design.
R 408.13357. Eyecup goggles; fit.
Rule 3357. (1) The edge of the eyecup of eyecup
goggles which bears against the face shall have a smooth
surface free from roughness or irregularities which might
exert undue pressure or cause discomfort to the wearer. The
eyecups shall be of such shape and size as to protect the
entire eye sockets.
(2) Cover cup-type goggles shall provide ample clearance
and not interfere with the spectacles of the wearer. The edge
of the goggles which bears against the face shall have a

smooth surface free from roughness or irregularities which
might exert undue pressure or cause discomfort to the
wearer.
R 408.13359. Eyecup ventilation.
Rule 3359. (1) Eyecups of chippers models shall be
ventilated in a manner to permit circulation of air.
(2) Eyecups of dust and splash models shall be ventilated
in a manner to permit circulation of air. The ventilation
openings shall be baffled or screened to prevent direct
passage of dust or liquids into the interior of the eyecups.
(3) Eyecups of welders and cutters models shall be
ventilated in a manner to permit circulation of air and shall be
opaque. The ventilation openings shall be baffled to prevent
passage of light rays into the interior of the eyecup.
R 408.13360. Eyecup lenses and retaining rings.
Rule 3360. (1) An eyecup shall be provided with a rigidly
constructed lens retaining ring of metal or of plastic designed
to accommodate lenses and to permit their ready removal
and replacement without damage to the eyecup or to the
lenses and without the use of tools. The ring shall provide a
complete clamping action against the lens. Lens retainers for
welders and cutters models shall accommodate a filter lens,
fiber gasket, and cover lens.
(2) A filter lens shall be marked with the shade
designation and a permanent and legible marking by which
the manufacturer may be readily identified. A glass filter lens,
when treated for impact resistance, shall also be marked with
the letter H.
construction.
Rule 3362. Flexible and cushioned fitting goggles shall
consist of a wholly flexible frame, forming a lens holder or
with a separable lens holder or a rigid frame with integral lens
or lenses, having a separate cushioned fitting surface on the
full periphery of the facial contact area. Materials used shall
be chemical-resistant, nontoxic, nonirritating, and slow
burning. There shall be a positive means of support on the
face, such as an adjustable headband of suitable material or
other suitable means of support to retain the frame
comfortable and snugly in place in front of the eyes. A frame
which is a lens holder or has a separable lens holder shall
hold the lenses firmly and tightly and be removable or
replaceable without the use of tools. The goggles may be
ventilated or not, as required by their intended use. Where
chemical goggles are ventilated, the openings shall be such
as to render the goggles splashproof.
protection.
Rule 3363. (1) Chippers models of flexible and
cushioned fitting goggles shall provide protection against
impact.
(2) Dust and splash models shall provide protection from
fine dusts, fumes, liquids, splashes, mists, and spray, alone
or with reflected light or glare, wind, and impact.
(3) Gas welders and cutters models shall provide
protection against glare, injurious radiations, and impact.
marking.
Rule 3364. (1) The frame of flexible and cushioned fitting
goggles shall bear a trademark or name identifying the
manufacturer.
(2) Each separate lens shall be distinctly marked in a
manner by which the manufacturer may be identified.
10
(3) A heat-treated glass filter plate or lens shall also be
marked with the shade designation and the letter H.
(4) The marking shall be clear cut and permanent and so
placed as not to interfere with the vision of the wearer.
R 408.13366. Foundrymens goggles; construction.
Rule 3366. (1) A foundrymans goggles shall consist of a
mask made of a flexible, nonirritating, and noncombustible or
slow-burning material, such as a leather or flexible plastic,
suitable ends holders attached thereto, lenses, and a positive
means of support on the face, such as an adjustable
headband, to retain the mask comfortably and snugly in
place in front of the eyes. The edge of the mask on contact
with the face shall be provided with a binding of corduroy or
other suitable material. The lens holders shall hold the lenses
firmly and tightly and may be readily removable or
replaceable. The lens holders shall be ventilated to permit
circulation of air.
R 408.13367 Foundrymens goggles; protection.
Rule 3367. (1) A foundrymans goggles shall provide
protection against impact and hot-metal splash hazards
encountered in foundry operations such as melting, pouring,
chipping, babbitting, grinding, and riveting. Where required,
they shall also provide protection against dusts.
(2) Applications for use of foundrymans goggles are
shown in Table 1 or R 408.13312(7).
(3) Materials shall resist flame, corrosion, water, and
sanitizing.
R 408.13369. Metal, plastic, and combination metal and
plastic spectacles.
Rule 3369. (1) Spectacles of metal, plastic, or a
combination thereof, shall consist of 2 lenses in a frame
which supports the lenses around their entire periphery of
suitable size and shape for the purpose intended connected
by a nose bridge, and retained on the face by temples or
other suitable means. The spectacles shall be furnished with
or without sideshields depending upon their intended use.
The frames, temples, and sideshields may be metal or plastic
and when made of plastic shall be of the slow-burning type.
(2) Spectacles shall provide protection to the eye from
flying objects, and, when required, from glare and injurious
radiations. Spectacles without sideshields are intended to
provide frontal protection. Where side as well as frontal
protection is required, the spectacles shall be provided with
sideshields. See Table 1 of R 408.13312(7).
(3) Frames shall be designed for industrial exposure and
shall bear a trademark identifying the manufacturer on both
fronts and temples. The frame front shall carry a designation
of the eye size and bridge size, where applicable. Temples
shall be marked as to the overall length or fitting value.
(4) Temples may be of the cable or spatula type, as
specified, and shall be of such design as to permit
adjustment and fit comfortably and securely on the wearer.
The size of the temples shall be clearly marked.
(5) Safety lens in frames which do not comply with this
part shall not be worn.
HEAD PROTECTION EQUIPMENT

R 408.13370. Head protection generally.
affected employee shall be provided with, and shall wear,
head protection equipment and accessories when the
employee is required to be present in areas where a hazard
exists from falling or flying objects or from other harmful
contacts or exposures or where there is a risk of injury from
electric shock, hair entanglement, chemicals, or temperature
extremes.
(2) Service facilities shall be provided for the sanitizing

and replacement of needed parts when necessary and
before head protection equipment is reissued.
(3) Head protection equipment that has been physically
altered or damaged shall not be worn or reissued to an
employee.
(4) An employee shall not physically alter, and shall guard
against damage to, the head protection equipment provided.
(5) An employee shall use the provided head protection
equipment in accordance with the instructions and training
received.
R 408.13372. Head protection; adoption of standards by
reference.
Rule 3372. (1) Protective helmets purchased after July 5,
1994, shall be in compliance with American national
standards
institute
standard
Z89.1-1986,
entitled
Requirements for Protective Headwear for Industrial
Workers, or shall be demonstrated to be equally effective.
The standard is adopted by reference in these rules and may
be purchased from the American National Standards
Institute, 11 West 42nd Street, New York, New York 10036,
or from the Safety Standards Division, Michigan Department
of Consumer and Industry Services, Box 30643, Lansing,
Michigan 48909, at a cost at the time of adoption of these
rules of $12.00.
(2) Protective helmets purchased before July 5, 1994,
shall be in compliance with American national standards
institute standard Z89.1-1969, entitled Requirements for
Industrial Head Protection, or shall be demonstrated by the
employer to be equally effective. The standard is adopted by
reference in these rules and may be purchased from the
American National Standards Institute, 11 West 42nd Street,
New York, New York 10036, or from the Safety Standards
Division, Michigan Department of Consumer and Industry
Services, Box 30643, Lansing, Michigan 48909, at a cost at
the time of adoption of these rules of $12.00.
R 408.13375. Protective helmets.
Rule 3375. (1) Protective helmets or safety hats and caps
shall be of the following types:
(a) Class - A - Limited voltage protection.
(b) Class - B - High voltage protection.
(c) Class - C - No voltage protection.
(d) Class - D - Limited voltage protection fire fighters
service helmets with full brim.
(2) A class C helmet or any metallic head device shall not
be furnished by an employer or used by an employee for
head protection, except where it has been determined that
the use of other types of protective helmets or safety hats or
caps is impractical, such as where chemical reaction will
cause the deterioration of other types of head protection.
(3) A protective helmet furnished by an employer shall be
identified on the inside of the shell with the name of the
manufacturer.
(4) When used in conjunction with protective helmets,
face shields, welding helmets, and goggles shall be in
compliance with the requirements set forth in R 408.13311 to
R 408.13369 and Michigan department of consumer and
industry services, division of occupational health standards
for hearing protection being R 325.60101.
(5) Winter liners and chin straps used in conjunction with
class B helmets for high-voltage protection shall not contain
any metallic parts or other conductive materials. Winter liners
and chin straps used in areas where there is a danger of
ignition from heat, flame, or chemical reaction shall be made
of materials that are nonburning or flame retardant.
(6) Bump hats or caps or other limited-protection devices
shall not be used as a substitute for protective helmets for
the hazards described in R 408.13370.
11
(7) Protective helmets designed to reduce electrical
shock hazard shall be worn by an employee who is near
exposed electrical conductors that could come in contact with
the employees head.
R 408.13376. Hoods.
Rule 3376. (1) A hood shall be made of materials that
combine mechanical strength and lightness of weight to a
high degree, shall be nonirritating to the skin when subjected
to perspiration and shall be capable of withstanding frequent
cleaning and disinfection. Materials used in the manufacture
of hoods shall also be suitable to withstand the hazards to
which the user may be exposed.
(2) A hood shall bear a permanent and legible marking by
which the manufacturer may be readily identified.
(3) A hood shall be designed to provide adequate
ventilation for the wearer. Where air lines are used they shall
be installed and used in accordance with Michigan
department of consumer and industry services, division of
occupational health standards.
(4) A protective helmet shall be used in conjunction with a
hood where there is a head injury hazard and the hood shall
be designed to accommodate such helmet.
R 408.13378. Hair enclosures.
Rule 3378. A hat, cap, or net shall be used by a person
where there is a danger of hair entanglement in moving
machinery or equipment, or where there is exposure to
means of ignition. It shall be designed to be reasonably
comfortable to the wearer, completely enclose all loose hair,
and be adjustable to accommodate all head sizes. Material
used for a hair enclosure shall be fast dyed, nonirritating to
the skin when subjected to perspiration, and capable of
withstanding frequent cleaning. It shall not be reissued from
one employee to another unless it has been thoroughly
sanitized.
FOOT PROTECTION
R 408.13383. Certification.
Rule 3383. (1) All protective footwear purchased after
July 5, 1994, shall bear a permanent mark to show the
manufacturers name or trademark and certification of
compliance with the provisions of ANSI standard Z41-1991,
entitled Personal Protective Footwear, which is adopted by
reference in these rules and which may be inspected at the
Lansing office of the Michigan department of consumer and
industry services. The standard may be purchased from the
nd
American National Standards Institute, 11 West 42 Street,
New York, New York 10036, or from the Michigan
Department of Consumer and Industry Services, Safety
Standards Division, Box 30643, Lansing, Michigan 48909, at
a cost at the time of adoption of these rules of $7.00.
(2) Protective footwear purchased before July 5, 1994,
shall bear a permanent mark to show the manufacturers
name or trademark and certification of compliance with
American national standards institute standard Z41.1-1967,
entitled Mens Safety-Toe Footwear, which is adopted by
reference in these rules and which may be inspected at the
Lansing office of the Michigan department of consumer and
industry services. The standard may be purchased from the
American National Standards Institute, 11 West 42nd Street,
New York, New York 10036, or from the Michigan
Standards Division, Box 30643, Lansing, Michigan 48909, at
a cost at the time of adoption of these rules of $32.00.
R 408.13384. Toe protection.
Rule 3384. Where toe protection other than safety toe
footwear is worn, the toe protection shall have an impact
value of not less than that required for the safety toe
footwear.
R 408.13385. Foot protection generally.
affected employee shall wear protective footwear when
working in areas where an emloyees feet are exposed to
electrical hazards or where there is a danger of foot injuries
due to falling or rolling objects or a danger of objects piercing
the sole of the shoe. The payment for protective footwear
shall be determined between the employer and the employee
or shall be as determined by a collective bargaining
agreement.
(2) Safety shoes and boots which are not worn over
shoes and which are worn by more than 1 employee shall be
maintained, cleaned, and sanitized inside and out before
being issued to another employee.
R 408.13386. Foot protection; specific requirements.
Rule 3386. Where a hazard is created from a process,
environment, chemical, or mechanical irritant which would
cause an injury or impairment to the feet by absorption or
physical contact, other than from impact, footwear, such as
boots, overshoes, rubbers, wooden-soled shoes, or their
equivalent, shall be used.
ELECTRICAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

R 408.13387. Electrical protective equipment; design;
certification; use; storage.
Rule 3387. (1) Insulating blankets, matting, covers, line
hose, gloves, and sleeves made of rubber shall be in
compliance with all of the following requirements as
applicable:
(a) Blankets, gloves, and sleeves shall be produced by
a seamless process.
(b) Each item shall be clearly marked as follows:
(i) Class 0 equipment shall be marked class 0.
(ii) Class 1 equipment shall be marked class 1.
(iii) Class 2 equipment shall be marked class 2.
(iv) Class 3 equipment shall be marked class 3.
(v) Class 4 equipment shall be marked class 4.
(vi) Non-ozone-resistant equipment other than
matting shall be marked type 1.
(vii) Ozone-resistant equipment other than matting
shall be marked type II.
(viii) Other relevant markings, such as the
manufacturers identification and the size of
the equipment, may also be provided.
(c) Markings shall be nonconducting and shall be
applied in a manner that does not impair the
insulating qualities of the equipment.
(d) Markings on gloves shall be confined to the cuff
portion of the glove.
(2) Equipment shall be capable of withstanding the
alternating current proof test voltage specified in table 4 or
the direct current proof test voltage specified in table 5. The
proof test shall reliably indicate that the equipment can
withstand the voltage involved. The test voltage shall be
applied continuously for 3 minutes for equipment other than
matting and shall be applied continuously for 1 minute for
matting.
(3) Gloves shall also be capable of withstanding the
alternating current proof test voltage specified in table 4 after
a 16-hour water soak. When the alternating current proof test
is used on gloves, the 60-hertz proof test current may not be
more than the values specified in table 4 at any time during
the test period. If the alternating current test is made at a
frequency other than 60 hertz, the permissible proof test
current shall be computed from the direct ratio of the
12
frequencies. For the test, gloves (right side out) shall be filled
with tap water and immersed in water to a depth that is in
accordance with table 6. Water shall be added to or removed
from the glove, as necessary, so that the water level is the
same inside and outside the glove. After the 16-hour water
soak specified in this rule, the 60-hertz proof test current may
exceed the values specified in table 4 by not more than 2
milliamperes.
(4) Equipment that has been subjected to a minimum
breakdown voltage test may not be used for electrical
protection. See subrule (3) of this rule.
(5) Material used for type II insulating equipment shall be
capable of withstanding an ozone test without visible effects.
The ozone test shall reliably indicate that the material will
resist ozone exposure in actual use. Any visible signs of
ozone deterioration of the material, such as checking,
cracking, breaks, or pitting, is evidence of failure to meet the
requirements for ozone-resistant material. See subrule (3) of
this rule.
(6) Equipment shall be free of harmful physical
irregularities that can be detected by the tests or inspections
required under this rule. Surface irregularities that may be
present on all rubber goods because of imperfections on
forms or molds or because of inherent difficulties in the

manufacturing process and that may appear as indentations,
protuberances, or imbedded foreign material are acceptable
if both of the following conditions are satisfied:
(a) The indentation or protuberance blends into a
smooth slope when the material is stretched.
(b) Foreign material remains in place when the
insulating material is folded and stretches with the
insulating material surrounding it.
(7) The standards listed in table 3 are adopted by
reference in these rules and may be inspected at the Lansing
office of the department of consumer and industry services.
The ANSI standards may be purchased from the American
National Standards Institute, 11 West 42nd Street, New York,
New York 10018, and the ASTM standards may be
purchased from the American Society of Test and Materials,
100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, Pennsylvania
19428, or any of the standards may be purchased from the
Michigan Department of Consumer and Industry Services,
Safety Standards Division, Box 30643, Lansing, Michigan
48909, at a cost at the time of adoption of these rules as
listed in Table 3.
TABLE 3
ITEM
ITEM ANSI-ASTM COST

ANSI-ASTM
COST
D 120-87el
D 178-88
D 1048-88Ael
D 1049-88
D 1050-90
D 1051-87
F 478-92
F 479-88a
F 496-91
$16.50
$16.50
$16.50
$16.50
$16.50
$16.50
$15.00
$15.00
$12.00
Rubber insulating gloves

Rubber matting for use around electrical apparatus
Rubber insulating blankets
Rubber insulating covers
Rubber insulating line hose
Rubber insulating sleeves
In-service care line hose and covers
In-service care insulating blankets
In-service care of insulating gloves and sleeves
These standards contain specifications for conducting the various tests required in subrules (1) to (6) of this rule.
(8) Electrical protective equipment shall be maintained in
a safe, reliable condition.
(9) All of the following specific requirements apply to
insulating blankets, covers, line hose, gloves, and sleeves
made of rubber as applicable:
(a) Maximum use voltages shall conform to the
voltages listed in table 7.
(b) Insulating equipment shall be inspected for damage
before each days use and immediately following any
incident that can reasonably be suspected of having
caused damage. Insulating gloves shall be given an
air test in addition to being inspected.
(c) Insulating equipment that has any of the following
defects shall not be used:
(i) A hole, tear, puncture, or cut.
(ii) Ozone cutting or ozone checking, the cutting
action produced by ozone on rubber under
mechanical stress into a series of interlacing
cracks.
(iii) An embedded foreign object.
(iv) Any of the following texture changes:
(a) Swelling.
(b) Softening.
(c) Hardening.
(d) Becoming sticky or inelastic.
(v) Any other defect that damages the insulating
properties.
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
Insulating equipment found to have other defects

that might affect its insulating properties shall be
removed from service and returned for testing under
subdivisions (h) and (j) of this subrule.
Insulating equipment shall be cleaned as needed to
remove foreign substances.
Insulating equipment shall be stored in a location
and in a manner to protect it from all of the
following:
(i) Light.
(ii) Temperature extremes.
(iii) Excessive humidity.
(iv) Ozone.
(v) Other injurious substances and conditions.
Protector gloves shall be worn over insulating
gloves, except that protector gloves need not be
used with class 0 gloves under limited-use
conditions or where small equipment and parts
manipulation necessitate unusually high finger
dexterity. Any other class of glove may be used for
similar work without protector gloves if the employer
can demonstrate that the possibility of physical
damage to the gloves is small and if the class of
glove is 1 class higher than that required for the
voltage involved. Insulating gloves that have been
used without protector gloves shall not be used at a
higher voltage until they have been tested under the
provisions of subdivisions (h) and (i) of this subrule.
13
Extra care shall be taken when visually examining
gloves and to avoid handling sharp objects.
(h) Electrical protective equipment shall be subjected to
periodic electrical tests. Test voltages and the
maximum intervals between tests shall be in
accordance with table 7 and table 8.
(i)
The test method used in this rule shall reliably
indicate whether the insulating equipment can
withstand the voltages involved. The standard
electrical test methods considered as meeting this
requirement are listed in table 3.
(j)
Only insulating equipment that passes inspection or
electrical tests may be used by employees, except
that rubber insulating line hose may be used in
shorter lengths if the defective portion is cut off.
Rubber insulating blankets may be repaired using a
compatible patch that results in physical and
electrical properties equal to those of the blanket.
Rubber insulating blankets may be salvaged by
severing the defective area from the undamaged
portion of the blanket. The resulting undamaged
area may not be less than 22 inches by 22 inches
(560mm by 560mm) for class 1, 2, 3, and 4
blankets. Rubber insulating gloves and sleeves that
have minor physical defects, such as small cuts,
tears, or punctures, may be repaired by applying a
compatible patch. Also, rubber insulating gloves and
sleeves that have minor surface blemishes may be
repaired with a compatible liquid compound. The
patched area shall have electrical and physical
properties equal to those of the surrounding
material. Repairs to gloves are permitted only in the
area between the wrist and the reinforced edge of
the opening.
(k) Repaired insulating equipment shall be retested
before it may be used by employees.
(l)
An employer shall certify that equipment has been
tested in accordance with the requirements of R
408.13387(9)(h), (l), and (k) of this subrule. The
certification shall identify the equipment that passed
the test and the date it was tested. The marking of
equipment and entering the results of the tests and
the dates of testing onto logs are acceptable means
of equipment identification.
(10) Material other than rubber that offers protection
equivalent to or greater than rubber may be used if the
material is certified to meet the appropriate ANSI-ASTM
standard tests.
(11) An insulated blanket, glove, or sleeve shall be
capable of withstanding the voltage to which it may be
subjected.
CLASS OF
EQUIPMENT
0
1
2
3
4
(12) Exposed conductors or equipment, or both, except

for conductors or equipment being directly worked on, which
is energized from 750 volts to 28,000 volts phase to ground
and which an employee may reach into or touch shall be
isolated or covered with at least 1 of the following:
(a) An insulating blanket.
(b) An insulating hood.
(c) An insulating line hose.
(d) An insulating barrier.
(13) An employee shall use insulating gloves and sleeves
capable of withstanding the imposed voltage when
performing any of the following activities:
(a) Working directly on, or within reaching distance of, a
conductor or equipment at a nominal 750 volts or
more phase to ground, except when using
barehanded techniques or a hot stick. Sleeves are
not required for an employee who performs routine
switching operations in a substation or powerhouse.
An employee who uses gloves and sleeves and
works directly on or within reaching distance of a
conductor or equipment energized at more than
5,000 volts phase to ground shall do so from an
insulated platform or board or an aerial device that
has an insulated basket.
(b) Connecting or disconnecting primary neutrals, pole
ground wires, or other conductors normally
connected to static wires or energized equipment,
except that gloves and sleeves need not be worn
while connecting and disconnecting a service
neutral or secondary neutral.
(c) Working on a de-energized conductor that extends
into an area in which contact may be made with an
energized conductor or exposed parts of energized
equipment, unless the conductor is grounded or
isolated. Insulating sleeves are optional at voltages
of less than 750 volts phase to ground.
(14) An employee shall use insulating gloves capable of
withstanding the imposed voltage when performing either of
the following activities:
(a) When working with a powered or manual hole
digger while using booms or using winch lines to
install or remove poles or equipment where the hole
digger may contact conductors or equipment
energized at a voltage of 300 volts or more phase to
ground. An employee need not use the gloves while
in the enclosed cab of the equipment.
(b) When working directly on a conductor or equipment
energized at a voltage of more than 240 volts phase
to ground. This does not include the use of test
equipment.
TABLE 4
ALTERNATING CURRENT PROOF-TEST REQUIREMENTS
MAXIMUM PROFF-TEST CURRENT, Ma (Globes Only)
PROOF-TEST
267MM
356MM
406MM
457MM
VOLTAGE RMS
(10.5 in.)
(14 in.)
(16 in.)
(18 in.) glove
V
glove
glove
glove
5,000
8
12
14
16
10,000
14
16
18
20,000
16
18
20
30,000
18
20
22
40,000
22
24
14
TABLE 5
DIRECT CURRENT PROOF-TEST REQUIREMENTS
CLASS OF EQUIPMENT
PROFF-TEST VOLTAGE
0
20,000
1
40,000
2
50,000
3
60,000
4
70,000
NOTE: The direct current voltages listed in this table are not appropriate for proof-testing rubber insulating line hose or covers. For this equipment,
direct current proof tests shall use a voltage high enough to indicate that the equipment can be safely used to the voltages listed in table 6. See
ASTM D1050-90 and ASTM D1049-88 for further information on proof tests for rubber insulating line hose and covers.
TABLE 6
GLOVE TESTS WATER LEVEL 1, 2
CLASS OF GLOVE
ALTERNATING CURRETN PROOF TEST

mm.
0
1
2
3
4
38
38
64
89
127
Inches
1.5
1.5
2.5
3.5
5.0
DIRECT CURRENT
PROOF TEST
mm.
Inches
38
1.5
51
2.0
76
3.0
102
4.0
153
6.0
1. The water level is given as the clearance from the cuff of the glove to the waterline, with a tolerance of 13mm. ( 0.5 inches).
2. If atmospheric conditions make the specified clearances impractical, the clearances may be increased by a maximum of 25mm. (1 inch).
TABLE 7
RUBBER INSULATING EQUIPMENT VOLTAGE REQUIREMENTS
RETEST VOLTAGE
RETEST VOLTAGE
CLASS OF EQUIPMENT
MAXIMUM USE VOLTAGE ALTERNATING CURRENT DIRECT CURRENT
ROOT MEAN SQUARE
AVERAGE
0
1,000
5,000
20,000
1
7,500
10,000
40,000
2
17,000
20,000
50,000
3
26,500
30,000
60,000
4
36,000
40,000
70,000
1 The maximum use voltage is the alternating current voltage (root mean square) classification of the protective equipment that designates the
maximum nominal design voltage of the energized system that may be safely worked. The nominal voltage is equal to the phase-to-phase voltage
on multiphase circuits. However, the phase-to-ground potential is considered to be the nominal design voltage in either of the following situations:
(a) If there is no multiphase exposure in a system area and if the voltage exposure is limited to the phase-to-ground potention.
(b) If the electrical equipment and devices are insulated or isolated, or both, so that the multiphase exposure on a grounded wye circuit is
removed.
2 The proof-test voltage shall be applied continuously for not less than 1 minute, but not more than 3 minutes.
TABLE 8
RUBBER INSULATING EQUIPMENT TEST INTERVALS
TYPE OF EQUIPMENT
WHEN TO TEST
RUBBER INSULATING LINE HOSE
UPON INDICATION THAT INSULATING VALUE IS SUSPECT.
RUBBER INSULATING COVERS
UPON INDICATION THAT INSULATING VALUE IS SUSPECT.
RUBBER INSULATING BLANKETS
BEFORE FIRST ISSUE AND EVERY 12 MONTHS THEREAFTER.
RUBBER INSULATING GLOVES
RUBBER INSULATING SLEEVES
If the insulating equipment has been electrically tested, but not issued for service, the equipment may not be placed into service unless it has been
electrically tested within the previous 12 months.
SAFETY BELTS, HARNESSES, LIFELINES,

AND LANYARDS
R 408.13390. General requirements; safety belts, safety
harnesses,
lifelines,
and
lanyards
generally.
Rule 3390. (1) Unless a safety net is used as prescribed
in construction safety standard, Part 45. Fall Protection,
being R 408.44501 et seq. of the Michigan Administrative

Code, or an employee is protected by a perimeter guardrail
or is working on a portable ladder, the employee shall be
safeguarded by a safety belt or safety harness secured to a
lifeline or structure capable of sustaining the imposed load, if
the employees work station is more than 25 feet above the
ground, floor, water, or other surface. The safety belt and
harness and any lifeline or lanyard shall be used only for
15
safeguarding the employee. A safety belt, safety harness,
lifeline, or lanyard subjected to in-service loading, rather than
static loading, shall be removed from service and shall not be
used again for employee safeguarding.
(2) Safety belt, safety harness, and lanyard hardware
shall be made of cadmium-plated, drop forged or pressed
steel or metal of equivalent strength with edges free of sharp
edges. The safety belt and lanyard hardware shall withstand
a tensile load of 4,000 pounds without cracking, breaking, or
permanent deformation. A linemans body belt D ring and
snaps shall withstand 5,000 pounds tensile test and the
buckle 2,000 pounds tensile test.
(3) A lifeline shall be secured above the employees
workplace to an anchorage or structural member capable of
supporting a dead weight of not less than 5,400 pounds.
(4) A lifeline shall not be less than 3/4-inch manila rope or
a material of equivalent strength, having a breaking strength
of not less than 5,400 foot pounds except where the lifeline is
used on rock-scaling operation or in areas where the lifeline
may be subject to cutting or abrasion, the line shall be not
less than 7/8-inch manila rope with a wire core.
(5) A lanyard or safety strap shall be not less than 1/2inch nylon rope or its equivalent with a maximum length to
provide a free fall of not more than 6 feet. The breaking
strength of the lanyard shall be not less than 5,400 pounds.
(6) A safety belt, safety strap, safety harness, lanyard, or
lifeline, including the hardware, shall be inspected before
using each day.
(7) A safety belt, safety harness, lifeline, or lanyard shall
be stored in a clean dry area away from excessive heat or
other deteriorating conditions.
(8) A lifeline or lanyard made of synthetic fibers shall not
be kinked, run over sharp corners, used when frozen, left in
freezing temperatures when wet, or exposed to sources of
ignition or flame.
HAND PROTECTION
R 408.13392. Hand protection generally.
Rule 3392. (1) An employer shall select and require
employees to use appropriate hand protection when
employees hands are exposed to hazards that may cause
any of the following:
(a) Skin absorption of harmful substances.
(b) Severe cuts or lacerations.
(c) Severe abrasions.
(d) Punctures.
(e) Chemical burns.
(f) Thermal burns.
(g) Harmful temperature extremes.

(2) An employer shall base the selection of the
appropriate hand protection on an evaluation of the
performance characteristics of the hand protection relative to
all of the following:
(a) The task to be performed.
(b) Conditions present.
(c) Duration of use.
(d) The hazards and potential hazards identified.
(3) Hand protection interiors shall be kept free of
corrosive or irritating contaminants. If more than 1 employee
wears a pair of gloves, the gloves shall be sanitized before
reissuance.
R 408.13394. Body protection.
Rule 3394. (1) An employer shall assure that an
employee who is required to work so that his or her clothing
becomes wet due to a condition other than the weather or
perspiration shall use such aprons, coats, jackets, sleeves, or
other garments that will keep his or her clothing dry. The
material shall be unaffected by the wetting agent. The
provision of dry, clean, acid-resistant clothing, in addition to
rubber shoes or short boots and an apron, shall be
considered a satisfactory substitute where small parts are
cleaned, plated, or acid-dipped in an open tank.
(2) When abrasive blasting is not protected by an
enclosure, the operator shall use heavy canvas or leather
gloves and aprons or equivalent protection to provide
protection from the impact of abrasives.
R 408.13398. Rescission.
Rule 3398. The following general industry safety
standards promulgated by the general industry safety
standards commission pursuant to Act No. 154 of the Public
Acts of 1974, as amended, being 408.1001 et seq. of the
Michigan Compiled Laws, are rescinded:
(a) R 408.13101 to R 408.13135 of the Michigan
Administrative Code, appearing on pages 3,717 to
3,721 of the 1979 Michigan Administrative Code
and pages 136 and 137 of Quarterly Supplement
No. 6 to the 1979 Code.
(b) R 408.13201 to R 408.13241 of the Michigan
3,738 of the 1979 Michigan Administrative Code.
(c) R 408.13501 to R 408.13569 of the Michigan
3,738 of the 1979 Michigan Administrative Code.
3
WELDING AND CUTTING
MIOSHA-STD-1304 (01/05)
7 Pages

DIRECTOR'S OFFICE
Filed with the Secretary of State on August 31, 1976 (as amended November 21, 1980)
(as amended November 23, 1982) (as amended September 3, 1996) (as amended January 12, 2005)
(By authority conferred on the director of the department of labor and economic growth by sections 19 and 21
of 1974 PA 154,and Executive Reorganization Order Nos. 1996-2 and 2003-18, MCL 408.1019, 408.1021,
445.2001, and 445.2011)
R 408.40705, R 408.40707, R 408.40709, R 408.40711, R 408.40712, R 408.40713, R 408.40714, R 408.40721,
R 408.40722, R 408.40723, R 408.40729, R 408.40731, R 408.40744, R 408.40746, R 408.40751, R 408.40761, and
R 408.40762 of the Michigan Administrative Code are amended as follows:
Visit our web site at: www.michigan.gov/mioshastandards
PART 7. WELDING AND CUTTING

TABLE OF CONTENTS
R 408.40701
R 408.40705
R 408.40706
R 408.40707
R 408.40709
R 408.40711
R 408.40712
R 408.40713
R 408.40714
R 408.40715
R 408.40721
Scope. ............................................................ 1
Definitions; A to C........................................... 1
Definitions; D to N. ......................................... 1
Definitions; P to W.......................................... 2
Adoption of standards by reference. ............... 2
Employer and employee responsibilities. ....... 2
Requirements generally.................................. 2
Working in confined spaces............................ 3
Warning tags and labels. ................................ 3
Torches generally........................................... 3
Cylinders manufacturing, labeling, periodic
testing, and marking....................................... 3
R 408.40722 Storage........................................................... 3
R 408.40723 Cylinders generally. ........................................ 4
R 408.40729 Manifolding. .................................................... 4
GENERAL PROVISIONS
R 408.40701 Scope.
Rule 701. With respect to construction operations, the
intent of this part is to provide reasonable safety to
employees involved in welding operations and to persons
exposed to welding operations, welding equipment, and the
compressed gases used.
R 408.40705 Definitions; A to C.
Rule 705. (1) AC means alternating current.
(2) Arc welding means a process for joining metals by
melting with an electric arc with or without the use of
pressure and with or without a filler material.
(3) Brazing means a process of joining metals, without
melting them, with a filler metal melting above 800 degrees
Fahrenheit (427 degrees Celsius).
(4) Confined space means a space that, because of
its physical construction, could be subject to the
accumulation of loose materials or explosive, toxic, or
R 408.40731
R 408.40732
R 408.40741
R 408.40742
R 408.40743
R 408.40744
R 408.40745
R 408.40746
R 408.40747
R 408.40751
R 408.40761
R 408.40762
Hoses and connections...................................4

Regulators and protective devices. .................5
Arc welding machines. ....................................5
Open circuit and no-load voltages of arc
welding machines. ..........................................5
Design requirements for arc welding machines.
.......................................................................5
Installation.......................................................5
Welding cables and electrode holders. ...........6
Operation. .......................................................6
Maintenance of arc welding machines. ...........6
Personal protective equipment........................6
Fire precautions. .............................................6
Welding drums, barrels, tanks, or other
containers. ......................................................7
flammable contaminants or could have an oxygen-deficient

atmosphere. All of the following are examples of confined
spaces:
(a) Storage tanks.
(b) Process vessels.
(c) Bins.
(d) Boilers.
(e) Ventilation ducts.
(f) Sewers.
(g) Underground utility vaults.
(h) Tunnels after construction is completed.
(i)
Pipelines.
(5) Cutting means a process in which the severing or
removing of metal is affected by the use of an arc or flame.
(6) Cylinders
means
containers
for
storing
compressed gases.
R 408.40706 Definitions; D to N.
Rule 706. (1) DC means direct current.
(2) Fire resistance means the property of a material or
assembly to withstand fire or give protection from it.
2
(3) Fuel gas means a gas, such as acetylene and
propane, that is used to generate heat to perform a welding
operation.
(4) Gas welding means a process for joining metals
by heating with a gas flame with or without the use of
pressure and with or without the use of a filler material.
(5) Inert gas means argon, carbon dioxide, helium, or
nitrogen gas.
(6) Manifold means an assembly of pipe and fittings to
interconnect either single or multiple sources of fuel gas or
oxygen to single or multiple outlets.
(7) Noncombustible means having properties that do
not support combustion.
R 408.40707 Definitions; P to W.
Rule 707. (1) Psig means pounds per square inch as
measured by a gauge.
(2) Soldering means a process of joining metals,
without melting them, using a filler metal melting at 800
degrees Fahrenheit (427 degrees Celsius) or below.
(3) Storage means the storage of a filled or empty
cylinder not in use.
(4) Welding means the process of joining metals by
melting them.
(5) Welding operations means the cutting, welding,
brazing, or soldering of materials.
(6) Welder means a person performing welding
operations.
R 408.40709 Adoption of standards by reference.
Rule 709. (1) The standards specified in this rule,
except for the standards specified in subrule (2) of this rule,
are adopted by reference.
(a) The following standards are available from Global
Engineering Documents, 15 Inverness Way East,
Englewood, Colorado, 80112, USA, telephone
number: 1-800-854-7179 or via the internet at website: http://global.ihs.com; at a cost as of the time of
adoption of these rules, as stated in this subrule:
(i) American National Standard Institute Standard
ANSI/AWS Z49.1, Safety in Welding and
Cutting and Allied Processes, 1973 edition.
Cost: $80.00.
(ii) American National Standard Institute Standard
ANSI/ASA B57.1, Compressed Gas Cylinder
Valve Outlet and Inlet Connections, 1965
edition. Cost $25.00
(b) The following standards are available from the
National Fire Protection Association, Charles S
Morgan Technical Library, 1 Batterymarch Park, P.O.
Box 9101, Quincy, Massachusetts, 02269-9101,
USA; telephone number: 617-984-7445; or via the
internet at web-site: www.nfpa.org/library or e-mail
at [email protected]; at a cost as of the time of
adoption of these rules, as stated in this subrule.
(i) National Fire Protection Association NFPA 70
National Electrical Code, Article 630 Electric
Welders, 1978 edition. Cost: $7.50.
(ii) National Fire Protection Association NFPA 50
Standards for Bulk Oxygen Systems at
Consumer Sites, 1974 edition. Cost: $7.50.
(iii) National Fire Protection Association NFPA 58
Liquefied Petroleum Gas Code, 1974 edition.
Cost: $39.50.
(c) Code
of
Federal
Regulations,
Title
49,
Transportation, Part 186-199 stock number 869048-00199-9 is available from the U.S. Government
Bookstore, Washington DC, 20402; telephone
number: 888-293-6498; or via the internet at web-
site: http://bookstore.gpo.gov; at a cost, as of the

time of adoption of these rules, of $5.00.
These standards are also available for inspection at, and
purchase from, the Michigan Department of Labor and
Economic Growth, MIOSHA Standards Section, 7150 Harris
Drive, P.O. Box 30643, Lansing, Michigan 48909-8143.
(2) The following Michigan occupational safety and
health standards are referenced in these rules. Up to 5
copies of these standards may be obtained at no charge from
the Michigan Department of Labor and Economic Growth,
MIOSHA Standards Section, 7150 Harris Drive, P.O. Box
30643, Lansing, Michigan, 48909-8143 or via the internet at
www.michigan.gov/mioshastandards.
For
web-site:
quantities greater than 5, the cost, as of the time of adoption
of these rules, is 4 cents per page
(a) Construction Safety Standard Part 1 General Rules,
R 408.40101 et seq.
(b) Construction Safety Standard Part 6 Personal
Protective Equipment, R 408.40601 et seq.
(c) Construction Safety Standard Part 45 Fall
Protection, R 408.44501 et seq.
(d) General Industry Safety Standard Part 12 Welding
and Cutting, R 408.11231 to R 408.11252.
R 408.40711 Employer and employee responsibilities.
Rule 711. (1) An employer shall do all of the following:
(a) Assure that each employee has received safety
training in the use of equipment for welding
operations and instruction in the rules of this part
before allowing the employee to use the equipment.
(b) Provide protection to an employee against toxic or
hazardous materials or deficient oxygen, as
prescribed by the department of labor and economic
growth.
(c) Assure that employees wear personal protective
equipment as required in R 408.40751.
(d) Assure that an employee in charge of the operation
of oxygen or fuel gas supply equipment or of oxygen
or fuel gas systems is instructed and judged
competent for this work by the employer before
being left in charge. Rules and instructions covering
the operation and maintenance of oxygen or fuel
gas distribution piping systems shall be readily
available.
(2) An employee shall do all of the following:
(a) Use welding and cutting equipment as trained and
authorized.
(b) Use the protective equipment required by the
hazard and this part.
(c) Not tamper with safety devices.
(d) Report to the supervisor any faulty or defective
equipment.
(3) Welding operations shall not be permitted in the
following situations:
(a) In an area not authorized by the building or structure
occupant.
(b) In a sprinklered building while the sprinkler system
is impaired, unless a fire watch is provided.
(c) In the presence of a potentially explosive
atmosphere, such as mixtures of flammable gases,
vapors, liquids, or dusts with air.
R 408.40712 Requirements generally.
Rule 712. (1) A mixture of fuel gas with air or oxygen
shall not be permitted except when consumed by a burner or
torch.
(2) Only apparatus designed for use with fuel gas or
oxygen, such as a torch, regulator, pressure-reducing valve,
3
acetylene generator, and manifold, shall be used for welding
or cutting.
(3) The total volume of acetylene used per hour shall
not exceed 1/7 of the total volume of the acetylene supply in
the system.
(4) Fuel gas, oxygen, or compressed air shall not flow
from a cylinder or manifold through a torch or other device
equipped with a shutoff valve unless the pressure is reduced
by a regulator attached to the cylinder or manifold.
(5) An oxygen cylinder, fuel gas cylinder, cylinder valve,
coupling regulator, hose, and apparatus shall be kept in good
operating condition and shall be kept free from defects.
(6) An oxygen cylinder, fuel gas cylinder, cylinder valve,
coupling regulator, hose, and apparatus shall be kept free
from oily or greasy substances and shall not be handled with
oily hands or gloves. A jet of oxygen shall not be permitted to
strike oily surfaces or greasy clothes and shall not be
permitted to enter a fuel, oil, or other storage tank.
(7) Oxygen shall only be used for welding or cutting.
(8) Welders shall place welding cable, hose, and other
equipment so that it is clear of passageways, ladders, and
stairways, or shall assure that it is protected against damage
and does not create a hazard to an employee.
(9) After welding operations are completed, a sign or
other means shall be used to provide a warning of the hot
metal.
CAUTION
Welding may produce fumes and gases hazardous to health.
Use adequate ventilation.
See American national standards institute standard
ANSI/AWS Z49.1, 1973 edition,
Safety in Welding and Cutting and Allied Processes.
(2) A storage container of brazing filler metals
containing cadmium in significant amounts shall carry a
special label which shall read as follows:
WARNING
Contains cadmiumpoisonous fumes may be formed on
heating.
Do not breathe fumes.
Use only with adequate ventilation such as fume collectors,
exhaust ventilators, or air-supplied respirators.
See American national standards institute standard
ANSI/AWS Z49.1, 1973 edition,
Safety in Welding and Cutting and Allied Processes.
If chest pain, cough, or fever develops after use, contact
physician immediately.
(3) A storage container of brazing or gas welding fluxes
containing fluorides shall have a special label which shall
read as follows:
R 408.40713 Working in confined spaces.

Rule 713. (1) Before the start of a welding operation in a
confined space, the atmosphere shall be tested and
recorded. Ventilation shall be provided and maintained in
accordance with the requirements of the department of labor
and economic growth.
(a) The records shall be maintained at the jobsite as
prescribed in Construction Safety Standard Part 1
General Rules, R 408.40101 et seq.
(2) When working in a confined space, the torch valves
and the gas supply valve and oxygen valve outside the
confined space shall be shut off during the lunch period,
overnight, or during any other prolonged period and the torch
and hose shall be removed from the confined space. Openend fuel gas and oxygen hoses shall be immediately
removed from enclosed spaces when they are disconnected
from the torch or other gas-consuming device.
(3) When electrodes are used in a confined space and
welding is suspended during the lunch period, overnight, or
during any other prolonged period, the electrode shall be
removed from the holder and the machine shall be shut off.
The holders shall be placed or protected so that they cannot
make electrical contact with employees or conducting
objects.
(4) A gas cylinder or a welding machine used for
welding operations in a confined space shall be placed on
the outside of the space where work is being performed.
(5) If an employee must enter a confined space through
a small opening to perform welding operations, another
employee trained in rescue procedures and equipped with
the means necessary to effect a rescue shall be stationed
outside the confined space in position to watch the welder.
When a safety harness and lifeline are used, they shall be
provided for as prescribed in Construction Safety Standard
Part 45 Fall Protection, R 408.44501 et seq., and shall be
attached to the welders body so that his or her body cannot
be jammed in a small exit opening.
R 408.40721 Cylinders manufacturing, labeling, periodic

testing, and marking.
Rule 721. (1) A cylinder shall be manufactured, labeled,
and periodically tested in accordance with the specifications
of the federal department of transportation requirements
published in 49 C.F.R. Part 178, Subpart C, Specification for
Cylinders, which are adopted by reference in R 408.40709.
(2) A cylinder shall be legibly marked with either the
chemical or trade name. Marking shall be by stenciling,
stamping, or labeling and shall not be tampered with or be
readily removable. Whenever practical, the marking shall be
located on the shoulder of the cylinder.
(3) An unlabeled cylinder shall not be used.
(4) An empty cylinder shall be so marked at the time of
depletion.
R 408.40714 Warning tags and labels.

Rule 714. (1) A storage container of welding materials
with filler metals or fusible granular materials shall carry a
special label which shall read as follows:
R 408.40722 Storage.
Rule 722. (1) An oxygen cylinder shall be stored not
less than 20 feet from fuel gas cylinders or any highly
combustible material, such as, but not limited to, oil, grease,
CAUTION
Contains fluorides.
This flux, when heated, gives off fumes that may irritate the
eye, nose, and throat.
Avoid fumesuse only in well-ventilated spaces.
Avoid contact of flux with eyes or skin.
Do not take internally.
R 408.40715 Torches generally.
Rule 715. (1) A torch shall be inspected before each
shift for leaking shutoff valves, hose and tip connections, or
clogged tips. A defective torch shall not be used.
(2) A clogged tip opening shall be cleaned with a
device, such as a drill or cleaning wire, designed for this
purpose.
(3) A torch shall be lighted by a friction lighter and not
by a match or hot work.
CYLINDERS
4
excelsior, flammable gas, or a source of ignition, or shall be
separated from the material by a noncombustible wall not
less than 5 feet (1.6 meters) high which has a fire resistance
rating of 1 hour.
(2) A cylinder shall be stored away from any source of
heat in excess of 125 degrees Fahrenheit.
(3) A cylinder, whether full or empty, in storage or
during shipment, or with the regulator removed, shall have
the valve closed and the cap connected in place if a cap is
provided in the design, or shall be otherwise protected.
(4) Storage shall be set up to ensure first in, first out
usage.
(5) A cylinder storage area shall be posted with the
names of the individual gases stocked, and a warning shall
be posted against tampering by an unauthorized employee.
An assigned storage area shall be located where a cylinder
will not be knocked over or struck by a passing or falling
object.
(6) Where different gases are stored, they shall be
grouped by types. Groupings shall separate the fuel gases
from the oxidizing gases as specified in subrule (1) of this
rule.
(7) A storage area for cylinders shall be well ventilated.
(8) A cylinder shall not be stored in basements or pits.
(9) All storage of fuel gas or oxygen within a building
shall be in accordance with the specifications of National Fire
Protection Association Standard NFPA 58, 1974 edition
Liquefied Petroleum Gas Code, which is adopted by
reference in R 408.40709.
(10) Where a liquid or gaseous oxygen system is used to
supply gaseous oxygen for welding and cutting and the
system has a storage capacity of more than 20,000 cubic
feet (560 cubic meters), measured at 14.7 psia and 70
degrees Fahrenheit, including unconnected reserves at the
site, the system shall be as prescribed in National Fire
Protection Association Standard NFPA 50, 1974 edition,
Standards for Bulk Oxygen Systems at Consumer Sites,
which is adopted by reference in R 408.40709.
R 408.40723 Cylinders generally.
Rule 723. (1) A chain, bracket, or other restraining
device shall be used at all times to prevent cylinders from
falling.
(2) A cylinder shall stand valve end up at all times.
(3) A cylinder shall not be dropped, dragged, rolled on
its side, or struck violently.
(4) When using a crane or hoisting device, a cylinder
shall be lifted only by cradles or enclosed platforms. An
electromagnet, hook, rope, or sling shall not be used.
(5) A frozen or ice-clogged valve shall be thawed either
by warm air or warm water and shall be dried before using.
Boiling water or a flame shall not be used. Force shall not be
applied to a valve or cap to loosen a cylinder frozen in place.
(6) Gases shall not be mixed within a cylinder except by
the supplier. Only the owner of the cylinder, if the owner is
qualified, or a person trained, qualified, and authorized by the
owner, shall refill a cylinder. The contents of a cylinder shall
be used only for those purposes intended by the supplier.
(7) A cylinder shall not be placed where it will become a
part of the electrical circuit by accidental grounding or where
it may be burned by an electric welding arc. A cylinder shall
not be placed so that hot slag or flame can reach it unless
the cylinder is protected by a fire-resistant shield. An
electrode shall not be tapped against a cylinder to strike an
arc.
(8) A regulator, gauge, or hose shall not be
interchangeable between fuel gas, oxidizing gas, or inert gas.
Connections for compressed gas cylinders shall be as
prescribed in American National Standard Institute Standard
ANSI/ASA B57.1, 1965 edition, Compressed Gas Cylinder

Valve Outlet and Inlet Connections, which is adopted by
(9) A cylinder valve shall be opened slightly for an
instant and then closed before connecting to a regulator or
manifold to clear the valve of dust and dirt. The employee
opening the valve shall stand to one side of the outlet, not in
front of it. This shall not be done near a source of ignition.
Pressure to a regulator shall be introduced by slowly opening
the cylinder valve. An acetylene cylinder valve shall only be
opened enough to allow proper working pressure, but shall
not be opened more than 1 1/2 turns of the spindle.
(10) Acetylene shall not be utilized or piped, except in
cylinder manifolds, at a pressure in excess of 15 psig.
(11) A cylinder to which a regulator is attached shall not
be moved unless secured to a hand or powered truck
designed or equipped for this purpose.
(12) A cylinder valve shall be closed in any of the
(a) When moving the cylinder.
(b) When the work is finished or is left unattended
during the lunch period, overnight, or any other
prolonged period.
(c) When the cylinder is empty.
(d) When the regulator is removed.
(13) A cylinder without fixed handwheels shall have
keys, handles, or nonadjustable wrenches on valve stems
while in service. A multiple cylinder installation shall require
only 1 key or handle for each manifold. A hammer shall not
be used to open a cylinder valve or loosen a cap.
(14) A cylinder, whether full or empty, shall not be used
as a roller or support.
(15) A damaged or a leaking cylinder, a cylinder with a
valve stuck open, or a valve in need of repair shall be taken
outdoors away from sources of ignition, tagged with a
warning sign, and the manufacturer or distributor notified.
Complete removal of the stem from the cylinder valve shall
be avoided.
(16) Nothing shall be placed on top of the cylinder.
R 408.40729 Manifolding.
Rule 729. Manifolding used for a welding operation shall
be as prescribed in the general industry safety standard Part
12 Welding and Cutting, R 408.11231 to R 408.11252.
HOSES AND REGULATORS

R 408.40731 Hoses and connections.
Rule 731. (1) Hose and hose connections used for a
welding operation shall be as prescribed in paragraph 3.5.6
of the American National Standard Institute Standard
ANSI/AWS Z49.1, 1973 edition, Safety in Welding and
Cutting and Allied Processes, which is adopted by reference
in R 408.40709.
(2) Parallel lengths of hose taped together shall have
not more than 4 inches out of each 12 inches covered by
tape.
(3) Parallel hoses shall be color coded as follows:
(a) Redfuel gases. See subrule (4) of this rule.
(b) Greenoxygen.
(c) Blackinert gas or air.
(4) The employer shall assure that only approved hose
is used for LP gas.
(5) A hose and its connections shall be inspected
before each shift for burns, leaks, worn places, or other
defects which could affect the safety of an employee.
Suspected leaks shall be checked by use of a grease-free
soap solution.
5
(6) A defective hose shall not be used, but shall be
repaired or replaced.
(7) A hose that has been subject to a flashback or has
been repaired or spliced shall be tested at twice the normal
pressure, but not less than 300 psig.
(8) A box used for the storage of gas hose shall be
ventilated.
R 408.40732 Regulators and protective devices.
Rule 732. (1) The use of regulators shall comply with
the following requirements:
(a) Regulators shall be used only for the gas and
pressure of which they are intended.
(b) Regulators shall be repaired by authorized and
trained personnel or shall be returned to the supplier
for calibration or repairs.
(c) Regulators shall not be removed until the cylinder
valve is closed and the regulator drained.
(d) Regulators shall have gauges marked Use No Oil
when used for oxygen.
(2) Backflow prevention devices shall be installed on
the fuel gas and oxygen hoses.
(3) A cylinder equipped with a shutoff valve shall have a
regulator attached to the cylinder valve or manifold during
use.
ARC WELDING AND CUTTING

R 408.40741 Arc welding machines.
Rule 741. (1) An arc welding machine shall be capable
of operating safely in the environment in which it is located.
The design and construction shall enable the machine to
carry its rated load with rated temperature rise where the
temperature of the cooling air is not more than 104 degrees
Fahrenheit and where the altitude is not more than 3,300 feet
(1,000 meters approx.).
(2) Where unusual service conditions exist, such as
corrosive fumes, steam, oil vapor, flammable gases,
vibration, shock, dust, or weather, a specially designed arc
welding machine shall be used.
R 408.40742 Open circuit and no-load voltages of arc
welding machines.
Rule 742. (1) When an arc welding machine is operated
without being connected to a load, the open circuit voltage
shall not exceed the values shown in table 1 when rated
voltage is applied to the primary winding or when a
generator-type arc welding machine is operating at maximum
rated no-load speed.
(2) When welding and cutting processes require valves
of open circuit voltages higher than 100, insulation or other
means shall be provided to prevent the operator from making
accidental contact with the high voltage.
(3) Equipment working through resistors from DC trolley
voltages or 250 to 600 volts shall have a protective device for
automatically disconnecting the power during arc off periods.
(4) Automatic control devices for reducing no-load
voltage below 50 volts shall be provided where AC welding is
to be done under wet conditions that could provide a shock
hazard.
TABLE 1
Maximum Open Circuit Voltages of Welding Machines
Maximum open
Voltage
Welding
circuit (no-load)
Automatic
Manual & semi
current
machines
automatic machines
ac
80 rms
100 rms
dc>10% Ripple
100
80 rms
voltage
average
dc<10% Ripple
100
100 average
voltage
average
R 408.40743
Design requirements for arc welding

machines.
Rule 743. (1) A controller integrally mounted in an
electric motor-driven welding machine shall have the capacity
for carrying rated motor current and shall be capable of
making and interrupting stalled rotor current of the motor.
(2) Control apparatus shall be enclosed except for the
operating wheels, levers, or handles. The handles and
wheels shall be large enough to be grasped by a gloved
hand.
(3) Input power terminals, tap change devices, and live
metal parts connected to input circuits shall be completely
enclosed and shall be accessible only by use of tools.
(4) Welding lead terminals shall be protected from
accidental electrical contact by personnel or metal objects. If
a welding lead terminal normally used for connection to the
work is connected to a grounded enclosure, it shall be done
by a conductor not less than 2 sizes smaller than the
grounding conductor and it shall be so marked.
(5) Portable control devices, such as push buttons,
shall not be connected to an AC circuit of more than 120
volts. Exposed metal parts of a portable control device
operating above 50 volts shall be grounded.
(6) Auto transformers or AC reactors shall not be used
to draw welding current directly from any AC power source
having a voltage of more than 80 volts.
R 408.40744 Installation.
Rule 744. (1) The frame or case of a welding machine
shall be grounded, unless the manufacturer does not
recommend it.
(2) The work on which the operator welds shall be
grounded. A wire used to ground a workpiece shall be
capable of carrying the full welding current. Connections of
the ground shall be mechanically sound and strong. When a
single ground return cable services more than 1 unit, the safe
current-carrying capacity of the cable shall equal or exceed
the total maximum output capacities of all units which it
services.
(3) A conduit containing an electrical conductor shall
not be used for completing a work-lead circuit.
(4) An arc welder shall meet the applicable
requirements of article 630, Electric Welders of the National
Fire Protection Association NFPA 70 National Electrical
Code, 1978 edition, which is adopted by reference in
R 408.40709.
(5) A pipeline in service shall not be used as a
permanent part of a work-lead circuit, but may be used
during construction, extension, or repair if current is not
carried through threaded joints, flanged bolted joints, or
caulked joints and if special precautions are used to avoid
sparking at the connection of the work-lead cable.
(6) Chains, wire ropes, cranes, hoists, and elevators
used for carrying loads shall not be used to carry a welding
current.
6
(7) A welding cable shall be protected against damage,
entanglement, or contact with power supply or high-tension
wires.
(8) A welding machine that is not provided with a
controller or disconnect switch as an integral part shall have
a controller or disconnect switch with overload protection
provided. A disconnect switch with overload protection or
overload disconnect protection, or equivalent, shall be
provided for each outlet used by a portable welding machine,
unless the machine is equipped with a disconnect switch and
overload protection.
(9) The rated current-carrying capacity of the supply
conductors for individual machines shall not be less than the
rated primary current for the welding machine. The rated
current-carrying capacity of the conductors for a group of
welding machines may be less than the sum of the rated
primary current of the welding machines supplied. The
conductor rating shall be determined in each case according
to the machine loading based on the use to be made of each
welding machine and the allowance permissible if all the
machines supplied by the conductor will not be in use at the
same time.
(10) Where a welding machine is working sufficiently
close to another machine so that a welding operator is likely
to touch the exposed parts of more than 1 electrode holder
simultaneously, the machine shall be connected so as to
minimize shock hazard as follows:
(a) DC machine shall be connected with the same
polarity.
(b) AC machine shall be connected to the same phase
of the supply circuit and with the same
instantaneous polarity.
(11) A current-carrying part passing through the portion
of the holder that the employee grips by hand and the outer
surface of the jaws of the holder shall be insulated against
the maximum voltage encountered to ground.
Make sure the work lead is secured to the work.

Make sure the magnetic work clamps are free of
spatter on the contact surfaces.
(c) Spread out the welding cable, if necessary, to
prevent overheating and damage.
(d) Make sure grounding connections are secured to a
good ground.
(e) Make sure the required switching equipment for
shutting down the machine has been provided.
(8) A welder shall not curl or loop welding cable around
his body.
(9) An employee working in the vicinity of arc welding
operations and exposed to the direct rays of the arc shall be
shielded by a noncombustible or flameproof screen provided
by the employer, at no expense to the employee.
(10) When a welding machine used indoors is powered
by an internal combustion engine, the atmosphere indoors to
which an employee is exposed shall be maintained in
accordance with the requirements of the department of labor
and economic growth.
R 408.40745 Welding cables and electrode holders.

Rule 745. (1) An arc welding and cutting cable shall be
of the completely insulated, flexible-type and shall be capable
of handling the maximum current requirements of the work,
taking into account the duty cycle under which the welder is
working.
(2) A manual electrode holder shall be specifically
designed for arc welding and cutting and shall be capable of
handling the maximum rated current required by the
electrode.
R 408.40751 Personal protective equipment.

Rule 751. (1) Face and eye protection shall be worn by
a welder when performing welding operations and by other
employees exposed to a risk of injury from spatter or flash, or
both. The protective devices shall be provided for as
prescribed in construction safety standard Part 6 Personal
Protective Equipment, R 408.40617, R 408.40623, and
R 408.40624.
(2) Welding gloves shall be provided for by the
employer, at no expense to the employee, and shall be worn
to protect the hands and wrists.
(3) When necessary, such as when performing
overhead arc welding, sleeves shall be provided for by the
employer, at no expense to the employee, and shall be worn
to protect the arms when arc welding.
(4) Leather shoes or other appropriate apparel that
cover the ankle shall be worn. The employee shall provide
leather shoes or other appropriate apparel unless specifically
otherwise provided for in a collective bargaining agreement
or other employer-employee agreement.
(5) Other protective devices, such as, but not limited to,
body protection, chaps, and curtains shall be provided for by
the employer, at no expense to the employee, and shall be
used when an employee is exposed to a risk of injury by flash
burn, sparks, and foreign bodies.
R 408.40746 Operation.
Rule 746. (1) Engine fuel, cooling water, or shielding
gas shall not be allowed to leak.
(2) A welding machine shall be disconnected when
being moved and shall be turned off when not in use.
(3) Electrodes shall be retracted or removed when not
in use. Electrode holders not in use shall be placed so that
they cannot make electrical contact with an employee, fuel,
gas tanks, or conducting objects.
(4) A welder shall not let live electrodes or holders
touch his bare skin or damp clothing. When arc welding is
performed in wet conditions or under a condition of high
humidity, the welder shall be protected against electric shock.
(5) Electrode holders shall not be cooled by immersion
in water.
(6) Welding shall not be permitted where fumes of
chlorinated hydrocarbons are present or will reach or be
drawn into the atmosphere surrounding the welding
operation.
(7) Before starting an arc welding operation, the welder
shall do all of the following:
(a)
(b)
R 408.40747 Maintenance of arc welding machines.

Rule 747. (1) Spliced welding cable shall not be used
within 10 feet (3.05 meters) of an arc welding machine.
(2) Equipment in need of repair that constitutes a safety
hazard shall not be used or put in use until repairs are made
by a knowledgeable employee or an outside service.
(3) Cut insulation on work and lead cable or exposed
bare conductors of an arc welding machine shall be
protected by electrical tape and shall be made watertight or
the conductor shall be replaced. Splices shall be made by
insulated welded joints or pressure connectors.
(4) An arc welding machine that has become wet shall
be thoroughly dried and tested before use.
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
GENERAL FIRE RULES

R 408.40761 Fire precautions.
Rule 761. (1) Welding operations shall not be performed
within 50 feet of explosives, stored cylinders, or stored fuel.
7
Combustible and flammable materials located within 35 feet
of a welding operation shall either be removed or covered
with fire-resistant material.
(2) Cracks or openings through which sparks could
pass in the floor or wall that are within 35 feet of a welding
operation shall be covered with a fire-resistant material.
(3) A wood floor within 10 feet of a welding operation
shall be protected by either wetting down, covering with
sand, or covering with a fire-resistant material.
(4) A minimum of 1 2A-10BC portable fire extinguisher
shall be immediately available to the work area during
welding operations.
(5) Conveyor and exhaust systems within 35 feet of a
welding operation that might carry sparks or hot slag shall be
protected or shut down.
(6) An employer shall designate a person as
responsible for fire safety during a welding operation where a
fire could start or where 1 of the following conditions exists:
(a) Appreciable combustible and flammable materials
are more than 35 feet from a welding operation but
are easily ignited.
(b) Combustible and flammable material is adjacent to
the opposite side of a metal partition, wall, ceiling, or
roof that is likely to ignite by conduction or radiation.
(c) If there is a possibility that a smoldering fire may
have started, the person shall remain at the scene
of the work for not less than 30 minutes after the
welding operation has stopped. Such personnel
shall be instructed as to the specific anticipated fire
hazards and how the firefighting equipment
provided is to be used.
(7) The connection, by welding, of branches to a
pipeline carrying a flammable substance shall be performed
in accordance with the regulations of the department of
transportation, 49 C.F.R. Part 192, Minimum Federal Safety

Standards for Gas Pipelines, which are adopted by reference
in R 408.40709.
(8) Before welding, cutting, or heating is commenced
on any surface covered by a preservative coating whose
flammability is not known, a test shall be made by a
competent person to determine its flammability. Preservative
coatings shall be considered to be highly flammable when
scrapings burn with extreme rapidity.
(9) Precautions shall be taken to prevent ignition of
highly flammable hardened preservative coatings. When
coatings are determined to be highly flammable, they shall be
stripped from the area to be heated to prevent ignition.
R 408.40762
Welding drums, barrels, tanks, or other

containers.
Rule 762. (1) Welding operations shall not be performed
on drums, barrels, tanks, or other containers until they have
been cleaned of all flammable, combustible, or toxic
materials or fumes.
(2) All pipelines or other connections to drums, barrels,
or tanks shall be disconnected or blanked before performing
welding operations.
(3) Hollow spaces or cavities shall be vented and either
filled with water or purged with an inert gas before
preheating, cutting, or welding.
(4) An opening shall be maintained during welding and
cutting to vent gases or vapors.
(5) Welding on natural gas pipelines shall be as
prescribed by the regulations of the department of
transportation, 49 C.F.R. Part 192, Minimum Federal Safety
Standards for Gas Pipelines, which are adopted by reference
in R 408.40709.
4
EXCAVATION AND SHORING
MIOSHA-STD-1306 (09/05)
14 Pages

DIRECTOR'S OFFICE
Filed with the Secretary of State on August 17, 1979 (as amended November 23, 1982)
(as amended January 11, 1988) (as amended July 8, 1993) (as amended September 3, 1996)
This rule takes effect 15 days after filing with the Secretary of State
(By authority conferred on the director of the department of consumer and industry services by sections 19 and 21
of Act No. 154 of the Public Acts of 1974, as amended, and Executive Reorganization Order No. 1996-2, being
408.1019, 408.1021, and 445.2001 of the Michigan Compiled Laws)
R 408.40951 of the Michigan Administrative Code is effective as of the date of this amendment.
PART 9. EXCAVATION, TRENCHING, AND SHORING

TABLE OF CONTENTS
R 408.40901 Scope. ............................................................. 1
R 408.40925 Definitions A to Q. ........................................... 1
R 408.40926 Definitions; S. .................................................. 1
R 408.40927 Definitions; T, U............................................... 2
R 408.40931 Locating utility lines. ........................................ 2
R 408.40932 Excavation; consideration of soil types;........... 2
water; slide hazards. ............................................................. 2
R 408.40933 Excavation; obstructions; retaining.................. 2
materials; egress; guarding; heavy ....................................... 2
equipment. ............................................................................ 2
R 408.40934 Hazardous atmospheres; testing and .............. 3
controls. ................................................................................ 3
R 408.40941 Excavation; angle of repose. ........................... 3
R 408.40901 Scope.
Rule 901. This part pertains to the digging of excavations
and trenches which an employee is required to enter and the
supporting systems used on construction operations.
R 408.40925 Definitions A to Q.
Rule 925. (1) Angle of repose means the maximum
permissible slope as determined by table 1.
(2) Braces or struts means the horizontal cross
members of a shoring system that bear against the
uprights or stringers.
(3) Excavation means any man-made cavity or
depression in the earths surface, including its sides,
walls, or faces, formed by earth removal. For the
purpose of this part, a trench is an excavation.
(4) Hazardous atmosphere means an atmosphere
which, by reason of being any of the following, may
cause death, illness, or injury:
(a) Explosive.
(b) Flammable.
(c) Poisonous.
(d) Corrosive.
(e) Irritating.
(f) Oxygen deficient.
(g) Toxic.
(h) Otherwise harmful.
R 408.40942 Supporting systems; angle of repose; tie .........4

backs; tight sheeting; additional bracing................................4
R 408.40943 Additional requirements for trench support ......4
systems. ................................................................................4
R 408.40944 Benching and sloping.......................................4
R 408.40945 Trenching boxes and shields. ..........................4
R 408.40946 Caisson excavation; employee protection........4
R 408.40951 Walkways, sidewalks, roadways. .....................4
R 408.40952 Openings in roadways. ....................................5
R 408.40953 Adjacent structures; protection; design; ...........5
inspection of shoring, bracing, and........................................5
underpinning..........................................................................5
APPENDIX ............................................................................6
(5)
(6)
Kickouts means the accidental release or failure

of a stringer or brace.
Qualified person means a person who, by
possession of a recognized degree or certificate of
professional standing, or who, by extensive
knowledge,
training,
and
experience,
has
successfully demonstrated the ability to solve or
resolve problems relating to the subject matter and
work.
R 408.40926 Definitions; S.
Rule 926. (1) Sheet piling means a continuous row of
timber or steel piles driven in close contact to
provide a tight wall to resist lateral pressure of
water, adjacent earth, or other materials.
(2) Sides, sometimes called faces or walls, means
the vertical or inclined earth surfaces formed as a
result of excavation work.
(3) Slope means the acute angle formed by the side
of a trench or excavation and the horizontal plane.
(4) Soil means any of the following:
(a) Clay a very fine textured soil that derives
its resistance to displacement from cohesion
and may be:
2
(i)
(5)
(6)
Soft clay a clay-type soil that has an

unconfined strength of less than 1.0 ton
per square foot.
(ii) Medium clay, sometimes called plastic
a clay-type soil that has a minimum
unconfined strength of 1.0 ton per square
foot.
(iii) Firm soil a clay-type soil that is
resistant to forces causing rupture or
displacement. A firm clay has a minimum
unconfined strength of 1.5 tons per square
foot.
(iv) Stiff clay a clay-type soil that is very
resistant to forces causing rupture or
displacement. A stiff clay has a minimum
unconfined strength of 2.5 tons per square
foot.
(b) Fill a manmade soil condition that may
be constructed of any type of soil or
combination thereof.
(c) Granular soil a course grained soil that
does not possess cohesion but derives its
strength from internal friction.
(d) Organic soil A soil that contains
significant amounts of peat, muck, or marl.
(e) Running soil any type of soil that has
insufficient strength to stand unsupported.
Running soil tends to run or slough into the
excavation as the excavation is being dug.
Stringers means the horizontal members of a
trench shoring system whose sides bear against the
uprights or earth.
Supporting system means the total system
necessary to restrain the sides of an excavation
from moving.
R 408.40927 Definitions; T, U.
Rule 927. (1) Tight sheeting means a continuous row
of wood or steel sheets in close contact to provide a
tight wall, but is not driven as with piling.
(2) Toe of slope means the point at which the side of
an excavation intersects the lowest level of the
excavation.
(3) Trench means an excavation having a depth
greater than its width measured at the bottom.
(4) Trench jack, means a screw or hydraulic jack
used as a brace in a trench shoring system.
(5) Trench shield sometimes called a trench box,
means a trench shoring system composed of steel
plates and bracing, welded or bolted together, which
can be moved along as work progresses.
(6) Uprights means the vertical members of a trench
shoring system.
R 408.40931 Locating utility lines.
Rule 931. (1) An employer shall not excavate in a street,
highway, public place, a private easement of a
public utility, or near the location of a public utility
facility owned, maintained, or installed on a
customers
premises,
without
having
first
ascertained the location of all underground facilities
of a public utility in the proposed area of excavation.
(2) Upon receiving the information from the public
utility, an employer shall exercise reasonable care
when working in close proximity to the underground
facilities of any public utility. If the facilities are to be
exposed, or are likely to be exposed, only hand
digging shall be employed in such circumstances
(3)
and such support, as may be reasonably necessary

for protection of the facilities, shall be provided in
and near the construction area.
When any contact with, or damage to, any pipe,
cable, or its protective coating, or any other
underground facility of a public utility occurs, the
public utility shall be notified immediately by the
employer responsible for operations causing the
damage. If an energized electrical cable is severed,
an energized conductor is exposed, or dangerous
fluids or gasses are escaping from a broken line, the
employer shall evacuate the employees from the
immediate area while awaiting the arrival of the
public utility personnel.
R 408.40932 Excavation; consideration of soil types;

water; slide hazards.
Rule 932. (1) If different textured soils are encountered in
the side of an excavation, each soil type of the
excavation shall be cut to the proper angle of
repose, except that the slope shall not steepen
between the toe of the slope and the ground level
where soft clay or running soil is encountered in the
lower cut.
(2) If the excavation is a trench, a trench shoring
system shall be used or the sides shall be properly
sloped to protect against a cave-in.
(3) An employee shall not work in an excavation in
which there is accumulated water or in which water
is accumulating unless precautions have been taken
to protect employees against the hazards posed by
water accumulation. The precautions necessary to
protect employees adequately vary with each
situation, but may include special support or shield
systems to protect from cave-ins, water removal to
control the level of accumulating water, or the use of
a safety harness and lifeline.
(4) If water is controlled or prevented from
accumulating by the use of water removal
equipment, the water removal equipment and
operation shall be monitored by a qualified person
or a monitoring system to ensure that the equipment
is properly operated.
(5) An ongoing inspection of an excavation or trench
shall be made by a qualified person. After every
rainstorm or other hazard-producing occurrence, an
inspection shall be made by a qualified employee
for evidence of possible slides or cave-ins. Where
these conditions are found, all work shall cease until
additional precautions, such as additional shoring or
reducing the slope, have been accomplished.
(6) An excavation that is cut into a rock formation shall
be scaled to remove loose material.
(7) When installed forms, walls, or similar structures
create a trench between the form, wall, or structure
and the side of the excavation, an employer shall
comply with the provisions of R 408.40941 to
R 408.40944.
R 408.40933 Excavation; obstructions; retaining
materials; egress; guarding; heavy
equipment.
Rule 933. (1) A tree, boulder, rock fragments, or other
obstructions whose movement could cause injury to
an employee shall be removed or supported.
(2) An excavation that an employee is required to enter
shall have excavated and other material stored and
3
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
retained not less than 2 feet from the excavation

edge.
When a shoring system is used, the system shall be
designed and used to resist the added pressure
when heavy equipment, material handling
equipment, or material is located near an
excavation.
When mobile equipment is utilized or permitted
adjacent to an excavation where the operators
vision is restricted, stop logs or barricades shall be
utilized or a signal person shall be used.
An excavation 48 or more inches in depth and
occupied by an employee shall be provided with
either a ladder extending not less than 3 feet above
the top as a means of access or with a ramp
meeting the requirements of subrule (6) of this rule.
Lateral travel along the wall of a trench to a ladder
or other means of egress shall not exceed 25 feet.
An earth ramp may be used in place of a ladder if it
meets all of the following requirements:
(a) The ramp material shall be stable.
(b) The sides of the excavation above the ramp
shall be maintained to the angle of repose or
sheeted or shored along the means of egress.
(c) The degree of angle of the ramp shall not be
more than 45 degrees.
(d) Vertical height between the floor of the trench
and the toe of the ramp shall not exceed 30
inches.
R 408.40934 Hazardous atmospheres; testing and

controls.
Rule 934. To prevent exposure to harmful levels of
atmospheric contaminants and to assure acceptable
atmospheric conditions, all of the following requirements shall
apply:
(a) Where an oxygen deficiency (an atmosphere that
contains less than 19.5% oxygen) or a hazardous
atmosphere exists, such as in excavations in areas
where hazardous substances are stored nearby, the

atmosphere in the excavation shall be tested before
employees enter excavations that are more than 4
feet (1.22 m) deep.
(b) Precautions shall be taken to prevent employee
exposure to atmospheres that contain less than
19.5% oxygen and any other hazardous
atmosphere. These precautions include providing
proper respiratory protection or ventilation in
accordance with the requirements of this part.
(c) Precautions shall be taken, such as providing
ventilation, to prevent employee exposure to an
atmosphere that contains a concentration of a
flammable gas in excess of 20% of the lower
flammable limit of the gas.
(d) When controls are used that are intended to reduce
the level of atmospheric contaminants to acceptable
levels, testing shall be conducted as often as
necessary to ensure that the atmosphere remains
safe.
R 408.40941 Excavation; angle of repose.
Rule 941. (1) The side of an excavation more than 5 feet
deep shall be sloped as prescribed in table 1,
unless supported as prescribed in this part.
(2) An excavation less than 5 feet in depth shall also be
effectively protected when examination of the
ground indicates hazardous earth movement may
be expected.
(3) If 1 side of a trench is 5 feet or less in depth and the
other side is deeper than 5 feet, the side deeper
than 5 feet shall be protected as provided in this
part. All excavated material shall be placed on the
low side if possible.
(4) Special attention shall be given to a side that may
be adversely affected by weather or moisture
content.
TABLE 1
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE ANGLE OF REPOSE FOR THE SIDE OF AN EXCAVATION IN EXCESS OF 5' DEPTH
4
R 408.40942 Supporting systems; angle of repose; tie
backs; tight sheeting; additional bracing.
Rule 942. (1) The angle of repose and the design of the
supporting system for a side of an excavation shall
be based on the evaluation of all of the following
factors:
(a) Depth of cut and type of soil.
(b) Possible variation in the water content of the
material while the excavation is open.
(c) Anticipated changes in the material due to
exposure to air, sun, water, or freezing.
(d) Load imposed by structures, equipment,
overlying material, or stored material.
(e) Vibration from traffic, equipment, or blasting.
(2) A support system shall be designed by a qualified
employee. The design of the supporting system
shall be maintained at the jobsite. Changes from the
design of the support system shall be approved by a
qualified employee.
(3) Tie rods and other forms of tie backs used to
restrain the top of sheeting shall be anchored a
minimum of 10 feet. The measurement to the
anchor point shall start at the intersection of an
angle of repose with the surface of the soil retained.
The tie back and anchor shall be capable of
restraining any pressure exerted on the system.
(4) When tight sheeting or sheet piling is used,
pressures due to existing ground water conditions
shall be considered in the design. Sheet piling shall
be driven to the predetermined depth set forth in the
required design. Changes from the design shall be
approved by the designer of the support system.
(5) Materials used for a supporting system shall be in
good serviceable condition. When timbers are used,
they shall be sound and free of large or loose knots.
(6) A supporting system shall include additional bracing
approved by the designer of the support system
when the sides of excavations are cut adjacent to a
previous known excavation or a known fill,
particularly when the separation between the
previous excavation and the new excavation is less
than the depth of the excavation.
(7) Tight sheeting shall be braced or anchored at the
bottom and along the vertical plane to prevent
lateral movement.
R 408.40943 Additional requirements for trench support
systems.
Rule 943. (1) A brace or trench jack that is used for a
support system for a trench shall be spaced as
designed and shall be secured to prevent sliding,
failing, or kickout.
(2) The backfilling and the removal of a support system
for a trench shall progress together from the bottom
of the trench. In unstable or running soil, the jacks
and braces shall be removed from above the trench
after employees have cleared the trench.
(3) The excavation of material to a level that is not more
than 2 feet (.61 m) below the bottom of the
members of a support system shall be permitted,
but only if the system is designed to resist the forces
calculated for the full depth of the trench and if there
are no indications, while the trench is open, of a
possible loss of soil from behind or below the
bottom of the support system.
(4) The installation of a support system shall be closely
coordinated with the excavation of trenches.
R 408.40944 Benching and sloping.

Rule 944. (1) The angle of repose shall be flattened when
an excavation has water conditions, silty materials,
loose boulders, or areas where erosion, deep frost
action, or slide planes appear.
(2) When benching the side of an excavation, the
vertical rise shall not be more than 5 feet and the
step back shall extend at least to the angle of
repose as required by table 1.
(3) When benching a side of a trench, the height of the
lower bench shall not be more than the lesser of 5
feet or width of the trench measured at the bottom.
(4) An employee shall not be permitted to work on
sloped or benched excavations at levels above
another employee, except when an employee at the
lower level is protected from the hazard of falling,
rolling, or sliding material or equipment.
R 408.40945 Trenching boxes and shields.
Rule 945. (1) Portable trench boxes or sliding trench
shields may be used for the protection of personnel
in place of a shoring system or sloping. Where such
trench boxes or shields are used, they shall be
designed, constructed, and maintained in a manner
that provides protection equal to or greater than the
sheeting or shoring required for the trench.
(2) The use of benching in conjunction with a portable
trench box is permitted when the toe of the trench
box is not more than 2 feet above the trench bottom,
but only if the trench box is designed to resist the
forces calculated for the full depth of the trench and
if there are no indications, while the trench is open,
of a possible cave-in below the bottom of the trench
box.
(3) An employee shall not be allowed in shields when
shields are being installed, removed, or moved.
R 408.40946 Caisson excavation; employee protection.
Rule 946. The requirements for employee protection
during caisson excavation are found in R 408.41482 of
construction safety standard, Part 14. Tunnels, Shafts,
Caissons, and Cofferdams, being R 408.41401 et seq. of the
Michigan Administrative Code.
R 408.40951 Walkways, sidewalks, roadways.
Rule 951. (1) A walkway or sidewalk shall be kept clear
of excavated material and other obstructions.
(2) The walkways and sidewalks shall be lighted if used
during hours of darkness.
(3) A sidewalk shall not be undermined unless it is
shored to support a live load of not less than 125
pounds per square foot.
(4) A walkway or sidewalk that is adjacent to an
excavation shall be separated from the excavation
and protected by a guardrail as prescribed in Part
45. Fall Protection, being R 408.44501 et seq. of the
(5) An employee who is routed from a sidewalk or
walkway into a roadway to detour an excavation
shall be protected on both sides by guardrails or
barricades as prescribed in Part 45. Fall Protection,
being R 408.44501 et seq. of the Michigan
Administrative Code, or Part 22. Signals, Signs,
Tags, and Barricades, being R 408.42201 et seq. of
the Michigan Administrative Code.
5
(6)
(7)
(8)
If an employee or equipment is required or

permitted to cross a trench or ditch, a walkway,
runway, ramp, or bridge shall be provided and shall
have a designed capacity of not less than 3 times
the imposed load. A guardrail prescribed by the
provisions of Part 21. Guarding of Walking and
Working Areas and Part 45. Fall Protection, being R
408.42101 and R 408.44501 et seq., respectively, of
the Michigan Administrative Code, shall be
provided.
If equipment is routed across or onto a roadway,
protection shall be provided as prescribed in rule
2223 of Part 22. Signals, Signs, Tags, and
Barricades, being R 408.42233 of the Michigan
Administrative Code.
Guardrails or barricades, as prescribed in Part 22.
Signals, Signs, Tags, and Barricades and Part 45.
Fall Protection, being R 408.42201 et seq. and R
408.44501 et seq., respectively, of the Michigan
Administrative Code, shall be provided at all
remotely located excavations. All wells, pits, and
shafts shall be barricaded or covered. Temporary
wells, pits, and shafts shall be barricaded or
covered. Temporary wells, pits, and shafts shall be
backfilled when exploration and similar operations

are completed.
R 408.40952 Openings in roadways.
Rule 952. An open cut into a roadway shall be provided
with a barricade on all sides as prescribed in rule 2223 of
Part 22. Signals, Signs, Tags, and Barricades, being
R 408.42223 of the Michigan Administrative Code. Warning
lights shall be provided during hours of darkness.
R 408.40953 Adjacent structures; protection; design;
inspection of shoring, bracing, and
underpinning.
Rule 953. (1) A structure that is adjacent to an excavation
or trench below the level of the base or footing of
any foundation or retaining wall shall be protected
against settlement, lateral movement, undermining,
or washout.
(2) Before the excavation begins, the design of the
protection used shall be set forth by a qualified
person who is knowledgeable in the subject area.
(3) The shoring, bracing, and underpinning shall be
inspected daily or more often, as conditions warrant,
by a qualified employee.
APPENDIX
PART 9. EXCAVATIONS, TRENCHING & SHORING
The following pages are not a part of the mandatory requirements of this safety standard.
They are, however, examples of good engineering practices based on the rules contained herein.
EXAMPLES OF EXCAVATION
& TRENCH PROTECTION
EXCAVATIONS
10
11
12
13
14
5
LADDERS
MIOSHA-STD-1308 (01/05)
9 Pages

DIRECTOR'S OFFICE
Filed with the Secretary of State on August 31, 1976 (as amended May 16, 1978)
(as amended May 31, 1990) (as amended July 8, 1993) (as amended September 3, 1996)
This rule takes effect 15 days after filing with the Secretary of State
R 408.41127 of the Michigan Administrative Code is effective as of the date of this amendment.
PART 11. FIXED AND PORTABLE LADDERS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
R 408.41101. Scope. ............................................................1
R 408.41102. Rescission. .....................................................1
R 408.41103. Definitions; B to I. ...........................................1
R 408.41104. Definitions; J to R. ..........................................2
R 408.41105. Definitions; S to W..........................................2
R 408.41111. Adoption by reference; certification. ...............2
R 408.41112. Training requirements. ...................................3
R 408.41113. General requirements.....................................3
R 408.41115. Ladder loads; clearances; safety
devices; cages; wells; extensions. .................................4
R 408.41121. Inspection; faults and defects. ........................6
R 408.41122. Use generally. ................................................6
R 408.41123. Classification of ladders..................................6
R 408.41101. Scope.
Rule 1101. This
part
establishes
minimum
requirements for the construction, care, and training in the
use of portable and fixed ladders for construction,
alteration, or repair operations.
R 408.41102. Rescission.
Rule 1102. (1) Part 11 of the construction safety
commission standards, being R 408.2101 to R 408.2115
of the Michigan Administrative Code and appearing on
ages 4297 to 4301 of the 1967 Annual Supplement to the
Code, is rescinded.
(2) Part 12 of the construction safety commission
standards, being R 408.2201 to R 408.2205 of the
Michigan Administrative Code and appearing on pages
3315 and 3316 of the 1964-1965 Annual Supplement to
the Code is rescinded.
R 408.41103. Definitions; B to I.
Rule 1103. (1) Brand means marking by burning with
a hot iron.
(2) Cage, cage guard, or basket guard means an
enclosure that is fastened to the side rails of a fixed ladder
or to the structure to encircle the climbing space of a
ladder for the safety of a climber.
R 408.41124. Portable ladders............................................. 6

R 408.41125. Trestle ladders. .............................................. 7
R 408.41126. Use of stepladders. ........................................ 7
R 408.41127. Single and double-cleat ladders generally. .... 8
R 408.41128. Single-cleat ladders; width; side rails. ............ 8
R 408.41129. Double-cleat ladders; width; additional
rail; side rails. ................................................................ 8
R 408.41130. Storage of ladders.......................................... 8
R 408.41131. Handling and transporting of ladders. ............ 8
R 408.41132. Maintenance. ................................................. 8
R 408.41133. Special-purpose ladders. ............................... 8
R 408.41140. Fixed ladders. ................................................ 9
(3) Cleats means a ladders crosspieces of

rectangular cross section which are placed on edge and
on which a person may step to ascend or descend.
(4) Double-cleat ladder means a ladder that is similar
to a single-cleat ladder, but is wider and has an additional
rail in the center that allows simultaneous 2-way traffic.
(5) Equivalent means alternative designs, materials,
or methods that will provide an equal or greater degree of
safety for employees.
(6) Extension ladder means a non-self-supporting
portable ladder that is adjustable in length. An extension
ladder consists of 2 or more sections traveling in guides or
brackets arranged to permit adjustment of the ladders
length. An extension ladders size is designed by the sum
of the lengths of the sections measured along the side
rails.
(7) Extension trestle ladder means a self-supporting
portable ladder which is adjustable in length, which
consists of a trestle ladder base and a vertically adjustable
single ladder, and which has suitable means for locking
the ladders together. The size is designated by the length
of the rail of the trestle ladder base.
(8) Fixed ladder means a ladder that is permanently
attached to a structure, building, or equipment.
(9) Grab bar means a handhold that is placed
adjacent to, or as an extension above, a ladder for the
2
purpose of providing access beyond the limits of the
ladder.
(10) Individual rung ladder means a fixed ladder that
has each rung individually attached to a structure,
building, or equipment.
R 408.41104. Definitions; J to R.
Rule 1104. (1) Job-built ladder means a ladder, other
than a manufactured ladder, that is usually built at the
jobsite.
(2) Ladder means an appliance that usually consists
of 2 side rails which are joined at regular intervals by
crosspieces which are called steps, rungs, or cleats and
on which a person may step to ascend or descend.
(3) Ladder safety device means a device, other than
a cage or well, that is designed to eliminate or reduce the
possibility of accidental falls.
(4) Lower levels means those levels to which an
employee can fall from a ladder. Such areas include
ground levels, floors, ramps, runways, excavations, pits,
water, and similar surfaces. The term does not include the
surface from which the employee falls.
(5) Manufactured ladder means a commercially made
ladder.
(6) Maximum intended load means the total load of
all employees, equipment, tools, materials, transmitted
loads, and other loads that are anticipated to be applied to
a ladder compartment at any one time.
(7) Pitch means the included angle which is between
the horizontal and the ladder and which is measured on
the opposite side of a ladder from the climbing side.
(8) Platform ladder means a self-supporting type of
fixed size stepladder that has a platform provided at the
working level. The size is determined by the distance
along the front rail from the platform to the base of the
ladder.
(9) Portable ladder means a ladder which is not
permanently fixed in place and which may be used at
various locations.
(10) Rail ladder means a fixed ladder which consists
of side rails that are joined at regular intervals by rungs or
cleats and which is fastened along its entire length or in
sections to a building, structure, or equipment.
(11) Rungs means a ladders crosspieces of circular
or oval cross section on which a person may step to
ascend or descend.
R 408.41105. Definitions; S to W.
Rule 1105. (1) Safety feet means a safety device that
is placed on the foot of the side rails of straight, sectional,
or extension ladders to reduce the likelihood that the base
will slip. Safety feet may be flat pads that are covered with
a nonslip material, pointed metal projections, or spur
wheels.
(2)Side-step ladder means a ladder that requires an
employee who is getting off at the top of the ladder to step
sideways from the ladder to reach the landing.
(3) Single-cleat ladder means a ladder which consists
of a pair of parallel side rails that are connected with cleats
which are joined to the side rails at regular intervals.
(4) Single-rail ladder means a portable ladder that
has rungs, cleats, or steps which are mounted on a single
rail instead of the normal 2 rails that are used on most
other ladders.
(5) Special-purpose ladder means a portable ladder
that represents either a modification or a combination of
design or construction features in 1 or more of the general

purpose types of ladders, as defined in R 408.41103(5)
and (6), R 408.41104(6) and (7), and subrules (4) and (9)
of this rule, in order to adapt the ladder to special or
specific uses.
(6) Stepladder means a self-supporting portable
ladder which is nonadjustable in length and which has flat
steps and a hinged back. A stepladders size is measured
along the front edge of the side rails.
(7) Steps means the flat crosspieces of a ladder on
which a person may step to ascend or descend.
(8) Through ladder means a ladder that requires an
employee who is getting off at the top of the ladder to step
through the ladder to reach the landing.
(9) Trestle ladder means a self-supporting portable
ladder which is nonadjustable in length and which consists
of 2 sections that are hinged at the top to form equal
angles with the base. The size of the ladder is designated
by the length of the side rails measured along the front
edge.
(10) Well means a permanent complete enclosure
around a fixed ladder that protects a climber. Proper
clearance for a well will give the same protection as a
cage.
(11) Worn means a reduction of the dimension of a
wood or nonwood part by more than 10% of its original
size.
R 408.41111. Adoption by reference; certification.
Rule 1111. (1) A manufactured portable wood ladder
shall be constructed and maintained as prescribed in the
ANSI standard A14.1-1990, which is adopted by reference
in this rule and may be inspected at the Lansing office of
the department of consumer and industry services. This
standard may be purchased at a cost as of the time of
adoption of this rule of $35.00 from the American National
Standards Institute, 11 West 42nd Street, New York, New
York 10036, or from the Michigan Department of
Consumer and Industry Services, 7150 Harris Drive, Box
30643, Lansing, Michigan 48909.
(2) A manufactured portable metal ladder shall be
constructed and maintained as prescribed in the ANSI
standard A14.2-1990, which is adopted by reference in
this rule and may be inspected at the Lansing office of the
department of consumer and industry services. This
York 10036, or from the Michigan Department of
(3) A manufactured portable plastic ladder shall be
constructed and maintained as prescribed in the ANSI
standard A14.5-1982 and supplement 1985, which is
adopted by reference in this rule and may be inspected at
the Lansing office of the department of consumer and
industry services. This standard may be purchased at a
cost as of the time of adoption of this rule of $24.00 from
nd
the American National Standards Institute, 11 West 42
Street, New York, New York 10036, or from the Michigan
Department of Consumer and Industry Services, 7150
Harris Drive, Box 30643, Lansing, Michigan 48909.
(4) Fixed ladders shall be constructed and maintained
as prescribed in the ANSI standard A14.3-1984, which is
adopted by reference in this rule and may be inspected at
the Lansing office of the department of consumer and
3
industry services. This standard may be purchased at a
cost as of the time of adoption of this rule of $15.00 from
nd
the American National Standards Institute, 11 West 42
Street, New York, New York 10036, or from the Michigan
Department of Consumer and Industry Services, 7150
Harris Drive, Box 30643, Lansing, Michigan 48909.
(5) Job-made ladders shall be constructed and
maintained as prescribed in the ANSI standard A14.41979 (R1984), which is adopted by reference in this rule
and may be inspected at the Lansing office of the
department of consumer and industry services. This
York, 10036, or from the Michigan Department of
(6) A manufactured portable ladder shall be branded or
have a permanent label permanently affixed by the
manufacturer which shows the type of ladder and certifies
that it meets the requirements of the appropriate ANSI
standard as set out in subrules (1) to (5) of this rule.
R 408.41112. Training requirements.
Rule 1112. (1) The employer shall provide a training
program for each employee who uses a ladder. The
program shall enable each employee to recognize hazards
related to the ladder and shall train each employee in the
procedures to be followed to minimize these hazards.
(2) An employer shall ensure that each employee has
been trained by a competent person in all of the following
areas, as applicable:
(a) The nature of fall hazards in the work area.
(b) The correct procedures for erecting, maintaining,
and disassembling the fall protection systems to
be used.
(c) The proper construction, use, and placement of,
and care in handling, ladders.
(d) The maximum intended load-carrying capacities
of ladders that are used.
(e) The rules contained in this part.
(3) Retraining shall be provided for each employee as
necessary so that the employee maintains the
understanding and knowledge acquired through
compliance with these rules.
R 408.41113. General requirements.
Rule 1113. (1) A ladder shall be provided at all
personnel points of access if there is a break in elevation
of 19 inches (48 cm) or more and if a ramp, runway,
sloped embankment, stairway, or personnel hoist is not
provided.
(2) When a building or structure has only 1 point of
access between levels, that point of access shall be kept
clear to permit the free passage of employees. When work
must be performed or equipment must be used, that
restricts the free passage of employees at the point of
access, a second point of access shall be provided and
used.
(3) When a building or structure has 2 or more points
of access between levels, at least 1 point of access shall
be kept clear to permit the free passage of employees.
(4) Employers shall provide and install all ladder fall
protection systems that are required by this part and shall
comply with all other pertinent requirements of this part
before employees begin the work that necessitates the
installation and use of ladders and their respective fall

protection systems.
(5) Ladder rungs, cleats, and steps shall be parallel,
level, and uniformly spaced when a ladder is in position for
use.
(6) Rungs, cleats, and steps of portable ladders,
except as provided in subrules (7) and (8) of this rule, and
fixed ladders shall be spaced not less than 10 inches (25
cm) apart and not more than 14 inches (36 cm) apart, as
measured between the center lines of the rungs, cleats,
and steps.
(7) Rungs, cleats, and steps of step stools shall be not
less than 8 inches (20 cm) apart and not more than 12
inches (31 cm) apart, as measured between center lines
of the rungs, cleats, and steps.
(8) Rungs, cleats, and steps of the base section of
extension trestle ladders shall be not less than 8 inches
(20 cm), nor more than 18 inches (46 cm), apart, as
measured between center lines of the rungs, cleats, and
steps. The rung spacing on the extension section of the
extension trestle ladder shall be not less than 6 inches (15
cm), nor more than 12 inches (31 cm), as measured
between center lines of the rungs, cleats, and steps.
(9) The minimum clear distance between the sides of
individual rung-type stepladders and the minimum clear
distance between the side rails of other fixed ladders shall
be 16 inches (41 cm).
(10) The minimum clear distance between side rails for
all portable ladders shall be 11 1/2 inches (29 cm).
(11) The rungs of individual rung-type stepladders
shall be shaped so that an employees feet cannot slide off
the end of the rungs, see figure 1.
(12) The rungs and steps of fixed metal ladders that

are manufactured after January 14, 1991, shall be
corrugated, knurled, dimpled, coated with skid-resistant
material, or otherwise treated to minimize slipping.
(13) The rungs of steps of portable metal ladders shall
be corrugated, knurled, dimpled, coated with skid-resistant
material, or otherwise treated to minimize slipping.
4
(14) Except when portable ladders are used to gain
access to fixed ladders, such as ladders on utility towers,
billboards, and other structures where the bottom of the
fixed ladder is elevated to limit access, when 2 or more
separate ladders are used to reach an elevated work area,
the ladder shall be offset with a platform or landing
between the ladders.
(15) Ladder components shall be surfaced in a manner
that prevents employee injury due to punctures or
lacerations and prevents the snagging of clothing.
R 408.41115. Ladder
loads;
clearances;
safety
devices; cages; wells; extensions.
Rule 1115. (1) Ladders shall be capable of supporting
the following loads without failure:
(a) For each self-supporting portable ladder, not less
than 4 times the maximum intended load, except
that each extra heavy-duty type IA metal or
plastic ladder shall sustain not less than 3.3 times
the maximum intended load. The ability of a
ladder to sustain the loads indicated in this
subdivision shall be determined by applying or
transmitting the requisite load to the ladder in a
downward vertical direction.
(b) For each portable ladder that is not selfsupporting, not less than 4 times the maximum
intended load, except that each extra heavy-duty
type IA metal or plastic ladder shall sustain not
less than 3.3 times the maximum intended load.
The ability of a ladder to sustain the loads
indicated in this subdivision shall be determined
by applying or transmitting the requisite load to
the ladder in a downward vertical direction when
the ladder is placed at an angle of 75 1/2 degrees
from the horizontal.
(c) For each fixed ladder, not less than 2 loads of
250 pounds (114 kg) each, concentrated
between any 2 consecutive attachments (the
number and position of additional concentrated
loads of 250 pounds (114 kg) each, determined
from the anticipated usage of the ladder, shall
also be included), plus anticipated loads caused
by ice buildup, winds, rigging, and impact loads
that result from the use of ladder safety devices.
Each step or rung shall be capable of supporting
a single concentrated load of not less than 250
pounds (114 kg) applied in the middle of the step
of rung.
(2) The minimum perpendicular clearance between
fixed ladder rungs, cleats, and steps and any obstruction
behind the ladder shall be 7 inches (18 cm), except in the
case of an elevator pit ladder, for which a minimum
perpendicular clearance of 4 1/2 inches (11 cm) is
required.
(3) The minimum perpendicular clearance between the
center line of fixed ladder rungs, cleats, and steps and any
obstruction on the climbing side of the ladder shall be 30
inches (76 cm), except as provided in subrule (4) of this
rule.
(4) When unavoidable obstructions are encountered,
the minimum perpendicular clearance between the center
line of fixed ladder rungs, cleats, and steps and the
obstruction on the climbing side of the ladder may be
reduced to 24 inches (61 cm), if a deflection device is
installed to guide employees around the obstruction. See
figure 2.
(5) Through fixed ladders, at their point of access or

egress, shall have a step across distance of not less than
7 inches (18 cm) nor more than 12 inches (30 cm), as
measured from the center line of the steps or rungs to the
nearest edge of the landing area. If the normal stepacross
distance is more than 12 inches (30 cm), a landing
platform shall be provided to reduce the distance to the
specified limit. See figure 3.
5
(6) Fixed ladders that do not have cages or wells shall
have a clear width to the nearest permanent object of not
less than 15 inches (38 cm) on each side of the center line
of the ladder.
(7) Fixed ladders shall be provided with cages, wells,
ladder safety devices, or self-retracting lifelines where the
length of climb is less than 24 feet (7.3 m), but the top of
the ladder is at a distance that is more than 24 feet (7.3 m)
above lower levels.
(8) Where the total length of a climb equals or is more
than 24 feet (7.3 m), fixed ladders shall be equipped with 1
of the following:
(a) Ladder safety devices.
(b) Rest platforms at intervals of not more than 150
feet (45.7 m) and self-retracting lifelines.
(c) Multiple ladder sections and a cage or well. Each
ladder section shall not be more than 50 feet
(15.2 m) in length. Ladder sections shall be offset
from adjacent sections, and landing platforms
shall be provided at maximum intervals of 50 feet
(15.2 m).
(9) Cages for fixed ladders shall be in compliance with
all of the following provisions:
(a) Horizontal bands shall be fastened to the side
rails of rail ladders or for individual rung ladders,
directly to the structure, building, or equipment.
(b) Vertical bars shall be on the inside of the
horizontal bands and shall be fastened to them.
(c) Cages shall extend not less than 27 inches (68
cm), and not more than 30 inches (76 cm) from
the center line of the step or rung, excluding the
flare at the bottom of the cage, and shall not be
less than 27 inches (68 cm) in width.
(d) The inside of the cage shall be clear of
projections.
(e) Horizontal bands shall be spaced not more than
4 feet (1.2) on center vertically;
(f) Vertical bars shall be spaced at intervals of not
more than 9 1/2 inches (24 cm) on center
horizontally.
(g) The bottom of the cage shall be at a level that is
not less than 7 feet (2.1 m) and not more than 8
feet (2.4 m) above the point of access to the
bottom of the ladder. The bottom of the cage
shall be flared not less than 4 inches (10 cm) all
around within the distance between the bottom
horizontal band and the next higher band.
(h) The top of the cage shall be not less than 42
inches (1.2 m) above the top of the platform or
the point of access at the top of the ladder and
shall provide for access to the platform or other
point of access.
(10) A well for a fixed ladder shall be in compliance
with all of the following provisions:
(a) The well shall completely encircle the ladder.
(b) The well shall be free of projections.
(c) The wells inside face on the climbing side of the
ladder shall extend not less than 27 inches (68
cm) and not more than 30 inches (76 cm) from
the center line of the step or rung.
(d) The inside clear width of the well shall be not less
30 inches (76 cm).
(e) The bottom of the wall on the access side of the
well shall start at a level that is not less than 7
feet (2.1 m) and not more than 8 feet (2.4 m)
above the point of access to the bottom of the

ladder. See figure 4.
(11) Ladder safety devices and related support

systems for fixed ladders shall be in compliance with all of
the following provisions:
(a) The devices and support systems shall be
capable of withstanding, without failure, a drop
test that consists of an 18-inch (41 cm) drop of a
500-pound (226 kg) weight.
(b) The devices and support systems shall permit the
employee who uses the device to ascend or
descend without continually having to hold, push,
or pull any part of the device, thereby leaving
both hands free for climbing.
(c) The devices and support systems shall be
activated within 2 feet (.61 m) after a fall occurs
and shall limit the descending velocity of an
employee to 7 feet per second (2.1 m/sec.) or
less.
(d) The connection between the carrier or lifeline and
the point of attachment to the body belt or
harness shall not be more than 9 inches (23 cm)
in length.
(12) The mounting of ladder safety devices for fixed
ladders shall be in compliance with all of the following
provisions:
(a) To provide the strength necessary to stop an
employees fall, mountings for rigid carriers shall
be attached at each end of the carrier and
intermediate mountings, as necessary, shall be
spaced along the entire length of the carrier.
(b) Mountings for flexible carriers shall be attached
at each end of the carrier. When the system is
exposed to wind, cable guides for flexible carriers
shall be installed at a minimum spacing of not
less than 25 feet (7.6 m) and not more than 40
feet (12.2 m) along the entire length of the carrier
in a manner that will prevent wind damage to the
system.
(c) The design and installation of mountings and
cable guides shall not reduce the design strength
of the ladder.
(13) The side rails of through or side-step fixed ladders
shall extend 42 inches (1.1 m) above the top of the access
level or landing platform served by the ladder. For a
parapet ladder, the access level shall be the roof if the
6
parapet is cut to permit passage through the parapet;
however, if the parapet is continuous, the access level
shall be the top of the parapet.
(14) For through fixed ladder extensions, the steps or
rungs shall be omitted from the extension and the
extension of the side rails shall be flared to provide not
less than 24 inches (61 cm) and not more than 30 inches
(76 cm) of clearance between side rails. Where ladder
safety devices are provided, the maximum clearance
between side rails of the extensions shall not be more
than 36 inches (91 cm).
(15) For side-step fixed ladders, the side rails and the
steps or rungs shall be continuous in the extension.
(16) Individual rung ladders and stepladders, except
for ladders that are used where their access openings are
covered with manhole covers or hatches, shall extend not
less than 42 inches (1.1 m) above an access level or
landing platform either by the continuation of the rung
spacings as horizontal grab bars or by providing vertical
grab bars that shall have the same lateral spacing as the
vertical legs of the rungs.
R 408.41121. Inspection; faults and defects.
Rule 1121. (1) A ladder, as prescribed in this part,
shall be used to provide safe access to all elevations,
unless other means, such as steps, stairs, ramps,
runways, or elevators, are provided.
(2) A ladder shall be inspected before use and after it
has fallen or been involved in an accident to determine its
condition.
(3) A ladder that has any of the following faults and
defects shall be immediately tagged DANGEROUS DO
NOT USE and shall be withdrawn from service:
(a) Broken, worn, or missing rungs, cleats, or steps.
(b) Broken or split side rails.
(c) Broken or bent guides or iron spreaders.
(d) Broken or bent locks.
The tag shall be as prescribed in rules 2241 and 2242
of Part 22. Signals, Signs, Tags and Barricades, being R
408.42241 and R 408.42242 of the Michigan
(4) Fixed ladders that have structural defects, such as
broken or split rails or corroded components, shall be
withdrawn from service until repaired. The requirement to
withdraw a defective ladder from service is satisfied if 1 of
the following provisions is complied with:
(a) The ladder is immediately tagged with the words
do not use or similar language.
(b) The ladder is marked in a manner that readily
identifies it as defective.
(c) The ladder is blocked, such as with a plywood
attachment that spans several rungs.
(5) Ladder repairs shall restore the ladder to a
condition that meets its original design criteria before the
ladder is returned to use.
R 408.41122. Use generally.
Rule 1122. (1) A ladder shall not be placed in a
passageway, doorway, driveway, or any location where it
may be displaced, unless it is protected by barricades or
guards or is secured to prevent displacement.
(2) A ladder shall be placed on a substantial and stable
base unless it is secured to prevent accidental
displacement. The area around the top and bottom of the
ladder shall be kept clear.
(3) A ladder shall not be used as a brace, slide, guy,

gin pole, or gangway or for any other use than that for
which it is designed.
(4) An employee shall face the ladder when ascending
or descending. Each employee shall use at least 1 hand to
grasp the ladder when progressing up or down the ladder.
An employee shall not carry any object or load that could
cause the employee to lose balance and fall.
(5) An employee who is on a ladder shall not
overreach or do any pushing or pulling that may cause the
ladder to move or topple. If both of an employees
shoulders are outside of a side rail, the employee is
overreaching.
(6) A manufactured portable ladder or a single-cleat
ladder shall not be used by more than 1 employee at a
time.
(7) A ladder shall be located and maintained to prevent
an employee from bumping into, or snagging onto,
projecting objects while ascending or descending the
ladder.
(8) If a ladder provides the only means of access to, or
egress from, a working area for 25 or more employees, or
if simultaneous 2-way traffic is expected, a minimum of 2
ladders or a job-built, double-cleat ladder shall be
provided.
(9) A rope or chain ladder shall not be used on a
construction site.
(10) A ladder shall not be loaded beyond its
loadcarrying capacity.
(11) A ladder shall not be moved, shifted, or extended
while occupied by an employee.
(12) Single-rail ladders shall not be used.
R 408.41123. Classification of ladders.
Rule 1123. The use of all manufactured portable
ladders or stepladders shall be limited to those classified
as type IA or type I, as prescribed in ANSI A14.1-1990,
which is adopted by reference in this rule and may be
inspected at the Lansing office of the department of
consumer and industry services. This standard may be
purchased from the American National Standards Institute,
nd
11 West 42 Street, New York, New York, 10036, or from
the Safety Standards Division, Michigan Department of
Consumer and Industry Services 7150 Harris Drive, Box
30643, Lansing, Michigan 48909, at a cost as of the time
of adoption of this rule of $35.00.
R 408.41124. Portable ladders.
Rule 1124. (1) A portable ladder shall be used at such
a pitch that the horizontal projected distance from the top
support to the base is not more than 1/4 of the vertical
distance between these points.
(2) A portable ladder in use shall be equipped with
appropriate safety feet, unless the ladder is tied, blocked,
or otherwise secured to prevent it from being displaced.
Slip-resistant feet shall not be used as a substitute for care
in placing, lashing, or holding a ladder that is used upon
slippery surfaces, including flat metal or concrete surfaces
that are constructed so that they cannot be prevented from
becoming slippery.
(3) A portable ladder that is used at such a pitch that
the horizontal projected distance from the top support to
the base is less than 1/5 of the vertical distance between
these points shall be secured at the top to prevent tipping
backward.
7
(4) A portable ladder that is used at a pitch of 80
degrees or more shall be in compliance with the
requirements of a fixed ladder as prescribed in R
408.10335 of the Michigan Administrative Code.
(5) When portable ladders are used for access to an
upper landing surface, the ladder side rails shall extend
not less than 3 feet (.9 m) above the upper landing surface
to which the ladder is used to gain access; or, when such
an extension is not possible because of the ladders
length, then the ladder shall be secured at its top to rigid
support that will not deflect and a grasping device, such as
a grabrail, shall be provided to assist employees in
mounting and dismounting the ladder. The side rails shall
not extend in a manner that would permit ladder deflection
under a load, by itself, to cause the ladder to slip off its
support. The top of a non-self-supporting ladder shall be
placed with the 2 rails supported equally, unless the ladder
is equipped with a single support attachment.
(6) A manufactured portable metal ladder shall not be
used for electrical work or where the ladder or an
employee may contact electrical conductors. A ladder
shall have nonconductive siderails if the ladder is used
where the employee or the ladder could contact exposed
energized electrical equipment.
(7) A metal ladder shall not be used or moved unless a
minimum of 20 feet is maintained between power
transmission or distribution lines.
(8) A power transmission or distribution line or
electrical apparatus shall be considered energized unless
the property owner or utility indicates it is de-energized
and the line or apparatus is visibly grounded. Where deenergizing is impractical, the minimum clearances set forth
in table 1 shall be maintained between the ladder,
employee, or material, whichever is closer.
TABLE 1
VOLTAGE
MINIMUM CLEARANCE
To 50 kV
10 feet
Over 50 kV
10 feet plus .4 inch per kV
(10) A manufactured portable ladder shall not be more

than the following lengths:
TYPE
MAXIMUM LENGTH
Single-section ladder (Type 1A or 1)

Extension ladder (Type 1A or 1)
Trestle ladder or extension sections or base sections
of an extension trestle ladder
30 feet
60 feet
20 feet
(11) An employee who is using a portable ladder shall

not stand on the top 2 rungs or within 3 feet of the top of
the ladder.
(12) Two portable ladders shall not be spliced together
to provide long sections unless such ladders are
specifically designed for such use.
(13) A portable extension ladder shall be adjusted only
from the ground, floor, or the lower section of the ladder.
(14) A portable 2-section extension ladder shall be
erected so that the top section rests on the base section.
The top section shall be the section nearest to the climber.
(15) A non-self-supporting ladder shall be used at an
angle such that the horizontal distance from the top
support to the foot of the ladder is approximately 1/4 of the

working length of the ladder that is the distance along the
ladder between the foot and the top support.
(16) A fixed ladder shall be used at a pitch of not more
than 90 degrees from the horizontal, as measured to the
back side of the ladder. See figure 5.
R 408.41125. Trestle ladders.

Rule 1125. (1) When trestle ladders are used to
support an elevated work platform, the entire system shall
be considered a scaffold.
(2) An employee shall not work directly from the
vertical portion of an extension trestle ladder.
(3) Rungs, cleats, and steps of the base section of
extension trestle ladders shall be not less than 8 inches
(20 cm) and not more than 18 inches (46 cm) apart, as
measured between center lines of the rungs, cleats, and
steps. The rung spacing on the extension section of the
extension trestle ladder shall be not less than 6 inches (15
cm) and not more than 12 inches (31 cm).
R 408.41126. Use of stepladders.
Rule 1126. (1) An employee shall not use the backside
of a stepladder for climbing, unless the stepladder is
designed for such use.
(2) Unless the stepladder is equipped with a handrail,
the top step and cap shall not be used to stand on.
(3) A stepladder shall not be used as a straight ladder
by leaning it against a wall or other support.
(4) A metal spreader or locking device shall be
provided on each stepladder to hold the front and back
sections in an open position when the ladder is being
used. The ladder shall be opened fully and the spreaders
shall be locked while in use.
(5) Each leg of a step ladder shall be in contact with
solid footing.
8
(6) A portable metal stepladder shall not be used for
electrical work or where the ladder or an employee may
contact electrical conductors.
(7) A portable stepladder shall be in compliance with
the provisions of R 408.41121(2) to (5), R 408.41122(1) to
(7), (9), and (10), and R 408.41130(1) to (4).
R 408.41127. Single
and
double-cleat
ladders
generally.
Rule 1127. (1) A job-built ladder shall not be more
than 24 feet in length. If the length of a required job-built
ladder would be more than the maximum length, 2 or more
separate ladders shall be used and shall be offset with a
platform between each ladder that is not supported by the
ladders. Ladders used with a platform shall be secured at
the top and bottom.
(2) The platform shall be designed to support 4 times
the intended load. Guardrails and toeboards, as
prescribed in Part 45. Fall Protection, being R 408.44501
et seq. of the Michigan Administrative Code, shall be
erected on the exposed sides of the platform. Rails shall
extend above the top landing at least 36 inches but not
more than 42 inches to provide a handhold for mounting
and dismounting, and cleats shall be eliminated above the
landing level. When 2 or more separate job-built ladders
are used with a platform, the ladders shall be completely
offset from each other and the minimum horizontal
distance between adjacent side rails shall be 6 inches.
(3) Side rails of a job-built ladder shall be continuous.
(4) Each cleat of a job-built ladder shall be a
continuous member.
(5) A wood cleat shall be not less than nominal 1-inch
by 4-inch construction grade lumber for a cleat less than
20 inches in length and not less than nominal 2-inch by 4inch construction grade lumber for a cleat from 20 inches
to 50 inches in length. Knot-free lumber shall be used for
cleats.
(6) The cleats shall be uniformly spaced 12 inches top
to top. A cleat shall be attached to the narrow face of each
side rail using 2 10-d nails for nominal 1-inch by 4-inch
cleats or 2 16-d nails for 2-inch by 4-inch cleats.
(7) Filler blocks shall be used on the rails between
cleats. Filler blocks of the same thickness as the cleats
shall be inserted between cleats and butted tightly against
the underside of each cleat.
(8) Side rails shall not be cut into to house cleats.
R 408.41128. Single-cleat ladders; width; side rails.
Rule 1128. (1) The width of a single-cleat ladder shall
be not less than 16 inches or more than 20 inches
between rails. Side rails shall be parallel.
(2) Side rails of a single-cleat ladder shall be not less
than nominal 2-inch by 4-inch construction grade lumber
for ladders less than 16 feet in length and not less than
nominal 2-inch by 6-inch construction grade lumber for
ladders from 16 feet to 24 feet in length.
R 408.41129. Double-cleat ladders; width; additional
rail; side rails.
Rule 1129. (1) The width between outside rails of a
double-cleat ladder shall be not less than 38 inches or
more than 46 inches.
(2) A double-cleat ladder shall have an additional rail
located at the center of the ladder.
(3) The side rails and middle rail for a double-cleat
ladder shall be not less than nominal 2-inch by 4-inch
construction grade lumber for double cleat ladders less

than 12 feet in length and not less than nominal 2-inch by
6-inch construction grade lumber for a double cleat ladder
from 12 feet to 24 feet in length.
(4) The side rails of a double-cleat ladder shall be
secured at the bottom and as close as possible to the top
to prevent moving or toppling.
R 408.41130. Storage of ladders.
Rule 1130. (1) A ladder should be stored in such a
manner as to provide ease of access and inspection. A
ladder stored in a horizontal position shall be supported at
a sufficient number of points to prevent the ladder from
sagging during storage.
(2) A wood ladder shall not be stored within 6 feet of a
radiator, stove, or steam pipe or in a location subject to
excessive heat or dampness.
(3) A metal ladder shall not be stored where it is
subject to reaction with corrosive substances like acids
and alkali solutions.
(4) A plastic ladder shall be stored on edge on racks
when not in use and in a location which is free of corrosive
substances and which provides protection from adverse
environmental conditions.
R 408.41131. Handling and transporting of ladders.
Rule 1131. (1) A ladder shall be handled with
reasonable care and not be subjected to deliberate
dropping or to misuse.
(2) A ladder which is transported on a vehicle shall be
secured to prevent it from catapulting or falling from the
vehicle.
R 408.41132. Maintenance.
Rule 1132. (1) A ladder shall be maintained free of
slip-enhancing hazards and in good working condition.
(2) A ladder shall not be painted with an opaque
material. A ladder, particularly one used out-of-doors
should be coated with a suitable transparent protective
material to retard splintering caused by weathering.
(3) The side rails and legs of a ladder shall be kept
free from splinters. The joint between the side rail and step
shall be kept tight and metal hardware and fittings
secured.
(4) The locks, pulleys, spreader joints, or other
movable metal parts of a ladder shall operate freely
without undue play.
Lubricants shall be applied as
needed.
(5) A rope used on a ladder shall not have a long or
loosely twisted lay, shall be free of burns and cuts, and
shall not show evidence of weakness resulting from
fraying, wear, mildew, or rot. Rope ends shall be fastened
or whipped.
(6) A ladder surface shall be free of puncture or
laceration hazards.
R 408.41133. Special-purpose ladders.
Rule 1133. (1) A special-purpose ladder may be
capable of being used as a step ladder, a single or
extension ladder, or a trestle ladder.
(2) A special-purpose ladder, when used as any of the
types of ladders listed in subrule (1) of this rule, shall meet
the requirements of the applicable rules of this part.
(3) A special-purpose ladder may be used by more
than 1 employee if specifically designed for that purpose.
9
(4) A platform step ladder shall be constructed in
accordance with requirements for a type 1 step ladder. A
platform of a platform ladder shall be capable of
supporting a load of 200 pounds placed at any point on
the platform.
R 408.41140. Fixed ladders.
Rule 1140. A fixed ladder shall be as prescribed in
Part 3. Fixed ladders, being R 408.10301 et seq. of the
Michigan Administrative Code. This standard may be

inspected at or purchased from the Safety Standards
Division, Michigan Department of Consumer and Industry
Services, 7150 Harris Drive, Box 30643, Lansing,
Michigan 48909.
6
SCAFFOLD
MIOSHA-STD-1309 (05/06)
21 Pages

DIRECTOR'S OFFICE
Filed with the Secretary of State on June 1, 1981 (as amended May 31, 1990)
(as amended September 3, 1996) (as amended October 20, 1997) (as amended April 28, 1999)
These amended rules will take effect May 12, 1999
R 408.41201, R 408.41203, R 408.41204, R 408.41205, R 408.41206, R 408.41207, R 408.41208, R 408.41210,
R 408.41211, R 408.41212, R 408.41213, R 408.41214, R 408.4117, R 408.41221, R 408.41223, R 408.41224,
R 408.41227, R 408.41231,R 408.41233, R 408.41234,R 408.41235, R 408.41236, R 408.41241, R 408.41251,
R 408.41261, R 408.41262, and R 408.41264 of the Michigan Administrative Code are amended, and
R 408.41209, R 408.41219, R 408.41229, R 408.41239, R 408.41240, R 408.41256a, and R 408.41256b
are added to the Code, as follows:
PART 12. SCAFFOLDS AND SCAFFOLD PLATFORMS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL PROVISIONS ..................................................... 2
R 408.41201 Scope. ............................................................. 2
R 408.41203 Definitions; A to C............................................ 2
R 408.41204 Definitions; D to I ............................................. 2
R 408.41205 Definitions; L, M............................................... 2
R 408.41206 Definitions; N to R ........................................... 3
R 408.41207 Definitions; S ................................................... 3
R 408.41208 Definitions; T to W ........................................... 4
R 408.41209 Training requirements ..................................... 4
R 408.41210 Construction and capacity generally................ 4
R 408.41211 Access to scaffold platforms............................ 5
R 408.41212 Accumulation of tools, material, or debris
prohibited; weather conditions; slippery conditions;
electrical hazards; rope protection; fall protection... 6
R 408.41213 Guardrails; fall arrest devices .......................... 7
R 408.41214 Hoisting machines generally............................ 7
R 408.41215 Powered hoisting machines............................. 8
R 408.41216 Manually powered hoisting machines............. 8
R 408.41217 Planking and scaffold platforms generally ....... 8
R 408.41218 Plywood scaffold platforms.............................. 9
R 408.41219 Protection from falling objects ......................... 9
FLOOR AND GROUND SUPPORTED................................. 9
SCAFFOLDS ........................................................................ 9
R 408.41221 Stilts ................................................................ 9
R 408.41222 Wood pole scaffolds ........................................ 9
R 408.41223 Tube and coupler scaffolds ........................... 10
R 408.41224 Tubular welded frame scaffolds (fabricated
frame scaffold)...................................................... 11
R 408.41225 Horse scaffolds.............................................. 12
R 408.41226. Bricklayers square scaffold.......................... 12
R 408.41227 Pump jack scaffolds ...................................... 12
R 408.41228 Steel tower scaffolds ..................................... 12
SUSPENDED SCAFFOLDS ............................................... 12
R 408.41229 Suspended scaffolds; tipping moment
requirement; support devices; outrigger beams;
counterweights tiebacks; suspension ropes; use of
certain equipment on scaffolds prohibited; securing

scaffolds; use of emergency escape and rescue
devices..................................................................12
R 408.41231 Adjustable multipoint suspension scaffolds....13
R 408.41232. Multipoint suspended scaffold.......................13
R 408.41233 Two-point adjustable suspension scaffolds
(swing stage scaffold) ...........................................14
R 408.41234 Multilevel suspension scaffolds......................14
R 408.41235 Single-point adjustable suspension scaffolds 14
R 408.41236 Needle beam scaffolds ..................................14
R 408.41237 Boatswains chair ...........................................15
R 408.41238 Float scaffolds................................................15
R 408.41239 Catenary scaffolds .........................................15
R 408.41240 Interior hung scaffolds....................................15
MOBILE SCAFFOLDS ........................................................15
R 408.41241 Mobile scaffolds .............................................15
R 408.41243 Rough terrain forklift truck scaffolds; equipment
requirements; employee safety requirements .......16
R 408.41244 Inspection and maintenance of rough terrain
forklift trucks ..........................................................17
R 408.41245 Operator training ............................................17
R 408.41246 Operator permits ............................................18
AUXILIARY SUPPORTED SCAFFOLDS ............................18
R 408.41251 Outrigger scaffolds.........................................18
R 408.41252 Rescinded. .....................................................18
R 408.41253 Roofing brackets and crawling boards ...........18
R 408.41254 Carpenters bracket scaffold ..........................18
R 408.41255 Form Scaffolds...............................................19
R 408.41256 Ladder jack scaffolds .....................................19
R 408.41256a Step, platform, and trestle ladder scaffolds ..19
R 408.41256b Repair bracket scaffolds ..............................19
WIRE, FIBER AND SYNTHETIC ROPE..............................19
R 408.41261 Wire rope generally........................................19
R 408.41262 Fiber rope generally .......................................20
R 408.41263 Synthetic rope ................................................20
R 408.41264 Window jack scaffolds....................................20
GENERAL PROVISIONS
R 408.41201 Scope.
Rule 1201. This part pertains to scaffolds and scaffold
platforms used in construction operations. The
equipment may be commercially manufactured or
job-built. This part does not apply to crane or derrick
suspended personnel platforms as prescribed in R
408.41001a et seq. and R 408.43201 et seq.
R 408.41203 Definitions; A to C
Rule 1203. (1) Adjustable multipoint suspension
scaffold means a scaffold that has a continuous
platform which is supported by bearers suspended
by wire rope from overhead supports so arranged
and operated as to permit the raising or lowering of
a platform to desired working positions.
(2) Bearer, sometimes called a putlog, means a
horizontal transverse scaffold member, which may
be supported by ledgers or runners, upon which the
scaffold platform rests, and which joins scaffold
uprights, posts, poles, and similar members.
(3) Boatswains chair means a single-point
adjustable suspension scaffold that consists of a
seat or sling designed to support 1 employee in a
sitting position.
(4) Brace means a rigid connection that holds 1
scaffold member in a fixed position with respect to
another member or that holds 1 scaffold member to
a building or structure.
(5) Bricklayers square scaffold means a supported
scaffold that is composed of framed squares that
support a platform.
(6) Carpenters bracket scaffold means a
supported scaffold that consists of a platform
supported by brackets attached to a building or
structural walls.
(7) Carriage means an assembled steel framework
which is affixed to a steel tower and which is used to
support a work platform.
(8) Catenary scaffold means a suspension scaffold
consisting of a platform supported by 2 essentially
horizontal and parallel ropes attached to structural
members of a building or other structure. Additional
support may be provided by vertical pickups.
(9) Chimney hoist means a multipoint adjustable
suspension scaffold used to provide access to work
inside chimneys. (See multipoint suspension
scaffold.)
(10) Cleat means a structural block used at the end of
a platform to prevent the platform from slipping off
its supports. Cleats are also used to provide footing
on sloped surfaces such as crawling boards.
(11) Competent person means a person who is
experienced and capable of identifying an existing
or potential hazard in surroundings, or under
working conditions, that are hazardous or
dangerous to an employee and who has the
authority and knowledge to take prompt corrective
measures to eliminate the hazards.
(12) Coupler means a device for locking together the
component parts of a tube and coupler scaffold.
(13) Crawling board, sometimes called a chicken
ladder, means a plank that has cleats, which are
spaced and secured, at equal intervals for use by an
employee on roofs. A crawling board is not designed
to carry any material.
R 408.41204 Definitions; D to I
Rule 1204. (1) Double pole (independent pole)
scaffold means a supported scaffold that consists
of a platform which rests on cross beams (bearers)
supported by ledgers and a double row of uprights
independent of support, except for ties, guys, and
braces, from any structure.
(2) Equivalent means alternative designs, materials,
or methods to protect against a hazard that the
employer can demonstrate will provide an equal or
greater degree of safety for employees than the
methods, materials, or designs specified in these
rules.
(3) Exposed power lines means electrical power
lines which are accessible to employees and which
are not shielded from contact. Exposed power lines
do not include extension cords or power tool cords.
(4) Eye or eye splice means a loop that may have
a thimble at the end of a wire rope.
(5) Fabricated decking and planking means
manufactured platforms that are made of wood,
including laminated wood, and solid sawn wood
planks, metal, or other materials.
(6) Failure means load refusal, breakage, or
separation of component parts. Load refusal is the
point where the ultimate strength is exceeded.
(7) Float or ship scaffold means a scaffold which
is hung from an overhead support by means of
ropes and which consists of a substantial platform
that has diagonal bracing underneath and that rests
upon, and is securely fastened to, 2 parallel plank
bearers at right angles to the span.
(8) Forklift truck (industrial) means a self-loading
truck which is equipped with a load carriage and
forks and which is used for transporting and tiering
loads.
(9) Form scaffold means a supported scaffold that
consists of a platform supported by brackets
attached to the formwork.
(10) Guardrail means a horizontal barrier that is
erected along the exposed sides and ends of a
scaffold.
(11) Heavy-duty scaffold means a scaffold that is
designed and constructed to carry a working load of
not more than 75 pounds per square foot.
(12) Hoist means a manual or power-operated
mechanical device used to raise or lower a
suspended scaffold.
(13) Horse scaffold means a supported scaffold that
consists of a platform supported by construction
horses (sawhorses). Horse scaffolds constructed of
metal are sometimes known as trestle scaffolds.
(14) Interior hung scaffold means a suspension
scaffold that consists of a platform suspended from
the ceiling or roof structure by fixed length supports.
R 408.41205 Definitions; L, M
Rule 1205. (1) Ladder jack scaffold means a scaffold
that is supported by brackets attached to ladders.
(2) Ladder safety device means a device that is
installed on a ladder and which, when attached to
an employee as prescribed in R 408.44501 et seq.,
will prevent an accidental fall of the employee.
(3) Landing means a platform at the end of a flight of
stairs.
(4) Large area scaffold means a pole scaffold, tube
and coupler scaffold, systems scaffold, or fabricated
frame scaffold erected over substantially the entire
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
work area, for example, a scaffold erected over the

entire floor area of a room.
Lean-to scaffold means a supported scaffold
that is kept erect by tilting it toward, and resting it
against, a building or structure.
Ledger means a horizontal member of a scaffold
which extends from post to post and which supports
bearers that form a tie between the posts.
Light-duty scaffold means a scaffold that is
Maximum intended load means the maximum
anticipated weight of persons, equipment, material,
and scaffold.
Medium-duty scaffold means a scaffold that is
Midrail means a rail which is located
approximately midway between a guardrail and
platform and which is secured to uprights erected
along the exposed sides and ends of a platform.
Mobile scaffold means a powered or unpowered
portable caster or wheel-mounted supported
scaffold.
Mobile scaffold tower means a type of
freestanding scaffolding that can be manually
moved horizontally from one area to another.
Multilevel suspension scaffold means a
scaffold that is manufactured to have 2 or more
work platforms which are one above another and
which are connected vertically to each other by rigid
metal members, all of which are suspended from
overhead supports.
Multipoint suspended scaffold means a
scaffold that is constructed of rigid steel or wire rope
members which suspend and support a work
platform. The scaffold can be stationary or the
scaffold can be mobile and travel horizontally.
R 408.41206 Definitions; N to R
Rule 1206. (1) Needle beam scaffold means a
scaffold that consists of a platform supported by
needle beams.
(2) Outrigger means the structural member of a
supported scaffold used to increase the base width
of a scaffold in order to provide support for, and
increased stability of, the scaffold.
(3) Outrigger beam (thrustout) means the structural
member of a suspension scaffold or outrigger
scaffold that provides support for the scaffold by
extending the scaffold point of attachment to a point
out and away from the structure or building.
(4) Outrigger scaffold means a platform supported
by, and fastened to, outriggers or thrustouts
projecting beyond the wall or face of the building or
structure, the inboard ends of which are secured
inside the building or structure.
(5) Platform means a work surface elevated above
lower levels. Platforms can be constructed using
individual wood planks, fabricated planks, fabricated
decks, and fabricated platforms.
(6) Power-operated hoist means a hoist that is
powered by other than human energy.
(7) Pump-jack scaffold means a scaffold for lightduty work that consists of vertical poles, platform
planking, and movable brackets for raising or
lowering the platform on the vertical poles by a
manual pumping action.
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
Qualified person means one who, by possession

of a recognized degree, certificate, or professional
standing, or who by extensive knowledge, training,
and experience, has successfully demonstrated his
or her ability to solve or resolve problems related to
the subject matter, the work, or the project.
Rated load means the manufacturers specified
maximum load to be lifted by a hoist or to be applied
to a scaffold or scaffold component.
Repair-bracket scaffold means a supported
scaffold that consists of a platform supported by
brackets which are secured in place around the
circumference or perimeter of a chimney, stack,
tank, or other supporting structure by 1 or more wire
ropes placed around the supporting structure.
Roof bracket scaffold means a rooftopsupported scaffold that consists of a platform resting
on angular-shaped supports.
Rough terrain forklift truck means a wheeledtype truck which is designed primarily as a fork truck
that has a vertical mast or pivoted boom, or both,
which has variable fixed length reach and which
may be equipped with attachments and that is
intended for operation on unimproved natural terrain
as well as the disturbed terrain of construction sites.
A machine that is designed primarily or earthmoving, such as a loader or dozer, even though its
buckets and blades are replaced with forks, or a
machine that is designed primarily as an over-theroad truck that has a lifting device is not a rough
terrain forklift truck.
Runner (ledger or ribbon) means the lengthwise
horizontal spacing or bracing member that may
support the bearers.
R 408.41207 Definitions; S
Rule 1207. (1) Scaffold means a temporary elevated
platform which is supported or suspended, including
its supporting system and points of anchorage, and
which is used for supporting an employee or
materials, or both.
(2) Shore scaffold means a supported scaffold
which is placed against a building or structure and
which is held in place with props.
(3) Single-point adjustable suspension scaffold
means a manual or power-operated unit which is
supported by a single rope from an overhead
support and which is arranged and operated to
permit the raising or lowering of the platform to
desired working positions.
(4) Single-pole scaffold means a type of wood pole
scaffold that has a platform which rests on putlogs
or cross beams, the outside ends of which are
supported on ledgers secured to a single row of
posts or uprights and the inner ends of which are
supported on or in a wall.
(5) Stall load means the load at which the prime
mover of a power-operated hoist stalls or the power
to the prime mover is automatically disconnected.
(6) Steel tower means a vertical assembly of tubular
steel post members connected together with welded
diagonal and horizontal steel bracing.
(7) Step, platform, and trestle ladder scaffold
means a platform resting directly on the rungs of
step ladders or trestle ladders.
(8) Stiff arm brace means a steel horizontal member
used to tie a steel tower to a structure to prevent the
scaffold from overturning.
4
(9)
Stilt means a device which is attached to the leg

and foot or shoe of an employee and which is used
to elevate the employee from a work surface.
(10) Supported scaffold means 1 or more platforms
supported by any of the following:
(a) Outrigger beams.
(b) Brackets.
(c) Poles.
(d) Legs.
(e) Uprights.
(f) Posts.
(g) Frames.
(h) Similar rigid support.
(11) Suspension scaffold means 1 or more platforms
suspended from an overhead structure by ropes or
other nonrigid means.
R 408.41208 Definitions; T to W
Rule 1208. (1) Toeboard means a horizontal barrier
that is erected along the exposed edges of an
elevated surface to prevent materials, tools, or
equipment from falling.
(2) Tube and coupler scaffold means a
manufactured assembly that consists of all of the
following:
(a) Tubing that serves as posts, bearers, braces,
ties, and runners.
(b) A brace supporting the post.
(c) Special couplers that serve to connect the
uprights and to join the various members.
(d) A work platform.
(3) Tubular welded frame scaffold or fabricated
frame scaffold means a scaffold platform that is
supported by a metal sectional frame that consists
of posts and a horizontal bearer that has
intermediate members.
(4) Two-point suspension scaffold or swing
stage means a suspension scaffold that consists
of a platform which is supported by hangers
(stirrups) suspended by 2 ropes from overhead
supports and which is equipped with means to
permit the raising and lowering of the platform to
desired work levels.
(5) Unstable objects means items whose strength,
configuration, or lack of stability may allow them to
become dislocated and shift and, therefore, may not
properly support the loads imposed on them.
Unstable objects do not constitute a safe base
support for scaffolds, platforms, or employees.
Examples include, but are not limited to, barrels,
boxes, loose brick, and concrete blocks.
(6) Vertical pickup means a rope used to support
the horizontal rope in catenary scaffolds.
(7) Window jack scaffold means a platform which
extends through a window opening and which is
secured to the structure and supported by braces.
(8) Working load means a load that is imposed by
persons, materials, and equipment.
R 408.41209 Training requirements
Rule 1209. (1) This rule supplements and clarifies the
requirements of R 408.40114(2) of construction
safety standard Part 1. General Rules as the rule
relates to the hazards of work on scaffolds. An
employer shall have each employee who performs
work on a scaffold trained by a person qualified in
scaffold safety. The training shall enable an
employee to recognize the hazards associated with
(2)
(3)
the type of scaffold being used and to understand

the procedures to control or minimize the hazards.
The training shall include the following areas as
applicable:
(a) The nature of any electrical hazards, fall
hazards, and falling object hazards in the work
area.
(b) The correct procedures for dealing with
electrical
hazards
and
for
erecting,
maintaining, and disassembling the fall
protection systems and falling object protection
systems being used.
(c) The proper use of the scaffold, and the proper
handling of materials on the scaffold.
(d) The maximum intended load and the loadcarrying capacities of the scaffolds used.
(e) Any other pertinent requirements.
An employer shall have each employee who is
involved in erecting, disassembling, moving,
operating, repairing, maintaining, or inspecting a
scaffold trained by a competent person to recognize
any hazards associated with the work in question.
The training shall include the following topics, as
applicable:
(a) The nature of scaffold hazards.
(b) The
correct
procedures
for
erecting,
disassembling, moving, operating, repairing,
inspecting, and maintaining the type of scaffold
being used.
(c) The design criteria, maximum intended loadcarrying capacity, and intended use of the
scaffold.
(d) Any other pertinent requirements.
If an employer has reason to believe that an
employee lacks the skill or understanding needed to
safely perform work that involves the erection, use,
or dismantling of scaffolds, then the employer shall
retrain the employee so that the requisite proficiency
is regained. Retraining is required in all of the
(a) Where changes at the worksite present a
hazard about which an employee has not been
previously trained.
(b) Where changes in the types of scaffolds, fall
protection, falling object protection, or other
equipment present a hazard about which an
employee has not been previously trained.
(c) Where inadequacies in an affected employees
work involving scaffolds indicate that the
employee has not retained the requisite
proficiency for the work involved.
R 408.41210 Construction and capacity generally

Rule 1210. (1) A scaffold shall be designed, constructed,
erected, and used in accordance with the provisions
of this part. A scaffold shall be designed by a
qualified person.
(2) A scaffold shall not be erected, moved, dismantled,
or altered, except under the supervision of a
competent person.
(3) A scaffold and its components shall be capable of
supporting, without failure, not less than 4 times the
maximum intended load.
(4) A specially designed scaffold that utilizes methods of
bracing other than cross bracing is acceptable if the
scaffold and its components comply with the
requirements of this rule.
5
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
A scaffold shall not be loaded to more than the

designed working load.
Scaffolds and scaffold components shall be
inspected for visible defects by a competent person
before each work shift and after any occurrence that
could affect a scaffolds structural integrity. Any
scaffold, including accessories such as braces,
brackets, trusses, screw legs, ladders, or platforms,
that is damaged or weakened from any cause shall
be immediately repaired or replaced. Any scaffold or
accessories that are repaired shall have at least the
original designed strength of the scaffold or
accessory.
An employee on a scaffold who is exposed to an
overhead hazard of falling material shall be
protected with overhead protection that is sufficient
to prevent injury.
All load-carrying wood members of scaffold framing
shall be a minimum of 1,500 psi fiber stress value.
All scaffold dimensions are nominal sizes as
provided in the American lumber standards, which
are adopted by reference in these rules and are
available from the West Coast Inspection Bureau,
6990 S.W. Virne Road, P.O. Box 23145, Portland,
Oregon 97223, or from the Michigan Department of
Labor and Economic Growth, MIOSHA Standards
Division, P.O. Box 30643, Lansing, Michigan 48909,
at a cost of $9.50. However, where rough sizes are
noted, only rough or undressed lumber of the size
specified will satisfy the minimum requirement of
that standard.
The poles, legs, or uprights of scaffolds shall be
plumb and shall be securely and rigidly braced to
prevent swaying and displacement.
The support for a scaffold shall be sound, rigid, and
capable of carrying the maximum intended load
without settling or displacement. Leveling jack
adjusting screws, when used, shall not extend more
than 18 inches below the base of the scaffold.
Unstable objects, such as barrels, boxes, pallets,
brick, or concrete blocks, shall not be used to
support a scaffold or work platform. Scaffold poles,
legs, posts, frames, and uprights shall bear on base
plates and mudsills or other adequate firm
foundation.
Scaffold components that are not designed to be
compatible shall not be intermixed.
A shore or lean-to scaffold shall not be used.
Makeshift devices, such as, but not limited to boxes
and barrels, shall not be used on top of scaffold
platforms to increase the working level height of
employees.
A ladder shall not be used on a scaffold to increase
the working level height of employees, except on a
large area scaffold where an employer has satisfied
all of the following criteria:
(a) When the ladder is placed against a structure
that is not a part of the scaffold, the scaffold
shall be secured against the sideways thrust
exerted by the ladder.
(b) The platform units shall be secured to the
scaffold to prevent the units from moving.
(c) Either the ladder legs shall be on the same
platform or another means shall be provided to
stabilize the ladder against unequal platform
deflection.
(d) The ladder legs shall be secured to prevent

them from slipping or being pushed off the
platform.
R 408.41211 Access to scaffold platforms
Rule 1211. (1) Access to a scaffold platform shall be
provided by 1 or more of the following:
(a) A ladder that conforms to R 408.41101 et seq.
(b) Hook-on or attachable metal ladders that are
specifically designed for use in construction
with manufactured types of scaffolds. If hookon or attachable metal ladders are used as
access to, or egress from, a work platform that
is more than 35 feet above the ground or floor
level, then a ladder safety device shall be
installed or the ladders shall be offset with
landing platforms and guardrails that are
installed at not more than 35-foot intervals.
(c) Step or hook-on, stair-type accessories that
are specifically designed for use with
appropriate types of scaffolds.
(d) Direct access from an adjacent scaffold, the
structure, or personnel hoist. The direct access
to or from another surface shall be used only
when the scaffold is not more than 14 inches
(36 cm) horizontally and not more than 24
inches (61 cm) vertically from the other
surface.
(e) A ramp, runway, or stairway that conforms to
R 408.42121 et seq.
(2) The intermediate horizontal members of the frame
of a manufactured tubular welded frame scaffold
may be used instead of a ladder or stairway for
access to, and egress from, the work platform, if all
of the following conditions are met:
(a) All the frames and component parts are
compatible in design.
(b) The intermediate horizontal members of a
frame are a minimum of 11 1/2 inches in
length.
(c) The horizontal members of each frame shall
be uniformly spaced and shall not be more
than 18 inches center to center vertically.
(d) When frames are connected vertically to one
another, the distance between the bottom
horizontal member of the upper end frame and
the top horizontal member of the lower end
frame shall be within 3 inches of the uniform
spacing of the horizontal members of each
frame.
(e) The elevation to the lowest horizontal member
of the bottom frame shall not be more than 24
inches from the ground or floor.
(f) Each horizontal member shall be capable of
supporting 300 pounds applied at its midpoint
without bending or cracking.
(g) Each horizontal member shall be inspected
for, and found free of, cracks, bends, or bad
welds. Cracks, bends, or bad welds shall be
corrected.
(h) Only 1 employee at a time shall use a
horizontal member of a frame as access to, or
egress from, the workstation.
(i) Cross braces shall not be used as a means of
access.
(3) The guardrail system located on the side where
horizontal members of the scaffold frame are used
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
for access to, or egress from, a work platform shall

be constructed as follows:
(a) The intermediate rail shall be omitted between
the corner posts at the access location.
(b) The top rail shall be continuous between
posts. A scaffold and its components shall be
capable of supporting, without failure, not less
than 4 times the maximum intended load.
The overhang of a work platform shall not interfere
with an employee accessing or leaving a work
platform.
If horizontal members of scaffold frames are used
as access to, or egress from, a work platform which
is more than 35 feet above ground or floor level, a
ladder safety device shall be installed and used or
the horizontal members shall be offset with landing
platforms and guardrails that are installed at not
more than 30-foot intervals.
Steps and rungs of ladder and stairway-type access
shall line up vertically with each other between rest
platforms.
All of the following provisions apply to erecting or
dismantling a scaffold:
(a) An employer shall provide a safe means of
access for each employee erecting or
dismantling a scaffold if providing safe access
is feasible and does not create a greater
hazard. The employer shall have a competent
person determine whether it is feasible or
would pose a greater hazard to provide, and
have employees use, a safe means of access.
The determination shall be based on site
conditions and the type of scaffold being
erected or dismantled.
(b) Hook-on or attachable ladders shall be
installed as soon as scaffold erection has
progressed to a point that permits safe
installation and use.
(c) When erecting or dismantling tubular welded
frame scaffolds, endframes, that have
horizontal members which are parallel, level,
and not more than 22 inches apart vertically as
climbing devices for access, the employer
shall ensure that the tubular welded frame
scaffolds are erected in a manner that creates
a usable ladder and provides a good handhold

and foot space.
(d) Cross braces on tubular welded frame
scaffolds shall not be used as a means of
access or egress.
R 408.41212 Accumulation of tools, material, or debris
prohibited; weather conditions; slippery
conditions;
electrical
hazards;
rope
protection; fall protection
Rule 1212. (1) Excess tools, materials, and debris shall
not be permitted to accumulate on a scaffold to
create a hazard.
(2) Work on or from scaffolds is prohibited during
storms or high winds unless a competent person
has determined that it is safe for employees to be
on a scaffold and that the employees are protected
by a personal fall arrest system. Wind screens shall
not be used unless the scaffold is secured against
the anticipated wind forces imposed.
(3) A scaffold shall be kept free of slippery conditions
such as those caused by ice, snow, oil, grease, or
other slippery compounds.
(4) An employee shall not be allowed within 10 feet of
uninsulated electrical energized lines.
(5) Before a scaffold is erected within 10 feet of an
electrical line, the utility or property owner shall be
consulted. An electrical line or electrical apparatus
shall be considered energized unless the property
owner or utility indicates it is de-energized and the
line or apparatus is visibly grounded. If deenergizing is impractical and the equipment is
exposed to contact by an employee, the minimum
clearances set forth in table 1 shall be maintained
between the scaffold, employee, or material,
whichever is closer. The requirements for
employees performing power transmission and
distribution
work,
electrical
work,
or
telecommunications work are found in construction
safety standard Part 16. Power Transmission and
Distribution, Part 17. Electrical Installations, and
Part 30. Telecommunications, being R 408.41601 et
seq., R 408.41701 et seq., and R 408.43001 et
seq., respectively, of the Michigan Administrative
Code.
TABLE 1
INSULATED LINES
VOLTAGE
Less than 300 volts
300 volts to 50 kilovolts
More than 50 kilovolts
MINIMUM DISTANCE
3 feet (0.9 meters)
10 feet (3.1 meters)
10 feet (3.1 meters) plus 0.4 inches (1.0 centimeter) for each
kilovolt over 50 kilovolts
ALTERNATIVES
2 times the length of the line
insulator, but not less than 10
feet (3.1 meters)
UNINSULATED LINES
VOLTAGE
Less than 50 kilovolts
More than 50 kilovolts
(7)
MINIMUM DISTANCE
10 feet (3.1 meters)
10 feet (3.1 meters) plus 0.4 inches
(1.0 centimeter) for each kilovolt over 50
kilovolts
Welding, burning, riveting, or open flame work shall

not be performed within 10 feet of fiber or synthetic
ALTERNATIVES
2 times the length of the line insulator,
but not less than 10 feet (3.1 meters)
rope that is used to suspend a scaffold, unless the

rope is protected from sparks, flame, or hot metal.
7
Only treated or protected fiber or synthetic ropes
shall be used for or near any work that involves the
use of corrosive substances or chemicals.
(8) A suspension rope, including connecting hardware,
used on nonadjustable or adjustable suspension
scaffolds shall be capable of supporting, without
failure, not less than 6 times the maximum intended
load applied or transmitted to the rope.
(9) If personal fall arrest systems are required by these
rules for the protection of employees, then the arrest
system equipment shall be as prescribed in
R 408.44501 et seq.
(10) To reduce the possibility of welding current arcing
through the suspension wire rope when performing
welding from suspended scaffolds, a welder shall
take the following precautions, as applicable:
(a) An insulated thimble shall be used to attach
each suspension wire rope to its hanging
support, such as a cornice hook or outrigger.
Excess suspension wire rope and any
additional independent lines from grounding
shall be insulated.
(b) The suspension wire rope shall be covered
with insulating material extending not less than
4 feet (1.2 meters) above the hoist. If there is a
tail line below the hoist, it shall be insulated to
prevent contact with the platform. The position
of the tail line that hangs free below the
scaffold shall be guided or retained, or both, so
that it does not become grounded.
(c) Each hoist shall be covered with insulated
protective covers.
(d) In addition to a work lead attachment required
by the welding process, a grounding conductor
shall be connected from the scaffold to the
structure. The size of the conductor shall be at
least the size of the welding process work
lead, and the conductor shall not be in series
with the welding process or the workpiece.
(e) If the scaffold grounding lead is disconnected,
the welding machine shall be shut off.
(f) An active welding rod or uninsulated welding
lead shall not be allowed to contact the
scaffold or its suspension system.
R 408.41213 Guardrails; fall arrest devices
Rule 1213. (1) A guardrail shall be installed on any open
side or end of a scaffold work platform that is 10
(3.1 meters) or more feet above the floor or ground,
except for any of the following:
(a) A boatswains chair.
(b) A catenary scaffold.
(c) A float scaffold.
(d) A ladder jack scaffold.
(e) A needle beam scaffold.
The guardrail shall be as prescribed in
R 408.42150.
(2) An employee on a boatswains chair, catenary
scaffold, float scaffold, needle beam scaffold, or
ladder jack scaffold shall be protected by a personal
fall arrest system. An employee on a single-point or
2-point adjustable suspension scaffold shall be
protected by both a personal fall arrest system and
guardrail system.
(3) A personal fall arrest device as prescribed in
R 408.44501 shall be worn and attached to a
substantial portion of a scaffold when the work
platform of an adjustable suspension scaffold that
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
has overhead protection is 10 (3.1 meters) or more

feet above the floor, water, or ground. Separate
safety lines shall be attached to a substantial portion
of the structure above and to the scaffold by an
approved fall prevention device in a manner to
prevent the scaffold from falling more than 12
inches if the scaffold suspension system fails.
A top rail or an intermediate rail may be eliminated if
the configuration of the scaffold and the material
deck provides equivalent protection against an
employee falling from the platform or if a personal
fall arrest device is worn.
A cross brace may be used as part of the guardrail
system as follows:
(a) If the pivot point occurs from 36 inches to 48
inches above the platform, then a midrail shall
be added midway between the platform and
the brace pivot point.
(b) If the pivot point occurs from 18 inches above
the platform, then a top rail shall be added.
(c) If the pivot point occurs less than 18 inches or
more than 48 inches above the platform, then
both a top rail and midrail shall be provided.
An employer shall have a competent person
determine the feasibility and safety of providing fall
protection for employees erecting or dismantling
supported scaffolds. An employer is required to
provide fall protection for employees erecting or
dismantling supported scaffolds where the
installation and use of the protection is feasible and
does not create a greater hazard.
If vertical lifelines are used, then they shall be
fastened to a fixed safe point of anchorage and shall
be protected from sharp edges and abrasion. Safe
points of anchorage include structural members of
buildings, but do not include any of the following:
(a) Standpipes.
(b) Vents.
(c) Other piping systems.
(d) Electrical conduit.
(e) Outrigger beams.
(f) Counterweights.
If horizontal lifelines are used, they shall be secured
to 2 or more structural members of the scaffold or
may be looped around both suspension and
independent support lines equal in number to the
number of points supported and equivalent in
strength to the strength of the suspension ropes.
Independent support lines and suspension ropes
shall not be attached to the same points of
anchorage.
R 408.41214 Hoisting machines generally

Rule 1214. (1) A hoisting machine shall carry a label of
an approved nationally recognized testing
laboratory, such as underwriters laboratories or
factory mutual engineering corporation, which states
that the machine is approved for use on a
suspension scaffold, swinging scaffold, or powered
mobile elevating platform.
(2) If wire rope is used to suspend an adjustable
scaffold, then the rope shall be in compliance with
all of the following requirements:
(a) Have the fixed end equipped with a proper
size thimble and attached to the upper support
member.
(3)
(4)
(b) Have the running rope securely attached to the

hoisting drum and have not less than 4 wraps
of the rope remain on the drum at all times.
(c) When other types of hoists are used, either the
suspension ropes shall be long enough to
allow the scaffold to be lowered to the level
below without the rope end passing through
the hoist or the rope end shall be configured or
provided with means to prevent the end from
passing through the hoist.
A hoisting machine shall be inspected daily when in
use and shall not be put in service unless it is free of
defects which would affect the operation of the
machine.
The stall load of any scaffold hoist shall not be more
than 3 times its rated load.
R 408.41215 Powered hoisting machines

Rule 1215. (1) Gears and brakes of a powered hoisting
machine shall be enclosed.
(2) In addition to the operating brake, a machine shall
have an emergency brake which engages
automatically when the normal speed of descent is
exceeded.
(3) Operating controls shall be of a deadman type.
(4) When a hydraulic or pneumatic system of a
powered hoisting machine is bled, the platform
supported by this system shall be in the lowered
Working load (per square foot)

Permissible span (feet)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(5)
(6)
R 408.41216 Manually powered hoisting machines

Rule 1216. (1) A manually powered hoisting device shall
be equipped with a positive locking device.
(2) A manually powered machine shall be designed to
prevent free-spooling of the cable drum.
R 408.41217 Planking and scaffold platforms generally
Rule 1217. (1) If wood planks are used for a work
platform, then the planks shall be scaffold-grade
lumber that has a minimum of 1,500 pounds per
square inch fiber stress value. The planks shall be
not less than 2 inches by 10 inches. The platform
shall consist of a minimum of 2 planks laid side by
side. Each platform on all working levels of scaffolds
shall be fully planked or decked between uprights
where practicable. Spaces between the platform
and the uprights shall not be more than 9 1/2 inches.
The maximum permissible spans for 2- by 10-inch
or wider planks are as follows:
Material full thickness

undressed lumber
25 50 62 75
10 8 7 6
Laminated planks shall meet or exceed the load

requirement of regular planking.
A manufactured work platform shall be tested and
listed by an approved nationally recognized testing
laboratory.
Wood
scaffold
planks,
laminated
planks,
manufactured work platforms, and picks that are
found to be defective shall be removed from service
and shall not be used.
A manufactured pick shall be permanently marked
or tagged to indicate the maximum working load and
shall not be less than 14 inches wide when used in
single width, except that a ladder jack scaffold may
be used with a minimum 12-inch manufactured pick.
Platform planks shall be laid with their edges
together so the platform is tight and does not have
spaces through which tools or fragments of
materials can fall.
Planking shall be in compliance with all of the
following provisions:
(a) Extend over the end bearer not less than 6
inches, but not more than 12 inches.
(b) Be cleated or otherwise fastened to prevent
shifting and be uniform in thickness, except
where lapped as prescribed in subrule (10) of
this rule.
(c) Where 16-foot planks are used as prescribed
in subrule (9) of this rule, tie downs are not
required unless wind uplift may occur.
Hook-on-type manufactured work platforms may be
used if they are secured to the bearer.
position or blocked in such a manner that the safety

of the employee is assured.
A leak in a hydraulic or pneumatic system shall be
repaired before the unit is used.
A reverse check valve or equivalent means shall be
installed in the hydraulic cylinder to prevent
uncontrolled fall of the work platform in case of
system failure.
Material nominal thickness

lumber
25 37 50 62
8 7 6 4
(9) Where planks are lapped, each plank shall lap its
bearer not less than 6 inches, which will provide a
minimum overlap of 12 inches.
(10) Where a scaffold turns a corner, the planks shall be
laid to prevent tipping. The planks that meet the
corner bearer at an angle shall be laid first and shall
extend over the diagonally placed bearer far enough
to have a good bearing, but not far enough to tip.
The planks that run in the different direction shall be
laid so as to extend over the rest on the first layer of
planks.
(11) When moving a platform to the next level, an
employee shall leave the old platform undisturbed
until the new platform supports have been set in
place and are ready to receive the platform planks.
(12) When a scaffold is occupied by an employee, a
slippery condition that occurs on the scaffold
platform shall be eliminated as soon as possible
after the condition occurs.
(13) A platform shall not deflect more than 1/60 of the
span when loaded.
(14) A wood platform shall not be covered with opaque
finishes, except that platform edges may be covered
or marked for identification. A platform may be
coated periodically with wood preservatives, fireretardant finishes, and slip-resistant finishes;
however, the coating may not obscure the top or
bottom wood surfaces.
(15) The front of a platform shall be not more than 14
inches from the face of the work unless a guardrail
system is erected along the front edge, or unless a
personal fall arrest system is used as set forth in
R 408.44501 et seq., except that the maximum
9
distance from the face of the work for plastering and
lathing operations shall be not more than 18 inches.
R 408.41218 Plywood scaffold platforms
Rule 1218. (1) If plywood is used as a work platform, the
plywood shall be supported by 2- by 10- inch
planks. The planks shall support 2 parallel edges of
the plywood and shall also be spaced not more than
24 inches center to center.
(2) The plywood work surface shall be secured to the
planks.
(3) If the plywood work surface is a load-carrying
member, it shall have a minimum thickness of 5/8
inch.
R 408.41219 Protection from falling objects
Rule 1219. (1) In addition to wearing a hard hat, an
employee on a scaffold shall be provided with
additional protection from falling hand tools, debris,
and other small objects through the installation of
toeboards, screens, or guardrail systems or through
the erection of debris nets, catch platforms, or
canopy structures that contain or deflect the falling
objects. If the falling objects are too large or heavy
to be contained or deflected by any of the measures
specified in this subrule, then the employer shall
place the potential falling objects away from the
edge of the surface from which they could fall and
shall secure the objects as necessary to prevent
them from falling.
(2) If there is a danger of tools, materials, or equipment
falling from a scaffold and striking employees below,
then one of the following provisions shall apply:
(a) The area below the scaffold to which objects
can fall shall be barricaded and employees
shall not be permitted to enter the hazard area.
(b) A toeboard shall be erected along the edge of
a platform that is more than 10 feet (3.1
meters) above lower levels. The toeboard shall
span a distance sufficient to protect employees
below, except on a float (ship) scaffold, where
an edging of 3/4-inch by 1 1/2- inch (2 by 4centimeters) wood or equivalent may be used
in place of a toeboard.
(c) If tools, materials, or equipment are piled to a
height higher than the top edge of the
toeboard, then paneling or screening
extending from the toeboard or platform to the
top of the guardrail shall be erected for a
distance sufficient to protect employees below.
(d) A guardrail system shall be installed with
openings small enough to prevent the passage
of potential falling objects.
(e) A canopy structure, debris net, or catch
platform that is strong enough to withstand the
impact forces of potential falling objects shall
be erected over the employees below.
(3) Canopies, when used for falling object protection,
shall be in compliance with all of the following
criteria as applicable:
(a) A canopy shall be installed between the falling
object hazard and employees.
(b) If a canopy is used on a suspension scaffold
for falling object protection, then the scaffold
shall be equipped with additional independent
support lines equal in number to the number of
points supported and equivalent in strength to
the strength of the suspension ropes.
(4)
(c) Independent support lines and suspension

ropes shall not be attached to the same points
of anchorage.
If used, toeboards shall be in compliance with both
of the following provisions:
(a) Be capable of withstanding, without failure, a
force of not less than 50 pounds (222 nano)
applied in any downward or horizontal
direction at any point along the toeboard.
(b) Be not less than 3 1/2 inches (9 centimeters)
high from the top edge of the toeboard to the
level of the walking/working surface. A
toeboard shall be securely fastened in place at
the outermost edge of the platform and have
not more than 1/4 inch (0.7 centimeter) of
clearance above the walking/working surface.
A toeboard shall be solid or have openings of
not more than 1 inch (2.5 centimeter) in the
greatest dimension.
FLOOR AND GROUND SUPPORTED

SCAFFOLDS
R 408.41221 Stilts
Rule 1221. (1) A stilt shall be constructed in accordance
(a) It shall be able to support 4 times the intended
load.
(b) It shall have a bottom base plate which is not
less than 3 1/2 inches by 5 1/2 inches and
which is equipped with rubber pads.
(c) It shall be not more than 20 inches in height
from the bottom of the base plate to the foot
support.
(d) It shall be made of metal and remain
unpainted.
(e) It shall be made by a manufacturer of stilts.
(2) A stilt shall be inspected for damage, wear, and
corrosion. A defective stilt, including the pins and
straps, shall be repaired or replaced before being
placed in use.
(3) A stilt shall be kept clean and free of accumulations
of paint, plaster, and other debris.
(4) Stilts shall be used only if all of the following
conditions exist:
(a) Floors are level.
(b) All floor holes are securely covered.
(c) When an employee is using stilts, the top edge
height of the top rail, or equivalent member,
shall be increased an amount equal to the
height of the stilts.
(d) The floor is capable of supporting a load on
the stilts base plate without deformation of
more than 1/4 of an inch.
(e) The floor is cleared of debris, materials, or
liquids that could cause a slipping or tripping
hazard.
(5) An employee who is wearing stilts shall not support,
lift, or hold a weight of more than 20 pounds.
(6) Stilts shall not be used while going from one level to
another.
(7) An employee may wear stilts on a scaffold only if it
is a large area scaffold.
R 408.41222 Wood pole scaffolds
Rule 1222. (1) Where a pole of a wood pole scaffold is
spliced, the ends shall be squared and the upper
section shall rest squarely on the lower section.
10
(2)
(3)
(4)
the building. The bearer shall be braced

against displacement.
(5) A ledger shall be long enough to extend over 2 pole
spaces. The ledger shall not be spliced between the
poles. The ledger shall be reinforced by bearing
blocks securely nailed to the side of the pole to form
a support for the ledger.
(6) Diagonal bracing shall be provided to prevent the
poles of a single pole scaffold from moving in a
direction parallel with the wall of the building or from
buckling.
(7) Bracing shall be provided between the inner and
outer sets of poles in independent pole scaffolds.
The free ends of pole scaffolds shall be cross
braced.
(8) Full diagonal face bracing, in both directions, shall
be erected across both faces of pole scaffold. The
braces shall be spliced at the poles.
(9) A wood pole scaffold shall not exceed 40 feet in
height and shall be constructed and erected in
accordance with table 2.
(10) Where the ends of planks abut each other to form a
flush floor, the butt joint shall be at the centerline of
a pole. The abutted ends shall rest on separate
bearers.
Wood splice plates shall be fastened on not less

than 2 adjacent sides, shall be not less than 4 feet
in length, shall overlap the abutted ends equally,
shall have the same width and same total crosssectional area of the pole, and shall be capable of
preventing displacement of the abutted ends. Splice
plates of other materials of equivalent strength may
be used.
A single pole scaffold shall be securely guyed or
tied to the building or structure. Where the height or
length exceeds 25 feet, a pole scaffold shall be
secured at intervals not greater than 25 feet
vertically and horizontally.
A bearer shall be set with its greater end dimension
vertical and shall be long enough to project over the
ledgers not less than 3 inches for proper support.
The inner end of a bearer for a single pole scaffold
shall be supported in accordance with 1 of the
following:
(a) Rest in a wall of a building with not less than a
40 inch bearing. Notching of the bearer is not
permitted.
(b) Rest on a 12- by 2- by 6- inch wood block. The
block shall be notched at the center to the
width of the bearer and 2 inches deep. The
bearer shall be nailed to both the block and the
building.
(c) At a wall opening by a plank capable of
supporting the loaded bearer and fastened to
MINIMUM NOMINAL SIZE AND MAXIMUM SPACING

OF MEMBERS OF WOOD POLE SCAFFOLDS
UP TO 20
Single Pole
Independent
HEIGHT OF SCAFFOLD IN FEET

MEDIUM
20 FT. TO 40 FT.
UP TO 40 FT.
Single Pole
Independent
Single Pole
Independent
HEAVY
UP TO 40 FT.
Single Pole
Independent
2 in. x 4 in.
2 in. x 4 in.
4 in. x 4 in.
4 in. x 4 in.
4 in. x 4 in.
4 in. x 4 in.
4 in. x 6 in.
4 in. x 4 in.
6 ft
6 ft
8 ft
8 ft
6 ft
6 ft
6 ft
6ft
LIGHT
Poles
Pole Spacing
Longitudinal
Pole Spacing
Traverse
Bearers
Ledgers
Bracing
Maximum
Width
Tie-ins
6 ft
10 ft
8 ft
8 ft
2 in. x 6 in.
2 in. x 6 in.
2 in .x 6 in.
2 in. x 10 in.
2 in. x 10 in.
3 in. x 4 in.
2 in. x 10 in.
2 in. x 10 in.
3 in. x 4 in.
2 in x 10 in.
2 in. x 6 in.
2 in. x 6 in.
2 in. x 10 in
2 in. x 10 in.
2 in. x 10 in.
2 in. x 10 in.
2 in. x 10 in.
2 in. x 10 in.
1 in. x 6 in.
1 in. x 6 in.
1 in. x 6 in.
1 in. x 6 in.
1 in. x 6 in.
1 in. x 6 in.
2 in. x 4 in.
2 in. x 4 in.
5 ft
1 in. x 4 in.
5 ft
1 in. x 4 in.
1 in. x 4 in.
5 ft
1 in. x 4 in
1 in. x 4 in.
5 ft
1 in. x 4 in.
1 in. x 4 in.
1 in. x 4 in.
ALL MEMBERS SHALL BE USED ON EDGE

R 408.41223 Tube and coupler scaffolds
Rule 1223. (1) A tube and coupler scaffold shall have all
posts, bearers, runners, and bracing of not less than
a nominal 2-inch (1.90 inches outside dimension)
steel tubing or equivalent.
(2) The material used for couplers shall be of a
structural type, such as a drop-forged steel,
malleable iron, or structural grade aluminum.
Dissimilar metals shall not be used.
(3) The posts of a tube and coupler scaffold shall not be
spaced more than 6 feet apart in width and not more
than 10 feet along the length for a light-duty rated
(4)
(5)
scaffold, 8 feet along the length for a medium-duty

rated scaffold, and 6 feet along the length for a
heavy-duty rated scaffold.
Drawings and specifications for a tube and coupler
scaffold over 125 feet in height above the base plate
shall be designed by a qualified engineer who is
knowledgeable in scaffolding. Drawings and
specifications shall be readily available at the
jobsite. A scaffold that is less than 125 feet in height
shall conform to the requirements of table 3.
Runners shall be erected along the length of the
scaffold and located on both the inside and the
11
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
outside posts at even heights. When tube and

coupler guardrails and midrails are used on outside
posts, they may be used in place of outside runners.
Runners shall be interlocked to form a continuous
length and coupled to each post. The bottom runner
shall be located as close to the base as possible.
The runners shall be placed not more than 6 feet 6
inches on centers.
A bearer shall be installed transversely between
posts and shall be securely coupled either to a post
bearing on a runner coupler or directly to a runner
and shall be kept as close to the post as possible.
A bearer shall be not less than 4 inches, but not
more than 12 inches, longer than the post spacing
or runner spacing. A bearer may be cantilevered for
use as brackets to carry 2 2-inch by 10-inch planks.
The bearer for a cantilevered section shall be not
more than 24 inches and the section shall be limited
to 25 pounds per square foot.
Cross bracing shall be installed across the width of
the scaffold at both ends and at least every third set
of posts horizontally and every fourth runner
vertically. The bracing shall extend diagonally from
the inner and outer runners upward to the next outer
and inner runners.
Longitudinal diagonal bracing on the outer rows of
poles shall be installed at a 45-degree angle from
near the base of the first outer post upward to the
extreme top of the scaffold. Where the longitudinal

length of the scaffold permits, the bracing shall be
duplicated beginning at every fifth post. In a similar
manner, longitudinal diagonal bracing shall also be
installed from the last post extending back and
upward toward the first post. Where conditions
preclude the attachment of this bracing to the posts,
it may be attached to the runners.
(10) Guys, ties, and braces shall be installed according
to the scaffold manufacturers recommendations or
at the closest horizontal member to the 4 to 1 ratio
height and be repeated vertically at locations of
horizontal members every 20 feet (6.1 meters) or
less hereafter for a scaffold 3 feet (0.91 meters)
wide or less and every 26 feet (7.9 meters) or less
thereafter for a scaffold more than 3 feet (0.9
meters) wide. The top guy, tie, or brace of a
completed scaffold shall be placed no further than a
4 to 1 ratio from the top. The top guys, ties, and
braces shall be installed at each end of the scaffold
and at horizontal intervals of not more than 30 feet
(9.1 meters), measured from 1 end, not both,
towards the other end. Outriggers, when used, may
be considered a part of the base dimension. The
outriggers shall be installed on both sides of the
scaffold at each frame line.
TABLE 3
TUBE AND COUPLER SCAFFOLDS
Maximum uniformly distributed load
Post spacing (longitudinal)
Post spacing (transverse)
Work levels
Maximum allowable additional planked levels
Maximum height (feet)
LIGHT DUTY
MEDIUM
25 pounds per square foot
50 pounds per square foot
10 feet
6 feet
2
4
125
8 feet
6 feet
1
8
125
R 408.41224 Tubular welded frame scaffolds (fabricated

frame scaffold)
Rule 1224. (1) The spacing of frames of a tubular welded
frame scaffold shall be consistent with the
provisions of R 408.41223(3).
(2) The scaffold shall be braced by cross bracing or
diagonal braces, or both, for securing vertical
members together laterally. The cross braces shall
be of sufficient length so that the erected scaffold is
always plumb, square, and rigid. All brace
connections shall be made secure.
(3) The frames shall be placed one on top of the other
with coupling or stacking pins to provide proper
vertical alignment of the legs.
(4) Where uplift may occur, frames shall be locked
together vertically by pins or other equivalent
suitable means.
(5) A guy, tie, and brace shall be installed according to
the scaffold manufacturers recommendations or at
the closest horizontal member to the 4 to 1 ratio
height and be repeated vertically at locations of
horizontal members every 20 feet (6.1 meters) or
less thereafter for a scaffold 3 feet (0.91 meters)
wide or less and every 26 feet (7.9 meters) or less
thereafter for a scaffold more than 3 feet (0.91
meters) wide. The top guy, tie, or brace of a
3
0
91
1
6
125
(6)
(7)
HEAVY
2
0
75
75 pounds per square

foot
6 feet
6 feet
1
6
125
completed scaffold shall be placed no further than a

4 to 1 ratio height from the top. A guy, tie, and brace
shall be installed at each end of the scaffold and at
horizontal intervals of not more than 30 feet (9.1
meters) measured from one end, not both, towards
the other. Outriggers, when used, may be
considered as part of the base dimension when
installed on each corner of the long side at intervals
of not more than 20 feet.
Drawings and specifications for all tubular welded
frame scaffolds over 125 feet in height above the
base plates shall be designed by a qualified
engineer who is knowledgeable in scaffolding. The
plans shall be available at the jobsite.
Brackets used to support cantilevered loads shall be
in compliance with all of the following provisions:
(a) Be seated with side brackets parallel to the
frames and end brackets at 90 degrees to the
frames.
(b) Not be bent or twisted from the positions
specified in subdivision (a) of this subrule.
(c) Be used only to support personnel, unless the
scaffold has been designed for other loads by
a qualified engineer and built to withstand the
tipping forces caused by the other loads being
12
placed on the bracket-supported section of the
scaffold.
loose or dead knots, and other defects that might

impair strength.
R 408.41225 Horse scaffolds

Rule 1225. (1) The horse for a horse scaffold shall be
built of straight grained lumber or material of
equivalent strength and braced to resist side thrusts.
(2) A horse shall not be more than 4 feet in height and
length.
(3) Nailing of extension pieces is prohibited.
(4) Horses shall not be tiered.
R 408.41228 Steel tower scaffolds

Rule 1228. (1) A steel tower scaffold shall be designed
and erected according to the specifications of a
qualified engineer who is knowledgeable in the
subject.
(2) The erected scaffold shall meet the general
provisions of this part.
R 408.41226. Bricklayers square scaffold

Rule 1226. (1) The squares of a bricklayers square
scaffold shall not be more than 5 feet wide by 5 feet
high and set not more than 5 feet apart. The bearers
and legs shall be made of 2- by 6-inch material, the
corner braces of 1- by 6-inch material, and the
diagonal braces of 1- by 8-inch material on both
sides running from center to center of each
member.
(2) Additional 1- by 8-inch bracing shall extend from
the bottom of each square to the top of the next
square on the front and rear of the scaffold.
(3) Each platform plank shall be supported by not less
than 3 squares.
(4) A bricklayers square scaffold shall not be tiered.
R 408.41227 Pump jack scaffolds
Rule 1227. (1) Pump jack brackets, braces, and
accessories shall be fabricated from metal plates
and angles. Each bracket shall have 2 positive
gripping mechanisms to prevent any failure or
slippage.
(2) The platform bracket shall be fully decked.
(3) Poles that are used for a pump jack shall not be
spaced more than 10 feet center to center when
wood scaffold planks are used for a platform. The
spacing may be more than 10 feet center to center if
a manufactured platform meets the requirements of
this part.
(4) A pole shall be in compliance with all of the
(a) Not be more than 30 feet in height.
(b) Be secured to the structure by rigid triangular
bracing, or equivalent, at the bottom, top, and
other points as necessary to provide a
maximum vertical spacing of not more than 10
feet between braces. Each brace shall be
capable of supporting not less than 225
pounds tension or compression.
(c) Be made of 2, 2 by 4s of Douglas fir, or the
equivalent, or 2 continuous lengths made of 2
by 4s spiked together, with the seam parallel
to the bracket, with 10D common nails at not
more than 12 inches center to center,
staggered uniformly from opposite outside
edges. Each 2 by 4 may be spliced to make up
a pole if the splice is constructed to develop
the full strength of the member.
(5) Where the bracket must pass bracing already
installed, an extra brace shall be used
approximately 4 feet above the one to be passed
until the original brace is reinstalled.
(6) Occupancy of a pump-jack scaffold shall be limited
to 2 employees between any 2 adjacent supports.
(7) If poles are made of wood, then the pole lumber
shall be straight-grained and free of shakes, large
SUSPENDED SCAFFOLDS
R 408.41229 Suspended scaffolds; tipping moment
requirement; support devices; outrigger
beams;
counterweights
tiebacks;
suspension
ropes;
use
of
certain
equipment
on
scaffolds
prohibited;
securing scaffolds; use of emergency
escape and rescue devices
Rule 1229. (1) Direct connections to roofs and floors, and
counterweights used to balance an adjustable
suspension scaffold, shall be capable of resisting
not less than 4 times the tipping moment imposed
by the scaffold operating at either the rated load of
the hoist or not less than 1.5 times the tipping
moment imposed by the scaffold operating at the
stall load of the hoist, whichever is greater.
(2) A suspension scaffold support device, such as an
outrigger beam, cornice hook, parapet clamp, and a
similar device shall rest on a surface capable of
supporting not less than 4 times the load imposed
on them by the scaffold operating at the rated load
of the hoist or not less than 1.5 times the load
imposed on them by the scaffold at the stall capacity
of the hoist, whichever is greater.
(3) A suspension scaffold outrigger beam, when used,
shall be made of structural metal or equivalent
strength material and shall be restrained to prevent
movement.
(4) The inboard end of a suspension scaffold outrigger
beam shall be stabilized by bolts or other direct
connection to the floor or roof deck or shall be
stabilized by counterweights, except that a
multipoint adjustable suspension scaffold outrigger
beam shall not be stabilized by counterweights.
(5) Before a scaffold is used, a competent person shall
evaluate direct connections. The person shall
confirm, based on the evaluation, that the support
surfaces are capable of supporting the loads to be
imposed. In addition, an engineer who is
experienced in multipoint adjustable suspension
scaffold design shall design the multipoint
adjustable suspension scaffold connections.
(6) Counterweights shall be made of nonflowable
material. Sand, gravel, and similar materials that
can be easily dislocated shall not be used as
counterweights.
(7) Only items specifically designed as counterweights
shall be used to counterweight scaffold systems.
Construction materials, such as, but not limited to,
masonry units and rolls of roofing felt, shall not be
used as counterweights.
(8) Counterweights shall be secured by mechanical
means to the outrigger beams to prevent accidental
displacement.
13
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
Counterweights shall not be removed from an

outrigger beam until the scaffold is disassembled.
Outrigger beams that are not stabilized by bolts or
other direct connections to the floor or roof deck
shall be secured by tiebacks.
Tiebacks shall be equivalent in strength to the
suspension ropes.
An outrigger beam shall be placed perpendicular to
its bearing support, usually the face of the building
or structure. However, if an employer can
demonstrate that it is not possible to place an
outrigger beam perpendicular to the face of the
building or structure because of obstructions that
cannot be moved, then the outrigger beam may be
placed at some other angle if opposing angle
tiebacks are used.
Tiebacks shall be secured to a structurally sound
anchorage on the building or structure. Sound
anchorages include structural members, but do not
include any of the following items:
(a) Standpipes.
(b) Vents.
(c) Other piping systems.
(d) Electrical conduit.
Either tiebacks shall be installed perpendicular to
the face of the building or structure or opposing
angle tiebacks shall be installed. Single tiebacks
installed at an angle are prohibited.
A suspension scaffold outrigger beam shall be in
compliance with all of the following provisions:
(a) Have stop bolts or shackles at both ends.
(b) Be securely fastened together with the flanges
turned out when channel iron beams are used
in place of I-beams.
(c) Be installed with all bearing supports
perpendicular to the beam center line.
(d) Be set and maintained with the web in a
vertical position.
(e) When an outrigger beam is used, the shackle
or clevis with which the rope is attached to the
outrigger beam shall be placed directly over
the center line of the stirrup.
A suspension scaffold support device, such as a
cornice hook, roof hook, roof iron, parapet clamp, or
similar device shall be in compliance with the
following provisions, as applicable:
(a) Be made of steel, wrought iron, or materials of
equivalent strength.
(b) Be supported by bearing blocks.
(c) Either be secured against movement by
tiebacks installed at right angles to the face of
the building or structure or have opposing
angle tiebacks installed and secured to a
structurally sound point of anchorage on the
building or structure. Sound points of
anchorage include structural members, but do
not include any of the following items:
(i) Standpipes.
(ii) Vents.
(iii) Other piping systems.
(iv) Electrical conduit.
(d) Tiebacks shall be equivalent in strength to the
hoisting rope.
A suspension rope that supports an adjustable
suspension scaffold shall be of a diameter large
enough to provide sufficient surface area for the
functioning of brake and hoist mechanisms.
(18) Repaired wire rope shall not be used as suspension

rope.
(19) Wire suspension ropes shall not be joined together,
except through the use of eye splice thimbles
connected with shackles or cover plates and bolts.
(20) Swaged attachments or spliced eyes on wire
suspension ropes shall not be used unless the
attachments or eyes are made by the wire rope
manufacturer or a qualified person.
(21) The load end of a wire suspension rope shall be
equipped with proper size thimble and shall be
secured by eye splicing or an equivalent means.
(22) Gasoline-powered equipment and hoists shall not
be used on suspension scaffolds.
(23) A suspension scaffold shall be tied or otherwise
secured to prevent it from swaying. A competent
person shall evaluate the scaffold and determine if it
needs to be tied or otherwise secured. Window
cleaners anchors shall not be used to tie or
otherwise secure a suspension scaffold.
(24) A device that functions solely to provide emergency
escape and rescue shall not be used as a working
platform. This subrule does not preclude the use of
a system that is designed to function both as a
suspension scaffold and an emergency system.
R 408.41231 Adjustable multipoint suspension scaffolds
Rule 1231. (1) An adjustable multipoint suspension
scaffold shall be capable of sustaining a working
load of 50 pounds per square foot and shall not be
loaded to more than 50 pounds per square foot.
(2) An outrigger beam that is used for an adjustable
multipoint suspension scaffold shall meet all of the
following criteria:
(a) Be made of metal that is equivalent in strength
to a standard 7-inch, 15.3-pound steel beam.
(b) Be not less than 15 feet in length.
(c) Project not more than 6 feet 6 inches beyond
the bearing point.
(d) Be spaced not more than 7 feet on center.
(3) The scaffold outrigger beam shall be securely
fastened or anchored to the frame or floor system of
the building or structure.
(4) Only wire rope shall be used for suspending an
adjustable multipoint suspension scaffold.
(5) The steel shackles or clevises with which the wire
ropes are attached to the outrigger beams shall be
placed directly over the hoisting drums.
(6) The outrigger beam shall rest on a wood bearing
block that is capable of supporting the load without
deformation.
R 408.41232. Multipoint suspended scaffold
Rule 1232. (1) A multipoint suspended scaffold shall be
suspended from structural components that are
capable of supporting 4 times the maximum
intended load.
(2) A multipoint suspended scaffold shall be light- or
medium-duty scaffold only.
(3) If wire rope is used for the suspension of a
multipoint suspended scaffold, a minimum of 2
wraps around the supporting structural members
and around put logs shall be used and secured with
the proper number of wire rope clips or fist grips as
prescribed in table 5 of R 408.41261(11).
(4) Softeners shall be used to prevent damage to wire
rope that is used for suspension.
14
R 408.41233 Two-point adjustable suspension scaffolds
(swing stage scaffold)
Rule 1233. (1) A swing stage scaffold platform shall not
be less than 20 inches nor more than 36 inches
wide overall. The platform shall be securely
fastened to the stirrups by U-bolts or by other
equivalent means.
(2) At the beginning of each new installation, after a
swing stage scaffold is completely suspended, the
scaffold shall be tested by being set about 1 foot
above the lowest elevation and loaded with 2 times
the anticipated working load.
(3) The stirrups shall be designed with a support for a
guardrail, intermediate rails, and toeboard.
(4) Rope and blocks that are used to support a 2-point
adjustable scaffold shall have all of the following:
(a) Supporting ropes of 3/4-inch, first-quality
manila rope or a synthetic rope of equivalent
strength used with at least one 6-inch single
and one 6-inch double block.
(b) Blocks that have sheaves which fit the size of
the rope the blocks carry.
(c) Live ropes made fast to the scaffold in a
manner to prevent displacement.
(d) The dead-end of the supporting rope
connected to the block at the stirrup by means
of an eye splice incorporating a thimble.
(5) Slings, hangers, platforms, and other supporting
parts shall be inspected before every installation.
Periodic inspections shall be made while the
scaffold is in use. For ropes, see R 408.41261,
R 408.41262, and R 408.41263.
(6) A swing stage scaffold shall be limited to the
following number of employees:
(a) For a scaffold designed for a working load of
500 pounds, not more than 2 employees shall
be permitted to work at one time.
(b) For a scaffold designed for a working load of
750 pounds, not more than 3 employees shall
be permitted to work at one time.
(7) Two or more scaffolds shall not be combined by
bridging with planks or similar connecting links.
(8) Rollers or fenders shall be provided to prevent
striking the building and to facilitate raising and
lowering.
(9) The platform of a swing stage scaffold shall be 1 of
the following types:
(a) Ladder-type platforms - The ladder-type
platform shall be constructed to meet ANSI
standard A10.8-1977 entitled Scaffolding,
which is adopted in these rules by reference
and which may be inspected at the Lansing
office of the department of Labor and
Economic Growth. The standard may be
purchased at a cost as of the time of adoption
of these rules of $5.00 from the American
National Standards Institute, 1430 Broadway,
New York, New York 10018, or from the
Michigan Department of Consumer and
Industry
Services,
MIOSHA
Standards
Division, 7150 Harris Drive, Box 30643,
Lansing, Michigan 48909.
(b) Plank-type platform - The plank-type platform
shall be composed of not less than two 2 by
10-inch unspliced planks which are laid
straight and which are cleated together on the
underside, with the cleats starting 6 inches
from each end and spaced at 12-inch intervals.
(c) Beam-type platform - The beam platform shall

have side stringers made of lumber that is not
less than 2 by 6 inches set on edge. The span
between hangers shall not be more than 12
feet. The flooring shall be supported on 2 by 6inch crossbeams which are laid flat, which are
set into the upper edge of the stringers with a
snug fit at intervals of not more than 4 feet
center to center, and which are securely nailed
in place. The flooring shall be 1 by 6-inch
lumber or 3/4-inch plywood and shall be
securely nailed. Floorboards shall not be
spaced more than 1/2 of an inch apart.
(d) Manufactured picks - When used, a
manufactured pick shall conform to the
requirements of R 408.41217(3), (4), and (5).
R 408.41234 Multilevel suspension scaffolds
Rule 1234. (1) A multilevel suspension scaffold shall
have a separate fall prevention device that allows a
drop of not more than 12 inches installed at each
support point connected with a line to the scaffold.
(2) The device shall be attached to a wire rope safety
line equivalent to the support rope, and the safety
line shall be secured to a substantial member of the
structure separate from the support rope and to the
ground. If it is not possible to attach a safety line to
the structure, then the safety line shall be attached
to the outrigger.
(3) Each employee shall be protected by a personal fall
arrest system as specified in Part 45. Fall
Protection, being R 408.44501 et seq. of the
Michigan Administrative Code, attached to the
scaffold.
(4) The multilevel suspension scaffold shall be in
compliance with the provisions of R 408.41229 and
R 408.41233.
multilevel suspension scaffold is completely
suspended, the scaffold shall be tested by being set
about 1 foot above the lowest elevation and loaded
with 2 times the anticipated working load.
(6) A support for a platform shall be attached directly to
the support stirrup and not to any other platform.
R
408.41235 Single-point adjustable suspension

scaffolds
Rule 1235. (1) A single-point adjustable suspension
scaffold shall be raised or lowered by an electrical,
air motor-driven, or manual hoisting machine.
(2) A single-point adjustable suspension scaffold shall
travel only in a vertical line.
single-point adjustable suspension scaffold is
completely suspended, the scaffold shall be tested
by being set about 1 foot above the lowest elevation
and loaded with 2 times the anticipated working
load.
(4) The suspension methods shall be as prescribed in
R 408.41229.
R 408.41236 Needle beam scaffolds

Rule 1236. (1) A needle beam scaffold shall be
suspended from a structure that is capable of
supporting not less than 4 times the weight of the
scaffold and intended load.
(2) The beams of a needle beam scaffold shall be of
wood not less than 4 by 6 inches, with the greater
15
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
dimension set vertically, or of equivalent structural

metal.
A needle beam scaffold shall not be altered or
moved while in use.
The distance between the needle beams shall not
be more than 8 feet, the length of needle beams
shall be not more than 12 feet, and the needle
beams shall be supported at points 12 inches from
the ends.
Rope supports shall be of 1-inch, first-grade manila
rope or synthetic rope of equivalent strength and
shall be hung vertically. The rope shall be attached
to the needle beams in a manner that prevents the
needle beams from rolling or otherwise becoming
displaced.
The scaffold planking shall be in compliance with all
of the following provisions:
(a) Be laid tight between supporting ropes.
(b) Be secured against displacement. Cleats are
not an adequate means of attachment.
(c) Extend not more than 6 inches beyond the
beam.
Tools, bolts, and nuts on a needle beam scaffold
shall be kept in containers that are properly secured
on the scaffold.
One end of a needle beam scaffold may be
supported by and secured to a permanent structural
member.
R 408.41237 Boatswains chair

Rule 1237. (1) The seat of a boatswains chair made of
wood shall be not less than 12 by 24 inches and 1inch thick with the underside reinforced by cleats
fastened to prevent splitting. Other materials used
shall be of equivalent strength and size.
(2) Two 5/8-inch, first-quality manila rope slings or
synthetic rope of equivalent strength shall be reeved
through the 4 seat holes so as to cross each other
on the underside. Where an employee is using a
heat or spark-producing process, such as gas
welding or cutting, a protected 3/8-inch wire rope
shall be used in place of fiber rope.
(3) An employee shall be protected by a fall arrest
system as prescribed in Part 45. Fall Protection,
(4) The tackle shall consist of bearing or bushed blocks
and 5/8-inch, first grade manila rope or its
equivalent. The block shall be secured to roof irons,
hooks, or other objects that are secured. Tiebacks
shall be installed at right angles to the face of the
building and shall be secured to the roof hooks and
the building.
R 408.41238 Float scaffolds
Rule 1238. (1) A float scaffold shall be constructed of not
less than 3/4-inch exterior plywood or equivalent
material. The platform shall be not more than 3 by 6
feet in size, and the ends of the platform shall
project 6 inches beyond the outer edge of the
bearers.
(2) The plywood shall be securely fastened to 2 2- by 4inch bearers which are made of select lumber that is
free of knots and other defects and which project 6
inches beyond the platforms on each side. The
plywood shall be reinforced with a diagonal brace
that runs from bearer to bearer beneath the
platform.
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
An edging of wood not less than 1 by 2 inches, or its

equivalent, shall be secured around all sides of the
platform to prevent tools from rolling off.
Supporting ropes shall be 1- inch manila rope, or its
equivalent, and shall be free of defects.
Rope connections shall be made in a manner that
prevents the platform from shifting or slipping. The
rope shall be arranged to do all of the following:
(a) Pass under the platform.
(b) Be hitched around the end of each bearer on
each side.
(c) Provide 4 ends that shall be securely fastened
to an overhead support.
Not more than 2 employees and necessary light
tools shall occupy a float scaffold.
Each employee on a float scaffold shall be protected
by a personal fall arrest system.
R 408.41239 Catenary scaffolds

Rule 1239. (1) Not more than 1 platform shall be placed
between consecutive vertical pickups, and not more
than 2 platforms shall be used on a catenary
scaffold.
(2) A platform supported by wire ropes shall have hookshaped stops on each end of the platform to prevent
it from slipping off the wire ropes. The hooks shall
be placed to prevent the platform from falling if 1 of
the horizontal wire ropes breaks.
(3) A wire rope shall not be tightened to the extent that
the application of a scaffold load will overstress the
wire rope.
(4) A wire rope shall be continuous and not have
splices between anchors.
R 408.41240 Interior hung scaffolds
Rule 1240. (1) An interior scaffold shall be suspended
only from the roof structure or other structural
member such as a ceiling beam.
(2) An overhead supporting member (roof structure,
ceiling beams, or other structural members) shall be
inspected and checked for strength before the
scaffold is erected.
(3) Suspension ropes and cables shall be connected to
the overhead supporting members by shackles,
clips, thimbles, or other means that meet the
strength and durability of the suspension ropes and
cables.
MOBILE SCAFFOLDS
R 408.41241 Mobile scaffolds
Rule 1241. (1) When a freestanding mobile scaffold is
used, the height shall not be more than 4 times the
minimum base dimension.
(2) Outriggers, when used, may be considered as part
of the base dimension. The outriggers shall be
installed on both sides of the scaffold at each frame
line.
(3) Locking devices shall be used to secure the casters
to the frame or adjusting screw. The adjusting
screw shall not extend more than 12 inches. The
casters shall be provided with a positive locking
device to prevent movement of the scaffold. The
device shall be used when the scaffold is in use,
except where the work platform is 4 feet or less from
the floor.
16
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
Vertical members of the scaffold shall be braced by

cross bracing and diagonal bracing. Not less than 2
horizontal diagonal braces shall be installed, 1 as
close to the casters as possible, at intervals of not
more than 4 times the least-based dimension. The
horizontal diagonal brace may be omitted on a
scaffold that is specifically designed to absorb
racking.
A scaffold platform shall cover the full width of the
scaffold, except for a necessary entrance opening.
A platform shall be secured in place. A platform
shall not extend outward beyond the base supports
of the scaffold unless outrigger frames or equivalent
devices are used to ensure stability.
A ladder or stairway that is provided on a manually
propelled mobile scaffold shall be affixed or built into
the scaffold and shall be so located that, when in
use, the ladder or stairway does not have a
tendency to tip the scaffold. A landing platform shall
be provided at intervals of not more than 30 feet.
In place of a ladder or stairway, the requirements of
R 408.41211(2) may be complied with.
Only manual force shall be used to move a scaffold
covered by this rule. The force shall be applied near
or as close to the base as practical, except for a
scaffold with a work platform that is 4 feet or less
from the floor.
When being used, a mobile scaffold shall rest upon
a suitable footing and shall stand plumb. Where
leveling of the scaffold is necessary, screw jacks or
an equivalent means shall be used.
An employer shall not allow an employee to ride on
a mobile scaffold, unless all of the following
conditions exist:
(a) The floor or surface is within 3 degrees of level
and is free from pits, holes, or obstructions.
(b) The minimum base dimension of the scaffold
when ready for rolling is not less than 1/2 of the
height.
(c) The casters are equipped with rubber or
similar resilient tires.
(d) All tools and materials are secured or removed
from the platform before the mobile scaffold is
moved.
(e) The scaffold is equipped with guardrails on all
sides.
(f) Before a scaffold is moved, each employee on
the scaffold shall be made aware of the move.
A mobile scaffold shall be in compliance with the
applicable provisions of R 408.41217, R 408.41218,
R 408.41223, and R 408.41224.
A power system used to propel a mobile scaffold
shall be designed to propel a mobile scaffold. A
forklift, truck, similar motor vehicle, or add-on motor
shall not be used to propel a scaffold unless the
scaffold is designed to be propelled by a forklift,
truck, similar motor vehicle, or add-on motor.
If a power system is used to propel a scaffold, then
the propelling force shall be applied directly to the
wheel and shall not produce a speed of more than 1
foot per second (.3 meters per second).
An employee shall not be on any part of a powered
mobile scaffold that extends outward beyond the
wheels, casters, or other supports.
A powered mobile scaffold shall be stabilized to
prevent tipping during movement.
R 408.41243 Rough terrain forklift truck scaffolds;

equipment requirements; employee safety
requirements
Rule 1243. (1) Before an employee is elevated on a
rough terrain forklift truck scaffold, a pre-lift meeting
shall be held to review the appropriate requirements
and procedures to be followed. The pre-lift meeting
shall be attended by all of the following entities:
(a) The lift operator.
(b) The signalperson.
(c) Employees to be lifted.
(d) The person who is responsible for the task to
be performed.
(2) The scaffold platform shall be attached to the forks
by enclosed sleeves and shall be secured against
the back of the forks with a mechanical device so
that the platform cannot tip or slip.
(3) The lifting carriage and the forks shall be secured to
prevent them from tipping upward.
(4) An employer shall provide protection for an
employee on the platform from moving parts and on
lift trucks equipped with a lifting mast. The side of
the platform adjacent to the mast shall be protected
by a solid or mesh guard that is sufficient in height
and width to prevent contact with moving parts of
the mast. On trucks equipped with rotators, the
rotation shall be deactivated.
(5) A work platform shall be in compliance with all of the
following requirements:
(a) Except for the guardrail system as specified in
construction safety standard Part 21. Guarding
of Walking and Working Areas, being
R 408.42101 et seq. of the Michigan
Administrative Code, be of welded mild steel
construction that has a minimum safety factor
of 4 times the maximum intended load.
(b) Have a continuous guardrail system
constructed as follows:
(i) Have a top rail which is located not less
than 36 inches, nor more than 42 inches,
above the platform floor and which is
constructed to withstand a minimum of
200 pounds of force in any direction.
(ii) Have a midrail which is installed at midheight between the top rail and platform
floor and which is constructed to withstand
a 200-pound side thrust.
(iii) Have a toeboard which is not less than 4
inches in nominal height and which is
installed not more than 1/4 of an inch above
the floor around the periphery of the work
platform. If the platform has a gate, then
the toeboard shall be installed on the
gate.
(c) Have a wood planking, steel plate, or a steel
grating bolted or welded to the bottom of the
platform and be maintained free of slip or trip
hazards.
(d) Have a permanently affixed sign on the
platform that specifies the maximum number of
passengers allowed, the work platform
identification number, and the maximum rated
load.
(e) Be easily identifiable by high-visibility color or
marking.
(6) An employee on a scaffold who is exposed to an
overhead hazard of falling material or overhead
17
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
projections shall be protected with overhead

protection that is sufficient to prevent injury.
The lifting mechanism shall operate smoothly
through its entire lift range, both empty and loaded,
and all lift-limiting devices and latches, if provided,
shall be functional.
The work platform shall be level when in use.
If an employee is elevated in a platform on a
variable reach lift truck, a personal fall arrest
system, including the anchorage required in Part 45.
Fall Protection, being R 408.44501 et seq., of the
Michigan Administrative Code and Part 6. Personal
Protective Equipment, being R408.40601 et seq., of
the Michigan Administrative Code, is required and
shall be worn when an employee is elevated.
The rough terrain fork truck or the lift truck shall rest
on firm footing. Leveling devices and outriggers
shall be used where provided on equipment.
A trained operator shall remain at the operator
station of a lift truck to control the lift truck while an
employee is elevated. The lift truck control or
controls shall be in neutral and the parking brake
set. The operator of the lift truck scaffold platform
shall be able to see the elevated platform at all
times.
A lift truck platform shall be returned to the ground
before a lift truck is repositioned. The forklift shall be
moved as close to the work area as possible for
final positioning. An employee shall exit the landed
platform and reboard the platform only after the lift
truck repositioning is completed.
The path that a lift truck platform travels shall be
clear of hazards, such as storage racks, scaffolds,
overhead obstructions, and electrical lines.
Distances shall be maintained from electrical lines
as specified in R 408.41212(4),(5), and (6).
A lift truck operator shall keep his or her hands and
feet clear of the controls that are not in use.
A lift truck operator shall lift and lower an employee
smoothly, with caution, and either at the employees
request or after alerting the elevated employee of
intended movement. An operator of a lift truck that
has a telescopic boom shall extend or retract the
boom only at idle or near idle speed.
The combined mass weight of the platform, load,
and the employee shall not be more than 1/3 of the
rated capacity of the rough terrain forklift truck on
which the platform is used.
An employee shall maintain firm footing on the
platform floor. Railings, planks, ladders, or other
materials shall not be used on the platform to
achieve reach or height.
The guardrail system of the platform shall not be
used to support any of the following:
(a) Materials.
(b) Other work platforms.
(c) Employees.
The platform shall be lowered to ground level for an
employee to enter or exit, except where elevated
work areas are inaccessible or hazardous to reach.
An employee may exit the platform with the
knowledge and consent of the employer. When
exiting to unguarded work areas, fall protection shall
be provided and used as required in construction
safety standard, Part 45. Fall Protection, being
R 408.44501 et seq. of the Michigan Administrative
Code. An employee shall not climb on any part of a
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
lift truck when attempting to enter or exit the

platform.
A platform shall not be modified if the modification is
detrimental to its safe use.
Floor dimensions parallel to the truck longitudinal
centerline shall not be more than 2 times the load
center distance listed on the rough terrain forklift
truck nameplate. The floor dimension width shall not
be more than the overall width of the truck
measured across the load-bearing tires plus 10
inches (250 mm) on either side. The minimum
space for each employee on the platform shall be
not less than 18 inches (450 mm) in either direction.
A wood pallet shall not be used as a platform for lift
truck scaffolds.
If arc welding is performed by an employee on the
platform, then the electrode holders shall be
protected from contact with the metal components
of the work platform.
The only tools that are permitted on the work
platform are hand tools and portable powered tools.
Materials and tools shall be secured to prevent
displacement. The total weight of compressed gas
cylinders shall not be more than 20 pounds.
A work platform shall not be used during high winds,
electrical storms, snow, ice, sleet, or other adverse
weather conditions that could affect the safety of the
employees on the work platform or the operator of
the truck.
An employee shall keep all parts of his or her body
inside the platform during raising, lowering, or
repositioning of the platform.
There shall be a communication system between an
employee on the work platform and the operator of
the rough terrain forklift truck or a fork lift truck.
R 408.41244 Inspection and maintenance of rough terrain

forklift trucks
Rule 1244. (1) Before an employee is elevated on a
rough terrain forklift truck platform, a trained
operator or other qualified personnel shall inspect all
of the following items:
(a) Tires and their inflation pressure.
(b) Warning devices.
(c) Lights.
(d) Lift and tilt mechanisms, load engaging
means, chains, cables, and limit switches.
(e) Brakes.
(f) Steering mechanism.
(g) Fuel systems.
(2) A forklift truck shall not be operated if an unsafe
condition is found before or during use until the
truck has been restored to a safe operating
condition.
(3) A rough terrain forklift truck and forklift trucks shall
be maintained according to the manufacturers
recommendations.
R 408.41245 Operator training
Rule 1245. (1) An employer shall ensure that an
employee has been trained before the employees
assignment as an operator of a rough terrain forklift
truck that is used to elevate employees. An
employee shall be trained in all of the following
areas:
(a) The capabilities of the equipment and its
attachments.
18
(2)
(b) The purpose, use, and limitations of the

controls.
(c) How to make daily checks.
An employee shall practice operating an assigned
vehicle and perform the functions necessary for a
particular job.
R 408.41246 Operator permits

Rule 1246. (1) An employer shall ensure that an operator
has a valid permit to operate a rough terrain forklift
or a forklift truck for elevating an employee. The
operator shall carry the permit or shall have the
permit available if it is requested by a department
representative, during working hours.
(2) A permit to operate a rough terrain forklift truck or a
forklift truck is valid only for work performed for the
employer who issued the permit. A permit may be
issued for a period of not more than 3 years. A
permit shall contain all of the following information:
(a) Firm name.
(b) Operators name.
(c) Date issued.
(d) Date expiring.
(e) Operator restrictions, if any. If a restricted
permit to operate is issued, then the permit
shall state the nature of the restriction.
(f) The type of truck an operator has been trained
on and is qualified to operate
AUXILIARY SUPPORTED SCAFFOLDS
R 408.41251 Outrigger scaffolds

Rule 1251. (1) The inboard end of an outrigger beam
measured from the fulcrum point to anchorage point
shall be not less than 1 1/2 times the outboard end
in length. The beams shall rest on edge, the sides
shall be plumb, and the edges shall be horizontal.
The fulcrum point of the beam shall rest on a secure
bearing not less than 6 inches in each horizontal
dimension. The beam shall be secured in place
against movement and shall be securely braced at
the fulcrum point against tipping.
(2) The inboard end of an outrigger beam shall be
securely anchored either by means of struts bearing
against sills in contact with the overhead beams or
ceiling or by means of tension members secured to
the floor joists underfoot, or by both if necessary.
The inboard end of an outrigger beam shall be
secured against tipping, and the entire supporting
structure shall be securely braced in both directions
to prevent any horizontal movement.
(3) An outrigger scaffold shall be constructed as
prescribed in table 4.
(4) Planking shall be laid tight and shall extend to within
3 inches of the building wall. Planking shall be
secured to the outriggers.
(5) A scaffold and scaffold components shall be
designed by a qualified person who is
knowledgeable in scaffolding and shall be
constructed and loaded in accordance with the
design.
TABLE 4
SPACING AND LENGTH OF OUTRIGGER SCAFFOLDS
Light Duty
25 psf
Outrigger size
2 by 10 feet
Maximum outrigger spacing
8 feet
Maximum outrigger length
6 feet
Maximum Scaffold Load
R 408.41252 Rescinded.
R 408.41253 Roofing brackets and crawling boards
Rule 1253. (1) A roofing bracket shall be installed in a
manner to maintain a level working surface.
(2) Spacing between the brackets supporting a work
plank shall not be more than 8 feet.
(3) The working plank shall not be less than 2 by 6
inches.
(4) In addition to the pointed metal projections, the
brackets shall be secured in place by nailing. When
it is impractical to nail brackets, rope supports shall
be used. When rope supports are used, they shall
consist of first-quality manila rope of at least 3/4inch diameter or its equivalent.
(5) A crawling board shall not be less than 1 by 10
inches, shall extend from the eave to the ridge of
the roof, and shall be secured against displacement.
(6) Cleats shall be secured to the board by nails which
are driven through, and clinched to, the underside.
(7) The cleats shall be not less than 1 by 1 1/2 inches,
shall be equal in length to the width of the crawling
board, and shall be spaced not more than 24 inches
center to center.
(8)
Medium Duty
50 psf
3 by 10 feet
6 feet
6 feet
When a crawling board is used and a catch platform

is provided, a lifeline of not less than 3/4-inch
diameter rope, or its equivalent, shall be strung
beside the board for a handhold.
R 408.41254 Carpenters bracket scaffold

Rule 1254. (1) The supporting brackets of a carpenters
bracket scaffold shall be made of metal.
(2) The supporting brackets shall be fastened to the
structure by 1 of the following:
(a) Three-eights-inch diameter bolts extending
through the studs at the top of the bracket and
projecting 3/4 inch beyond the nut and washer
when in place.
(b) Welding to a metal tank.
(c) Hooked over a secured supporting member of
the structure.
(3) The supporting brackets shall be not more than 8
feet apart to support 1 employee and not more than
75 pounds of material, or 4 feet apart to support 2
employees and not more than 75 pounds of
material.
19
R 408.41255 Form Scaffolds
Rule 1255. (1) A form scaffold shall be used to support a
maximum intended load of not more than 25 pounds
per square foot.
(2) Form scaffold brackets shall be spaced not more
than 8 feet on center and shall be constructed of the
following:
(a) Bearers of not less than 2- by 4-inch wood or
materials of equivalent strength which are
secured horizontally to the side of a vertical
form support and which extend not more than
6 inches beyond the outer edge of the
platform, but the total length of the bearer shall
be not more than 42 inches.
(b) A diagonal brace placed at a 45-degree angle
from and below the outer end of the bearer to
the vertical form support.
(3) Metal brackets that are an integral part of the form
shall be bolted or welded to the form. A folding-type
bracket shall be secured by bolts or locking pins
when in the extended position. Clip-on hook-on
brackets may be used if the form walers are bolted
to the form or secured by snap ties or shea-bolts
extending through the form and anchored.
R 408.41256 Ladder jack scaffolds
Rule 1256. (1) A ladder jack scaffold shall be used only
for light duty on type I manufactured ladders at
heights not more than 20 feet from the ground or
floor level. The ladder shall be used as prescribed in
Part 11. Fixed and Portable Ladders, being
Code.
(2) The span of a wood plank shall be not more than 8
feet between ladder jacks and the planking shall be
as prescribed in R 408.41217.
(3) The span of a pick shall not exceed 24 feet.
(4) A ladder jack scaffold using planks shall be limited
to 2 employees at any one time, except that if 3
ladders support the plank, 3 employees may occupy
the plank. Not more than 1 employee shall occupy
any given 4 feet of plank at any one time.
(5) A ladder jack scaffold using a pick shall be limited to
2 employees at any one time, except that if 3
ladders support the pick, 3 employees may occupy
the pick. Not more than 1 employee shall occupy
any given 6 feet of pick at any one time.
(6) All bearing points of a ladder jack shall be designed
to bear on the side rails and the rungs, but if bearing
on the rungs only, the bearing area shall be not less
than 10 lineal inches per rung.
R 408.41256a Step, platform, and trestle ladder scaffolds
Rule 1256a. (1) A scaffold platform shall not be placed
higher than the second highest rung or step of the
ladder supporting the platform.
(2) A ladder used in conjunction with a step, platform,
and trestle ladder scaffold shall be in compliance
with the pertinent requirements of construction
safety standard Part 11. Fixed and Portable
Ladders, being R 408.41101 et seq. of the Michigan
Administrative Code, except that job-made ladders
shall not be used to support a step, platform, or
trestle scaffold.
(3) A ladder used to support a step, platform, and
trestle ladder scaffold shall be placed, fastened, or
equipped with a device to prevent slipping.
(4) A scaffold shall not be bridged to another scaffold.
R 408.41256b Repair bracket scaffolds

Rule 1256b. (1) Brackets shall be secured in place by at
least 1 wire rope that is at least 1/2 of an inch (1.27
centimeter) in diameter.
(2) Each bracket shall be attached to the securing wire
rope or ropes by either a positive locking device
capable of preventing the unintentional detachment
of the bracket from the rope or by equivalent means.
(3) Each bracket, at the contact point between the
supporting structure and the bottom of the bracket,
shall have a shoe (heel block or foot) capable of
preventing the lateral movement of the bracket.
(4) A platform shall be secured to the brackets in a
manner that will prevent the separation of the
platform from the brackets and the movement of the
platform or the brackets on a completed scaffold.
(5) If a wire rope is placed around the structure to
provide a safe anchorage for personal fall arrest
systems used by employees erecting or dismantling
scaffolds, then the wire rope shall be in compliance
with the requirements of construction safety
standard Part 45. Fall Protection, being
Code, or this part, but shall be at least 5/16 of an
inch (0.8 centimeter) in diameter.
(6) A wire rope used for securing brackets in place or
as an anchorage for personal fall arrest systems
shall be protected from damage due to contact with
edges, corners, protrusions, or other discontinuities
of the supporting structure or scaffold components.
(7) The tensioning of a wire rope used for securing
brackets in place or as an anchorage for personal
fall arrest systems shall be accomplished either by
means of a turnbuckle at least 1 inch (2.54
centimeter) in diameter or by equivalent means.
(8) A turnbuckle shall be connected to the other end of
its rope using an eye splice thimble of a size
appropriate to the turnbuckle to which it is attached.
(9) U-bolt wire rope clips shall not be used on any wire
rope used to secure brackets or to serve as an
anchor for personal fall arrest systems.
(10) An employer shall ensure that materials shall not be
dropped to the outside of the supporting structure.
(11) Scaffold erection shall progress in only 1 direction
around any structure.
WIRE, FIBER AND SYNTHETIC ROPE

R 408.41261 Wire rope generally
Rule 1261. (1) A wire rope shall be inspected for defects
by a competent person before each work shift and
after every occurrence could affect a ropes
integrity. A rope shall be replaced if any of the
following conditions exist:
(a) Physical damage that impairs the function and
strength of the rope.
(b) Kinks that might impair the tracking or
wrapping of rope around the drum or sheaves.
(c) Six randomly distributed broken wires in 1 rope
lay or 3 broken wires in 1 strand in 1 rope lay.
(d) Abrasion, corrosion, scrubbing, flattening, or
peening that has caused the loss of more than
1/3 of the original diameter of the outside
wires.
20
(2)
(3)
(4)
(e) Heat damage caused by a torch or any

damage caused by contact with electrical
wires.
(f) Evidence that the secondary brake has been
activated during an overspeed condition and
has engaged the suspension rope.
Wire rope that is bent to form an eye over a bolt or
rod which has a diameter of less than 4 times the
rope diameter shall be equipped with a metal
thimble.
Swaged attachments or spliced eyes on wire
suspension ropes shall not be used unless they are
made by the wire rope manufacturer or a qualified
person.
If wire rope clips are used on suspension scaffolds,
then all of the following provisions apply:
(a) Clips shall be installed according to the
manufacturers recommendations.
(b) Clips
shall
be
retightened
to
the
manufacturers recommendations after the
initial loading.
(c) Clips shall be inspected and retightened to the
manufacturers recommendations at the start
of each work shift.
(d) U-bolt clips shall not be used at the point of

suspension for any scaffold hoist.
(e) If U-bolt clips are used, then the U-bolt shall be
placed over the dead end of the rope and the
saddle shall be placed over the live end of the
rope.
(5) Wire ropes shall be stored in a manner to prevent
damage or deterioration.
(6) Before cutting wire rope, an employee shall place a
seizing on each side of the cut on preformed wire
rope.
(7) Wire rope shall be maintained in a lubricated
condition over its entire length with the same type
lubricant used by the manufacturer.
(8) Seizing or an equivalent protection shall be provided
at all wire rope ends.
(9) Wire rope shall not come in contact with sharp
edges.
(10) Wire rope used to suspend scaffolds shall not be
spliced.
TABLE 5
NUMBER AND SPACING OF U-BOLT WIRE ROPE CLIPS
Improved plow steel, rope Diameter
(inches)
5/16
3/8
1/2
5/8
3/4
7/8
1
1 1/8
1 1/4
1 3/8
1 1/2
Number of Clips
Drop
Other
Forged
Material
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
4
5
4
5
5
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
R 408.41262 Fiber rope generally

Rule 1262. (1) A fiber rope shall be inspected visually for
the following conditions before the start of each
work shift:
(a) Externally, for abrasions, cut or broken fibers,
decay, burns, lack of strength, softness, and
variation in size or roundness of the strands.
(b) Internally, by separating the strands for broken
fibers, presence of grit, mildew or mold, color
change of the fibers, or powdering and short
loose fibers.
(2) A rope having any of the conditions specified in
subrule (1) of this rule shall be replaced or returned
to the manufacturer for repair.
(3) A fiber rope shall be stored in a dry room in coils or
on a reel.
(4) A wet fiber rope shall be dried by placing it in the
sunshine or by hanging it loosely over a rounded
peg or hook in a warm room.
(5) A fiber rope shall not be kinked, run over sharp
corners, used when frozen, or left in freezing
temperatures when wet.
(6) A fiber rope subjected to an impact load equal to
more than its rated capacity shall be replaced.
(7) A thimble shall be used with fiber rope pursuant to
R 408.41261(2).
Minimum
Spacing
(inches)
3
3
3
3 3/4
4 1/2
5 1/4
6
6 3/4
7 1/2
8 1/4
R 408.41263 Synthetic rope

Rule 1263. (1) A synthetic rope shall be inspected
visually before the start of each job for abrasions,
cut or broken fibers, burns, melted fibers, and
variation in size or roundness of the strands. A rope
having any of these conditions shall be replaced or
returned to the manufacturer for repair.
(2) Because of the variance in manufacturing methods,
the manufacturers recommendations shall be
followed.
(3) A synthetic rope shall not be kinked, run over sharp
corners, used when frozen, or left in freezing
temperatures when wet.
(4) A synthetic rope subjected to an impact load equal
to or more than its rated capacity shall be replaced.
(5) A thimble shall be used with synthetic rope pursuant
to R 408.41261(2).
R 408.41264 Window jack scaffolds
Rule 1264. (1) A window jack scaffold shall be used as a
work platform for not more than 1 employee and
only for the purpose of working at the window
opening through which the jack is placed.
7
FIRE PROTECTION
MIOSHA-STD-1314 (02/07)
11 Pages

DIRECTOR'S OFFICE
Filed with the Secretary of State on August 31, 1976 (as amended May 17, 1983)
(as amended June 1, 1995) (as amended September 10, 2002)
of 1974 PA 154 and Executive Reorganization Order No. 1996-2, MCL 408.1019, 408.1021, and 445.2001)
R 408.41801, R 408.41836, R 408.41837, R 408.41838, R 408.41841, R 408.41842, R 408.41851,
R 408.41852, R 408.41853, R 408.41861, R 408.41863, R 408.41864, R 408.41866, R 408.41868,
R 408.41869, R 408.41871, R 408.41875, R 408.41876, R 408.41877, and R 408.41884 of the
Michigan Administrative Code are amended and R 408.41802 is added to the Code as follows:
PART 18. FIRE PROTECTION AND PREVENTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS
R 408.41801 Scope. ................................................................ 1
R 408.41802 Adoption of Standards. ....................................... 1
R 408.41836 Definitions; A to C............................................... 2
R 408.41837 Definitions; F. ..................................................... 2
R 408.41838 Definitions; L to V. .............................................. 2
R 408.41841 Employer Responsibility. .................................... 3
R 408.41842 Employee Emergency Action Plans. .................. 3
R 408.41850 Training. ............................................................. 3
R 408.41851 Portable Fire Extinguishing Equipment;
Selection and Installation. ................................................. 4
Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance. ............................. 4
R 408.41853 Fixed Fire Equipment. ........................................ 5
R 408.41854 Water Supply...................................................... 6
R 408.41855 Fire Hose and Connections. ............................... 6
R 408.41856 Fire Alarms. ........................................................ 6
R 408.41861 Ignition Hazards. ................................................ 6
R 408.41862 Transportation of Flammable and
Combustible Liquids. ........................................................ 6
R 408.41863 Flammable and Combustible Liquids;
Inside Storage. ................................................................. 6
R 408.41864 Inside Storage Room.......................................... 6
R 408.41865 Flammables and Combustibles;
Outside Storage................................................................ 7
R 408.41866 Emergency Venting of Outside

Portable Tanks. .................................................................7
R 408.41867 Flammable and Combustible
Liquids; Dispensing. ..........................................................8
Handling At Point Of Use. .................................................8
Service and Refueling Areas. ............................................8
R 408.41871 Liquefied Petroleum Gas. ...................................8
R 408.41872 L. P. Pipe, Fittings, and Hose..............................8
R 408.41873 L. P. Safety Devices............................................8
R 408.41874 L. P. Gas Appliances. .........................................8
R 408.41875 L.P. Containers and Equipment. .........................8
R 408.41876 Piping Liquid or Vapor L.P. Gas
Into Buildings and Structures. ...........................................9
R 408.41877 Storage of Portable Containers...........................9
R 408.41878 Location of Containers. .....................................10
R 408.41879 Container Valve Protection. ..............................10
R 408.41881 Temporary Buildings. ........................................10
R 408.41882 Open Yard Storage; Combustible Materials......10
R 408.41883 Indoor Storage. .................................................10
R 408.41884 Heating Devices................................................10
R 408.41801 Scope.
Rule 1801. This part pertains to all of the following:
(a) Fire prevention plans.
(b) Employee emergency plans.
(c) Fire fighting equipment.
(d) The storing and dispensing of flammable and
combustible materials.
(e) Heating devices for construction operations.
R 408.41802 Adoption of Standards.

Rule 1802. (1) The standards specified in this rule,
except the standards specified in subrule(5) of this rule, are
adopted by reference in these rules.
(2) The following standards are adopted by reference in
these rules and are available from The National Fire
Protection Association, 1 Batterymarch Park, P.O. Box 9101,
Quincy, Massachusetts, 02269-9101, USA; telephone
number: 617-770-3000; or via the internet at web-site:
www.nfpa.org; or at the Michigan Department of Consumer
and Industry Services, MIOSHA Standards Division, 7150
Harris Drive, P.O. Box 30643, Lansing, Michigan, 48909-
2
8143, at a cost as of the time of adoption of these rules as
stated:
(i) NFPA 13 Installation Of Sprinkler System
1991 edition. Cost $67.50.
(ii) NFPA 14 Standard For The Installation Of
Standpipe, Private Hydrants And Hose
Systems, 2000 edition. Cost $26.75.
(iii) NFPA
25
Inspection,
Testing,
And
Maintenance Of Water-Based Fire Protection
Systems, 1998 edition. Cost $35.25.
(iv) NFPA 251 Standard Methods Of Fire Testing
Of Building Construction And Materials, 1990
edition. Cost $13.50.
(v) NFPA 30 Flammable And Combustible
Liquids Code, 1996 edition. Cost $29.75.
(vi) NFPA 385 Standard For Tank Vehicles For
Flammable And Combustible Liquids, 1990
edition. Cost $22.25.
(vii) NFPA 58 Storage And Handling Of Liquefied
Petroleum Gases, 1992 edition. Cost 32.25.
(viii) NFPA 52 The Compressed Natural Gas
Vehicular Fuel Systems, 1992 edition. Cost
$13.00.
(ix) NFPA 59A Production, Storage And Handling
Of Liquefied Natural Gas, 1990 edition. Cost
$18.00.
(3) Compressed Gas Association Standard CGA C7
Guide To The Preparation Of Precautionary Labeling And
Marking Of Compressed Gas Containers, 2000 edition,
which is adopted by reference in these rules and is available
from Global Engineering Documents, 15 Inverness Way
East, Englewood, Colorado, 80112, USA, telephone number:
1-800-854-7179 or via the internet at web-site:
http://global.ihs.com at a cost as of the time of adoption of
these amendments of $294.00
(4) The provisions of 49 C.F.R. Parts 186-199, are
adopted by reference in these rules and are available from
The Superintendent of Documents, P.O. Box 371954,
Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania, 15250-7954, USA, telephone
number: 1-866-512-1800 or via the internet at web-site:
http://bookstore.gpo.gov at a cost as of the time of adoption
of these amendments of $2.00; or at the Michigan
Department of Consumer and Industry Services, MIOSHA
Standards Division, 7150 Harris Drive, P.O. Box 30643,
Lansing, Michigan, 48909-8143.
(5) Michigan Construction Safety Standard Part 22
'Signals, Signs, Tags And Barricades,' being R 480.42201 et
seq. which is referenced in R 408.41861, R 408.41863, R
408.41864, and R 408.41869, is available for inspection and
distribution at no charge from the Michigan Department of
Consumer and Industry Services, MIOSHA Standards
Division, 7150 Harris Drive, P.O. Box 30643, Lansing,
Michigan, 48908-8143, or via the internet at website:
www.michigan.gov/cis
R 408.41836 Definitions; A to C.
Rule 1836. (1) Approved means equipment that has
been listed or approved by a nationally recognized testing
laboratory which issues approvals for the equipment.
(2) Closed container means a container which is
sealed by means of a lid or other device so that neither liquid
nor vapor will escape from it at ordinary temperatures.
(3) Combustible means capable of burning.
(4) Combustible liquid means any liquid that has a
flash point at or above 100 degrees Fahrenheit (37.8 degrees
Celsius) and below 200 degrees Fahrenheit (93.4 degrees
Celsius).
(5) Container in use means a container connected for
use.
R 408.41837 Definitions; F.
Rule 1837. (1) Fire alarm signaling system means an
alerting signal which is clearly audible throughout all areas
and which would immediately alert employees in case of an
emergency.
(2) Fire fighting equipment means any of the
following:
(a) Portable extinguishers.
(b) Fixed fire equipment.
(c) Water barrels and pails.
(d) Standpipes.
(e) Fire hose.
(f) Fire alarms.
(3) Fire protection means to provide fire fighting
equipment, training, and evacuation plans.
(4) Fire resistance means that quality of a material
which renders it so resistant to fire that, for a specified time
and under conditions of a standard heat intensity, the
material will not fail structurally and will not permit the side
away from the fire to become hotter than a specified
temperature. For purposes of this part, fire resistance shall
be determined by the fire test of building construction and
materials, as prescribed in The National Fire Protection
Association Standard NFPA 251, Standard Methods Of Fire
Testing Of Building Construction And Materials, 1990
edition, which is adopted by reference in R 408.41802.
(5) Fixed fire equipment means a fire extinguishing
system that is permanently mounted and portable portions of
a system, such as a hose and nozzle attached to a fixed
supply of extinguishing agent.
(6) Flammable means to ignite easily and burn
intensely or means to have a rapid rate of flame spread.
(7) Flammable liquid means any liquid which has a
flash point below 100 degrees Fahrenheit (37.8 degrees
Celsius) and which has vapor pressure of not more than 40
pounds per square inch (absolute) at 100 degrees Fahrenheit
(37.8 degrees Celsius).
(8) Flash point means the temperature at which a
liquid gives off vapor sufficient to form an ignitable mixture
with air near the surface of the liquid or within the vessel
used, as determined by the following appropriate test
procedure and apparatus:
(a) The flash point of liquids having a viscosity less than
45 Saybolt Universal Second(s) at 100 degrees
Fahrenheit (37.8 degrees Celsius) and a flash point
below 175 degrees Fahrenheit (79.4 degrees
Celsius).
(b) The flash point of liquids having a viscosity of 45
Saybolt Universal Second(s) or more at 175
degrees Fahrenheit (79.4 degrees Celsius).
R 408.41838 Definitions; L to V.
Rule 1838. (1) Liquefied petroleum gas, L.P.G., or
L.P. gas means any material which is composed
predominately of any of the following hydrocarbons or
mixtures of hydrocarbons:
(a) Propane.
(b) Propylene.
(c) Butane.
(d) Isobutene.
(e) Butylene.
(2) Means of egress means a continuous path of
travel from any part within a building to the open air outside
at ground level.
(3) Portable container ---- L.P.G. means a container
designed to be readily moved and transported, either filled or
partially filled. The containers shall have all container
appurtenances protected so that they can be safely handled
as a package.
3
(4) Portable tank----flammable and combustible
liquid means a closed container which is made of metal,
which has a liquid capacity of more than 60 United States
gallons, which is not intended for fixed installation, and which
is designed so that it will safely relieve internal pressure
when exposed to fire.
(5) Safety can means an approved metal or
nonmetallic container which has a capacity of not more than
5 gallons, which has a flash-arresting screen, spring closing
lid and spout cover, and which is designed so that it will
safely relieve internal pressure when exposed to fire.
(6) Temporary building means a structure erected or
placed for a period not longer than the project construction
time.
(7) Temporary heating device means a heating unit to
provide heat for a period not longer than the project
construction time.
(8) Vapor pressure means the pressure, measured in
pounds per square inch (absolute), exerted by a volatile
liquid.
R 408.41841 Employer Responsibility.
Rule 1841. (1) An employer shall be responsible for the
development and maintenance of a fire protection and
prevention program to be followed during all phases of
construction to reduce the chance of fire and injury to
employees.
(2) The fire protection portion of the program shall include
all of the following:
(a) Establishing and maintaining a means of egress
from all areas of the building occupied by
employees to provide free and unobstructed egress
from all parts of the building or structure at all times
when the building or structure is occupied. A lock or
fastening that prevents free escape from the inside
of any building shall not be installed, except in
mental, penal, or corrective institutions where
supervisory personnel is continually on duty and
effective provisions are made to remove occupants
in case of fire or other emergency.
(b) Posting fire rules or, by other means, informing the
employees of the evacuation signal, escape routes,
and emergency phone numbers. Exits shall be
marked by a readily visible sign. Access to exits
shall be marked by readily visible signs in all cases
where the exit or way to reach the exit is not
immediately visible to the occupants.
(c) A requirement that means of egress shall be
continually maintained free of all obstructions or
impediments to full instant use in the case of fire or
other emergency.
(3) The fire prevention portion of the program shall
include both of the following:
(a) A housekeeping policy designed to keep a means of
egress free from the accumulation of stored
materials and debris and to reduce the likelihood of
fire.
(b) A policy for the storage of combustible and
flammable liquids and materials and for the use of
proper heating equipment as prescribed in this part.
(4) Fire fighting equipment shall be provided by the
employer and meet all of the applicable requirements of this
part as to location, accessibility, inspection, testing, and
maintenance. Defective equipment shall be immediately
replaced.
(5) The requirements of this rule may be satisfied by 1
employer who is designated by all of the employers on the
job if an agreement to that effect is reduced to writing and
posted for all employees, employers, and representatives of
the department of consumer and industry services to see.

The agreement shall include authority for the designated
employer to comply with this rule.
(6) An employer shall furnish training to an employee
before the employer assigns an employee to perform
maintenance on a fixed fire system.
(7) An employer shall ensure that fire walls and exit
stairways required for the completed buildings are given
construction priority. Fire doors with automatic closing
devices shall be hung on openings as soon as practicable.
(8) An employer shall retain existing fire separations in
buildings undergoing alterations or demolition until operations
necessitate their removal.
R 408.41842 Employee Emergency Action Plans.
Rule 1842. (1) This rule applies to all emergency action
plans required by a particular MIOSHA or OSHA safety or
health standard. The emergency action plan shall be in
writing, except as provided in subrule (6) of this rule, and
shall cover the designated actions that employers and
employees must take to ensure employee safety from fire
and other emergencies.
(2) All of the following elements, at a minimum, shall be
included in an employee emergency action plan:
(a) Emergency escape procedures and emergency
escape route assignments.
(b) Procedures to be followed by employees who
remain to operate critical plant operations before
they evacuate.
(c) Procedures to account for all employees after
emergency evacuation has been completed.
(d) Rescue and medical duties for those employees
who are to perform them.
(e) The preferred means of reporting fires and other
emergencies.
(f) Names or regular job titles of persons of
departments that can be contacted for further
information or an explanation of duties under the
plan.
(3) An employer shall establish, in the emergency action
plan, the types of evacuation to be used in emergency
circumstances.
(4) Before implementing the emergency action plan, an
employer shall designate and train a sufficient number of
persons to assist in the safe and orderly emergency
evacuation of employees.
(5) An employer shall review the plan at the following
times with each employee who is covered by the plan:
(a) Initially when the plan is developed.
(b) When the employee's responsibilities or designated
actions under the plan change.
(c) When the plan is changed.
(6) Upon initial assignment, an employer shall review,
with each employee, the parts of the plan that an employee
must know to protect the employee in the event of an
emergency. The written plan shall be kept at the workplace
and made available for employee review. For employers that
have 10 or fewer employees, the plan may be communicated
orally to employees and the employer need not maintain a
written plan.
(7) An employer shall provide, as warranted by the
project, a trained and equipped fire fighting organization (fire
brigade) to assure adequate protection to life.
R 408.41850 Training.
Rule 1850. (1) If an employer has provided portable fire
extinguishers for employee use in the workplace, the
employer shall also provide an education program to
familiarize employees with the general principles of fire
4
extinguisher use and the hazards involved with incipient
stage fire fighting.
(2) An employer shall provide the education required in
this rule upon initial employment and at least annually
thereafter.
Selection and Installation.
Rule 1851. (1) All portable fire extinguishers shall bear an
approved label of a nationally recognized testing laboratory.
A fire extinguisher or extinguishing device that contains an
active agent or propellant which has thermal decomposition
products that have a level of vapor toxicity equal to or greater
than any of the following listed materials shall not be used,
installed for use, or allowed to remain installed for use:
(a) Carbon tetrachloride, CCL4.
(b) Chlorobromomethane, CH2 BrCL.
(c) Azeotropic chlormethane, CM7.
(d) Dibromodifluoromethane, CBr2F2.
(e) 1, 2-dibromo-2-chloro-1, 1, 2-trifluoroethane, Cbr-F2,
CBrCLf.
(f) 1, 2-dibromo-2, 2-difluoroethane, CH2BrCbrF2.
(g) Methylbromide, CH3Br.
(h) Ethylene dibromide, CH2BrCH2Br.
(i)
Hydrogen bromide, HBr.
(j)
Methylene bromide, CH2Br2.
(k) Bromodifluoromethane, CHBrF2.
(2) A portable fire extinguisher that has a rating of not
less than 2A shall be provided for each 3,000 square feet of
the protected building area at each floor level and along the
means of egress to facilitate the evacuation of employees,
unless otherwise required by this part. The travel distance to
the nearest fire extinguisher shall be not more than 100 feet.
In multistory buildings, at least 1 fire extinguisher shall be
located adjacent to a stairway.
(3) Fire fighting equipment shall be located where it will
be readily seen and accessible along normal paths of travel
in the protected area.
(4) One 55-gallon open drum of water and 2 fire pails
may be substituted for a fire extinguisher that has a 2A
rating. The water shall be protected from freezing.
(5) A 1/2 inch or larger interior diameter garden hose

which is not more than 100 feet in length and which is
equipped with a nozzle may be substituted for a 2A fire
extinguisher if it is capable of reaching all points in the area
that would be covered by the replaced extinguisher and is
capable of discharging not less than 5 gallons per minute
with a horizontal hose stream of not less than 30 feet. The
hose line shall be mounted on a rack or reel. Not more than
1/2 of the total number of required fire extinguishers may be
replaced by the hose.
(6) In addition to the general requirements of this rule, fire
extinguishers shall be supplied as follows:
(a) Not less than 1 portable fire extinguisher that has a
rating of not less than 20 BC units shall be located
as follows:
(i) Outside of, but not more than 10 feet from, a
door opening to a room used for the storage of
flammable or combustible liquids.
(ii) Not less than 25 feet, nor more than 75 feet,
from an outside storage area.
(iii) On each tank truck or other vehicle used to
transport
or
dispense
flammable
or
combustible liquids.
(b) Each service or fueling area shall have at least 1
portable fire extinguisher which has not less than a
20 BC unit rating and which is located within 75 feet
of each pump, dispenser, underground fill opening,
and lubricating or service area.
(c) Storage locations for liquefied petroleum gas
(L.P.G.) shall be provided with at least 1 approved
portable fire extinguisher that has a rating of not
less than 20 BC.
(d) Each site of a hazardous process shall be provided
with a portable fire extinguisher of an appropriate
size and type. Other means for safety or control
may be provided if approved or required by the
process.
(7) Table 1 may be used in selecting and providing an
extinguisher.
TABLE 1
HAZARD
Class "A" Fire
Class "B" Fire
Class "C" Fire
Class "D" Fire
DESCRIPTION
EXTINGUISHER TYPE AND CONTENTS
Loaded stream, Multipurpose dry chemical, Pressure-operated

water, Water pump tanks, Water mist, Halon 1211.
Flammable Liquids, Gas, Or
Carbon dioxide, Dry chemical, Foam, Loaded stream,
Grease
Multipurpose dry chemical, Halon 1211.
Carbon dioxide with plastic horn only, Dry chemical, Multipurpose
Electrical Equipment
dry chemical, Water mist, Halon 1211.
Extinguishing agent listed for use on a specific combustible metal
Combustible Metal
hazard.
Combustible Material

Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance.
Rule 1852. (1) An extinguisher shall be inspected
monthly, or at more frequent intervals when circumstances
require. Inspections shall check for all of the following:
(a) That the extinguisher is in its designated place.
(b) That the extinguisher has not been actuated or
tampered with.
(c) That the extinguisher does not have obvious
damage, physical damage, external corrosion, or
other impairment.
(2) An extinguisher that shows defects which could

possibly affect its operation shall be removed from service
and given a complete check. An employer shall attach a tag
to an extinguisher or keep a record documenting extinguisher
maintenance or discharge dates and the initials or signature
of the person who performed the service. Records shall be
readable, kept on file or in an electronic system (for example,
bar coding), and shall be available for inspection by a
representative of the department of consumer and industry
services. An employer shall keep a record of extinguisher
maintenance or recharge dates and the initials or signature of
the person who performed the service.
5
(3) An extinguisher shall receive a thorough inspection at
least once a year to ensure operability. An extinguisher that
requires recharging or weighing shall be maintained at least
annually.
(4) An extinguisher that shows evidence of corrosion or
mechanical damage shall be subjected to an approved
hydrostatic test as prescribed in subrule (6) of this rule or
shall be replaced.
(5) An extinguisher shall be given an approved
hydrostatic test every 5 years, except for the following
extinguishers, which shall be tested every 12 year:
(a) A dry chemical extinguisher that has a brazedbrass,
aluminum, or mild steel shell.
(b) An extinguisher that used bromotrifluoromethane.
(c) A dry powder extinguisher that is for metal fires.
The hydrostatic test date shall be recorded on a
suitable metallized decal or on an equally durable
material which has been affixed by a heatless
process to the shell of the extinguisher and which
shows the date of the test, the test pressure, and
the name of the person or agency making the test.
An extinguisher tested after the effective date of this
part shall have a label that will not retain its original
condition when removal from an extinguisher is
attempted. An extinguisher manufactured under the
department of transportation specifications adopted
by reference in subrule (7) of this rule may have the
inspection date and serviceman's or firm's name,
initials, or symbol stamped into the cylinder.
(6) A nitrogen cylinder or other cylinder for inert gas, such

as found on a wheeled extinguisher, shall be hydrostatically
tested at not more than 5-year intervals.
(7) An extinguisher, cylinder, or cartridge which is used
for the storage of a compressed gas and which is
manufactured as prescribed in department of transportation
specifications shall by hydrostatically tested in accordance
with the provisions of C.F.R. 49 Parts 186- 199, which are
adopted by reference in R 408.41802.
(8) The hose and couplings on an extinguisher equipped
with a shutoff nozzle at the outlet end of the hose shall have
a hydrostatic test without the nozzle at the test intervals
prescribed for the unit on which the hose is installed.
(9) A dry chemical and dry powder hose assembly that
requires a hydrostatic test shall be at a test pressure of 300
pounds per square inch for 1 minute.
(10) An extinguisher subjected to an original factory test
pressure of 350 pounds per square inch or more shall be
tested at 75% of the factory test pressure, but not less than
300 pounds per square inch. See table 2.
(11) An extinguisher shall be suitable for use within a
temperature range from plus 40 degrees to plus 120 degrees
Fahrenheit. An extinguisher installed at a location subject to
temperature extremes shall be of a type listed for the
temperature to which it will be exposed or shall be placed in
an enclosure capable of maintaining the temperature.
TABLE 2
HYDROSTATIC TEST PRESSURE REQUIREMENTS -NON-ICC SHELLS
SHELLS NOT SPECIFIED IN UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF
TRANSPORTATION REGULATIONS
(formerly Interstate Commerce Commission)
ORIGINAL FACTORY
TEST PRESSURE
REQUIRES HYDROSTATIC
TEST PRESSURE
400 psi or greater
75% of factory test pressure
350-399 psi below 350 psi
300 psi 75% of factory test pressure
Foam - 500 psi factory test
500
375
Foam - 350 psi factory test
350
300
Stored-pressure or cartridge-operated
water-type, including antifreeze
And loaded stream
400 psi or greater
75% of factory test pressure
350-399 psi below 350
300 psi 75% of factory test pressure
EXTINGUISHER TYPE
All dry chemical
and Dry powder
R 408.41853 Fixed Fire Equipment.

Rule 1853. (1) If the structure being constructed includes
the installation of an automatic sprinkler or standpipe and
hose system, then the installation shall be made during the
construction of each story or section and shall be placed in
service for each story or section that is completed. The
standpipes shall be provided with Siamese fire department
connections which shall be on the outside of the structure, at
street level, conspicuously marked, and free from
obstruction.
(2) During demolition or alterations, an existing sprinkler
or standpipe system shall be maintained in service in any
portion of a structure that is not subject to demolition or
alteration. The operation of a sprinkler control valve shall be
permitted only by a properly authorized person. Modification
of a sprinkler system to permit alterations or additional

demolition shall be expedited so that the automatic protection
may be returned to service as quickly as possible. Sprinkler
control valves shall be checked daily at the close of work to
ascertain whether the protection is in service. When the
sprinkler or standpipe system is out of service for other than
routine maintenance, the local fire department and the
building manager or designated representative shall be
notified. A sign shall be posted on each fire department
connection that is out of service and the balance of the
service shall be tested and resealed in operable condition,
where required, and both the fire department and the building
manager or designated representative shall be advised that
the system is again in service.
6
(3) A standpipe and hose system shall have not less than
1 outlet per story.
(4) An automatic sprinkler system shall be installed and
maintained as prescribed in The National Fire Protection
Association Standards NFPA 13 Installation of Sprinkler
Systems, 1991 edition; NFPA 14 Standard For The
Installation Of Standpipe, Private Hydrants And Hose
Systems, 2000 edition; and NFPA 25 Inspection, Testing,
And Maintenance Of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems,
1998 edition. The standards are adopted by reference in R
408.41802.
R 408.41854 Water Supply.
Rule 1854. (1) A water supply shall be available to
maintain a fire protection system at full rated capacity when
combustible materials are present.
(2) Where an underground water main is to provide water
for fire protection equipment, the main shall be installed,
completed, and made available for use as soon as
practicable.
R 408.41855 Fire Hose and Connections.
Rule 1855. (1) One-hundred feet or less of 1-1/ 2 inch
hose, with a nozzle capable of discharging water at 25
gallons or more per minute supplied from an approved
standpipe system may be substituted for a fire extinguisher
rated not more than 2A in the designated area provided that
the hose line can reach all points in the area.
(2) An approved hose valve shall be provided at each
outlet for attachment of hose.
(3) The employer shall contact the local fire fighting
organization to assure that fire hose connections on the
jobsite are compatible with their fire fighting equipment. If a
connection is not compatible, the employer shall install an
adapter, or equivalent, to permit connection of local fire
fighting equipment.
(4) During demolition involving combustible materials,
charged hose lines, supplied by hydrants, water tank trucks
with pumps, or equivalent, shall be made available.
R 408.41856 Fire Alarms.
Rule 1856. An alarm system shall be established
whereby all employees on the site can be alerted for an
emergency. The signaling device shall be audible throughout
the structure.
R 408.41861 Ignition Hazards.
Rule 1861. (1) Internal combustion engine powered
equipment shall be so located that the exhaust piping is at a
distance away from flammable and combustible materials to
prevent ignition. When the exhaust is piped to outside the
building under construction, a clearance of not less than 6
inches shall be maintained between the piping and
flammable and combustible material.
(2) Smoking shall be prohibited within 25 feet of
flammable material. The area shall be posted with a sign No
Smoking or Open Flame. The sign shall be as prescribed in
the construction safety standard, Part 22 'Signals, Signs,
Tags and Barricades,' being R 408.42201 et seq., which is
referenced in R 408.41802.
(3)
Electrical
wiring
equipment
and
portable
batterypowered lighting equipment used in connection with
the storage, handling, or use of flammable material shall be
of the type approved for the hazardous location.
(4) The nozzle of an air, inert gas, and steam line or
hose, when used in the cleaning or ventilation of tanks and
vessels that contain flammable gases or vapors, shall be
bonded to the tank or vessel shell.
(5) When a hazardous concentration of flammable gas or

vapor exists in the area outside of the tank or vessel, the
external bonding connection shall be made to the tank or
vessel with the non-sparking device. The final bonding
connection shall be made outside the hazardous
concentration.
R 408.41862 Transportation
of
Flammable
and
Combustible Liquids.
Rule 1862. (1) A container used for the transportation of
a flammable and combustible liquid shall be of substantial
construction or be substantially packed so they will not be
readily broken or punctured during transportation or handling.
(2) A container shall be of sound metal or nonmetallic
construction, having a tight closure with a screwed or spring
cover.
(3) A safety can shall be used for the transportation of a
flammable liquid in a quantity greater than 1 gallon, except
that this requirement shall not apply to those flammable liquid
materials which are highly viscid (extremely hard to pour),
which may be stored and transported in original shipping
containers.
(4) Only the original container or a safety can shall be
used for transportation of flammable liquid in quantities of 1
gallon or less.
(5) A container used for the transportation of a flammable
or combustible liquid shall be tightly closed to prevent the
escape of liquid or vapor.
Inside Storage.
Rule 1863. (1) Not more than 25 gallons of flammable or
combustible liquid shall be stored within a room outside of an
approved wood or metal cabinet.
(2) Not more than 60 gallons of flammable liquids or 120
gallons of combustible liquids shall be stored in any 1 storage
cabinet. Not more than 3 such cabinets shall be located in a
single storage area. Quantities of more than 60 gallons of
flammable liquids or 12 gallons of combustible liquids shall
be stored in an inside storage room as prescribed in R
408.41864.
(3) A wood cabinet, when used to store flammable or
combustible liquids, shall have the bottom, back, sides, and
top constructed of not less than 1-inch exterior plywood
which shall not break down or delaminate under fire test
conditions. All joints shall be rabbeted and secured in 2
directions by flathead wood screws. When more than 1 door
is provided, there shall be a rabbeted overlap of not less than
1 inch. Steel hinges shall be mounted so that the holding
capacity is not lost due to loosening or burnout of the screws.
The cabinet shall be painted inside and out with a fireretardant paint.
(4) A cabinet used to store flammable and combustible
liquids shall be labeled with conspicuous lettering,
Flammable----Keep Fire Away, as prescribed in the
construction safety standard, Part 22 'Signals, Signs, Tags
and Barricades,' being R 408.42201 et seq. which is
(5) A flammable or combustible liquid shall not be stored
in a building in an area used as a means of egress.
R 408.41864 Inside Storage Room.
Rule 1864. (1) An inside storage room shall be
constructed to meet the required fire resistance rating for its
use. The construction shall meet the test specifications in
The National Fire Protection Association Standard NFPA 251
Standard Methods of Fire Testing of Building Construction
and Materials, 1990 edition, which is adopted by reference
in R 408.41802.
7
(2) Either an opening from an inside storage room to
another room or building shall be provided with
noncombustible liquid-tight raised sill or ramp not less than 6
inches in height or else the floor in the storage area shall be
not less than 6 inches below the surrounding floor. The
opening shall be provided with an approved self-closing fire
door that is labeled with the words Flammable ---- Keep Fire
Away in conspicuous lettering as prescribed in the
construction safety standard, Part 22 'Signals, Signs, Tags,
and Barricades,' being R 408.42201 et seq. which is
(3) If wood shelving, racks, dunnage, or floor overlay is
used in the room, it shall be not less than 1 inch nominal
thickness.
(4) If another portion of the building or another building is
exposed and a window covers an opening, the window shall
be of a type approved for the hazard exposure.
(5) A material that will react with water to create a fire
hazard shall not be stored in the same room with a
flammable or combustible liquid.
(6) Quantities of flammable and combustible liquids
stored in an inside storage room shall be limited in
accordance with the criteria prescribed in table 3.
(7) Every inside storage room shall be provided with a

mechanical ventilating system and meet all of the following
provisions:
(a) A switch located outside of the door of the inside
storage room shall control the mechanical
exhausting system and any lighting fixtures.
(b) An electric pilot light shall be installed adjacent to
the switch if flammable liquids are dispensed within
the room.
(c) The ventilation system shall commence not more
than 12 inches above the floor and be designed to
provide for a complete change of air within the room
not less than 6 times per hour when flammable and
combustible liquids are stored in the room.
(d) The exhausting outlet from the room shall be on the
exterior of the building in which the room is located
and away from any source of ignition.
(8) An inside storage room shall have at least 1 aisle
which shall be not less than 3 feet in width and which shall be
maintained free of obstructions.
(9) Containers that have more than a 30-gallon capacity
shall not be stacked one upon another.
TABLE 3
INSIDE STORAGE ROOM
Fixed Fire Protection
Provided
Fire Resistance Rating

of Room
Maximum Size
Of Storage Area
Total Allowable Quantities

Gallons/Square Foot/Floor Area
Yes
2 hours
500 square feet
10
No
2 hours
500 square feet
Yes
1 hour
150 square feet
No
1 hour
150 square feet
R 408.41865 Flammables and Combustibles; Outside

Storage.
Rule 1865. (1) Containers of flammable and combustible
liquids with not more than 60 gallons in each container shall
not be stored in excess of 1,100 gallons in any outside
storage area.
(2) Portable tanks stored outside shall not be closer than
20 feet from any building. Two or more portable tanks,
grouped together, having a combined capacity in excess of
2,200 gallons, shall be separated by a 5-foot clear area.
(3) Within 200 feet of each portable tank, there shall be a
12-foot wide access way to permit approach of fire control
apparatus.
(4) A flammable and combustible liquid in an out door
storage area shall be stored not less than 20 feet from a
building.
(5) Within 200 feet of each pile or group of flammable or
combustible containers, a 12-foot wide access way shall be
maintained to permit the approach of fire control equipment.
(6) An outside storage area for flammable and
combustible liquids shall be graded in a manner to divert a
possible spill away from a building or other hazard, or shall
be surrounded by a curb or earth dike not less than 12 inches
high. When a curb or dike is used, provisions shall be made
to drain off accumulations of water or a spill of a flammable
or combustible liquid in such a manner that the spill cannot
create another hazard.
(7) An outside storage area for flammable or combustible

liquid shall be kept free of weeds, papers, debris, and other
combustibles not necessary to the storage.
(8) An above ground tank or loading operation shall not
be installed closer than 25 feet plus 1 inch per 1,000 volts,
measured horizontally, from the center line of electric power
lines, or under an electric power line, except that service
entrance and service lines may be closer than 25 feet but not
over the tanks or loading area. This prohibition shall not
apply to a fuel oil tank with up to a 275-gallon individual
capacity or a 550-gallon aggregate capacity that is used for
heating purposes.
(9) A flammable or combustible liquid outdoor storage
area shall not occupy any area used as a means of egress.
R 408.41866 Emergency Venting of Outside Portable
Tanks.
Rule 1866. A portable tank that has a capacity of 660
gallons or less of flammable or combustible liquid shall be in
compliance with the provisions of chapters III, IV, and V of
The National Fire Protection Association Standard NFPA 30,
Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code, 1996 edition,
which is adopted by reference in R 408.41802. A portable
tank and its piping system that has a capacity of more than
660 gallons of flammable or combustible liquid shall be
designed, constructed, and tested as prescribed in chapters
II and III of The National Fire Protection Association Standard
NFPA 30, Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code, 1996
edition, which is adopted by reference in R 408.41802.
8
Dispensing.
Rule 1867. (1) An area where a flammable or
combustible liquid is transferred at one time, in a quantity of
more than 5 gallons from one tank or container to another
tank or container, shall be separate from other operations or
a building by a distance of 25 feet or by a wall not less than 5
feet high having a fire resistance of not less than 1 hour.
(2) Provisions shall be made to neutralize spills of
flammable and combustible liquids. Natural or mechanical
ventilation shall be capable of maintaining vapor below 10%
of the lower explosive limit.
(3) Transfer of a flammable and combustible liquid from
one container to another shall be done only when the
containers are electrically bonded.
(4) A flammable or combustible liquid shall be transferred
from or drawn into containers by 1 of the following:
(a) Through a closed piping system.
(b) From a safety can.
(c) By a device drawing through the top from a closed
container or portable tank, by gravity or a pump,
through a self-closing valve. Air pressure shall not
be used.
(5) A dispensing device, hose, and nozzle shall be an
approved type and the dispensing unit shall be protected
from collision damage. The nozzle shall be an automatic
closing-type without a latch open device.
Handling At Point Of Use.
Rule 1868. (1) Not more than 1 day's supply, but not to
exceed 25 gallons, of flammable or combustible liquid shall
be permitted to stand outside a cabinet at a place of usage.
(2) A flammable or combustible liquid shall not be used
where there is an open flame or source of ignition within 50
feet of the liquid.
(3) Leakage or spillage of a flammable or combustible
liquid shall be disposed of without creating another hazard.
(4) An open container containing a flammable liquid shall
be equipped with a cover that has a fused link which will
automatically close if the liquid is ignited.
(5) Natural or mechanical ventilation capable of
maintaining the vapor below 10% of the lower explosive limit
shall be provided and used when a flammable liquid is used
or handled.
(6) Flammable liquids shall be kept in closed containers
when not in use.
Service and Refueling Areas.
Rule 1869. (1) A tank truck shall be designed,
constructed, and maintained as prescribed in The National
Fire Protection Association Standard NFPA 385 Standard
For Tank Vehicles For Flammable And Combustible Liquids,
1990 edition, which is adopted by reference in R 408.41802.
(2) An emergency switch that is clearly identified and
accessible shall be available to shut off all power to all
dispensing devices in an emergency and shall be in a
location that is remote from the dispensing device.
(3) Sources of ignition, such as smoking, open flame,
cutting and welding, frictional heat, sparks, and heating
equipment, shall not be permitted within 25 feet in any
direction of where an internal combustion engine is fueled or
where a flammable or combustible liquid is dispensed. A
warning sign shall be posted as prescribed in construction
safety standard Part 22 'Signals, Signs, Tags, and
Barricades,' being R 408.42201 et seq. which is referenced
in R 408.41802. The motor of any equipment being fueled
shall be shut off during the fueling operation.
R 408.41871 Liquefied Petroleum Gas.

Rule 1871. (1) The storage and handling of L.P.G. shall
be as prescribed in The National Fire Protection Association
Standards, NFPA 58 Storage and Handling of Liquefied
Petroleum Gases, 1992 edition; NFPA 52 The Compressed
Natural Gas Vehicular Fuel Systems, 1992 edition; and
NFPA 59A Production, Storage and Handling of Liquefied
Natural Gas, 1990 edition. The standards are adopted by
(2) An employer shall also contact the Michigan
Department Of Environmental Quality, Storage Tank
Division, for additional rules concerning the installation, use,
and storage of liquefied petroleum gases. The Storage Tank
Division can be reached at The Town Center, 333 South
Capital, Lansing, Michigan, 48909-7657 or via website:
www.michigan.gov/deq
R 408.41872 L. P. Pipe, Fittings, and Hose.
Rule 1872. (1) Piping, pipe and tubing fittings, and valves
used to supply utilization equipment within the scope of this
standard shall be acceptable for services as approved by the
manufacture of the equipment.
(2) Pipe shall be wrought iron, steel, brass, or copper.
(3) Aluminum piping or tubing is prohibited.
(4) Fittings shall be steel, brass, copper, malleable iron,
or ductile iron. Cast iron fittings shall not be used.
(5) Tubing shall be steel, brass, or copper.
(6) Hose, hose connections, and flexible connections
shall be fabricated of approved materials resistant to the
action of L. P. gas, both as a liquid and vapor.
(7) Hose, hose connections, and flexible connectors shall
be designed for a working pressure of not less than 350 psig
and shall be as short as practical.
(8) Fittings at pressures higher than container pressures
shall be suitable for a working pressure of 350 psig.
(9) Fittings used at operating pressures over 125 psig
shall be suitable for a working pressure of 250 psig.
(10) Fittings used with vapor at pressure not exceeding
125 psig shall be suitable for a working pressure of 125 pisg.
R 408.41873 L. P. Safety Devices.
Rule 1873. (1) Every container and every vaporizer shall
be provided with 1 or more approved safety relief valves or
devices. These valves shall be arranged to afford free vent to
the outer air with discharge not less than 5 feet away,
horizontally, from any opening into a building which is below
such a discharge.
(2) Shutoff valves shall not be installed between the
safety relief device and the container, or the equipment or
piping to which the safety relief device is connected, except
that a shutoff valve may be used where the arrangement of
this valve is such that the full required capacity flow through
the safety relief device is always afforded.
(3) Container safety relief devices and regulator relief
vents shall be located not less than 5 feet in any direction
from air openings into sealed combustion system appliances
or mechanical ventilation air intakes.
R 408.41874 L. P. Gas Appliances.
Rule 1874. (1) L. P. gas consuming appliances shall be
approved types, which have been manufactured for L. P.
gas, or if an appliance is converted or adapted to L. P. gas
service, the appliance shall be tested for performance by a
knowledgeable employee or outside service before use.
(2) Each system shall have containers, valves,
connectors, manifold valve assemblies, and regulators of an
approved type.
9
R 408.41875 L.P. Containers and Equipment.
Rule 1875. (1) Containers in use shall be in compliance
(a) Each system shall have containers, valves,
connectors, manifold valve assemblies, and
regulators of an approved type.
(b) Containers of more than 2 1/2 pounds water
capacity shall be equipped with a shutoff valve and
excess flow valve.
(c) Valves on containers shall be protected against
physical damage.
(d) Containers that have a water capacity of more than
2 1/2 pounds shall stand on a firm and substantially
level surface. If necessary, the containers shall be
secured in an upright position.
(e) Regulators, if used, shall be suitable for use with
L.P. gas. Manifolds and fittings connecting
containers to pressure regulator inlets shall be
designed for not less than 250 psig service
pressure.
(f) Piping, fittings, and hose shall be in compliance with
R 408.41872.
(g) Filling of fuel containers for trucks or motor vehicles
from bulk storage containers shall be performed not
less than 10 feet from the nearest masonry-walled
building, or not less than 25 feet from the nearest
building or other construction and, in any event, not
less than 25 feet from any building opening.
(h) Filling of portable containers or containers mounted
on skids from storage containers shall be performed
not less than 50 feet from the nearest building.
(i)
The maximum water capacity of individual
containers shall be 245 pounds (nominal 100
pounds L.P. gas capacity).
(j)
All of the following provisions apply to multiple
container systems:
(i) Valves in the assembly of multiple container
systems shall be arranged so that replacement
of containers can be made without shutting off
the flow of gas in the system. This provision
shall not be construed as requiring an
automatic changeover device.
(ii) Heaters shall be equipped with an approved
regulator in the supply line between the fuel
cylinder and the heater unit. Cylinder
connectors shall be provided with an excess
flow valve to minimize the flow of gas in the
event the fuel line becomes ruptured.
(iii) Regulators and low-pressure relief devices
shall be rigidly attached to the cylinder valves,
cylinders, supporting standards, the building
walls, or otherwise rigidly secured, and shall
be so installed or protected from the elements.
(2) Containers may be used in unoccupied portions of a
building during the hours of the day that the public normally is
in the building in accordance with all of the following
provisions:
(a) The maximum water capacity of individual
containers shall be 50 pounds (nominal 20 pounds
L.P. gas capacity) and the number of containers in
the building shall not exceed the number of
workmen assigned to using L.P. gas.
(b) Containers that have a water capacity of more than
2 1/2 pounds (nominal 1 pound L.P. gas capacity)
shall not be left unattended.
(c) During the hours of the day when the building is not
open to the public, containers may be used as
prescribed in subrule (1) of this rule; however,
containers that have a water capacity of more than

2 1/2 pounds shall not be left unattended.
R 408.41876 Piping Liquid or Vapor L.P. Gas Into
Buildings and Structures.
Rule 1876. The piping of liquid or vapor L.P. gas into
buildings that are under construction or major renovation
shall be in compliance with all of the following provisions:
(a) Piping used at pressures higher than container
pressure shall be suitable for a working pressure of
not less than 350 psig.
(b) Liquid piped at container pressure or lower shall be
suitable for a working pressure of not less than 250
psig.
(c) Vapor L.P. gas that has an operating pressure of
more than 125 psig shall be suitable for a working
pressure of not less than 250 psig.
(d) Vapor piped at a pressure of not more than 125 psig
shall be suitable for a working pressure of not less
than 125 psig.
(e) Metallic pipe joints may be threaded, flanged,
welded, or brazed.
(f) Joints shall be made with a material that has a
melting point of 1,000 degrees Fahrenheit.
(g) When joints are threaded or threaded and back
welded for vapors of liquid at pressures of more
than 125 psig, schedule 80 or heavier pipe shall be
used; however, at pressures of less than 125 psig,
schedule 40 or heavier pipe may be used.
(h) Piping, if welded, shall be made with a suitable type
of welding fittings and shall be at least schedule 40
pipe.
(i)
Piping shall not be more than 3/4-inch pipe interior
diameter. Type K or L copper tubing which is in
compliance with section 232 of The National Fire
Protection Association Standard NFPA 58, Storage
And Handling Of Liquefied Petroleum Gases, 1992
edition, which is adopted by reference in R
408.41802, and which has a maximum 3/4-inch pipe
outside diameter may be used.
(j)
Piping shall be securely fastened to walls or other
surfaces, protected against physical damage, and
located to avoid high temperatures.
(k) A shutoff valve shall be located at each branch line
where it leaves the main line. A second shutoff
valve shall be located at the appliance end of the
branch and upstream of any flexible appliance
connector.
(l)
Excess flow valves shall be installed where pipe
size is reduced.
(m) Hydrostatic relief valves shall be installed in liquid
lines between shutoff valves.
(n) All piping and fittings shall be in compliance R
408.41872.
R 408.41877 Storage of Portable Containers.
Rule 1877. (1) This rule applies to the storage of portable
containers whether filled or empty if they have been in
service.
(2) Storage of L.P. gas within buildings is prohibited.
(3) Storage outside of buildings, for containers awaiting
use, shall be located away from the nearest building or group
of buildings as specified in table 4.
10
TABLE 4
QUANTITY OF L.P.
GAS STORED
DISTANCE (FEET) FROM

A BUILDING
500 lbs. or less
501 to 6,000 lbs.
10
6,001 to 10,000 lbs.
20
over 10,000 lbs.
25
(5) Containers shall be stored within a suitable ventilated

enclosure or otherwise protected against tampering, and
located as specified in table 4.
(6) When L.P. gas and 1 or more other gases are stored
or used in the same area, the containers shall be marked to
identify their content. Marking shall be in compliance with
The Compressed Gas Association Standard CGA C7 Guide
To The Preparation Of Precautionary Labeling And Marking
Of Compressed Gas Containers, 2000 edition, which is
adopted by reference in R 408.41802.
R 408.41878 Location of Containers.
Rule 1878. (1) Located as to minimize exposure to
excessive temperature rise, physical damage, or tampering.
(2) Containers having greater than 2 1/ 2 pounds water
capacity shall be positioned so that the safety relief valve is
in direct communication with the vapor space of the
container.
(3) Containers not connected for use shall not be stored
on roofs.
(4) Provisions shall be made to prohibit containers from
falling over the edge of openings or roofs.
(5) Containers with a maximum water capacity of 2 1/ 2
pounds may be used in the buildings as a part of an
approved self-contained torch assembly.
R 408.41879 Container Valve Protection.
Rule 1879. Screw-on-type caps or collars shall be
securely in place on all stored containers regardless of
whether they are full, partially full, or empty and container
outlets shall be closed.
R 408.41881 Temporary Buildings.
Rule 1881. (1) A temporary building shall not be erected
where it will adversely affect a means of egress.
(2) A temporary building erected within another building
shall be constructed of noncombustible material or material
having a fire resistance rating of not less than 1 hour.
(3) A temporary building, except an enclosure used to
house a hoist operator, located outside another building shall
be located not less than 10 feet from a building or structure.
A group of temporary buildings not exceeding 2,000 square
feet in aggregate shall, for the purposes of this part, be
considered a single temporary building.
R 408.41882 Open Yard Storage; Combustible Materials.
Rule 1882. (1) Combustible materials stored in an open
yard shall be in piles not more than 20 feet high and located
not less than 10 feet from a building or structure.
(2) A driveway in combustible material storage area shall
be spaced so that a grid system unit of not more than 50 by
150 feet is produced. A driveway between piles of
combustible material shall be not less than 15 feet wide.
(3) Housekeeping in an open yard storage area shall

include keeping rubbish, weeds, and scrap material picked
up.
(4) Piling of combustible material in an open yard is
prohibited where a danger of underground fire exists.
R 408.41883 Indoor Storage.
Rule 1883. (1) A path of travel to an exit shall not be
blocked by the storage of material.
(2) Incompatible materials shall be separated by a
distance of not less than 50 feet or a barrier having fire
resistance of not less than 1 hour.
(3) Aisle width shall be maintained to safely
accommodate the widest vehicle that may be used within that
part of the structure for fire fighting purposes.
(4) Unless separated by a barrier, a clearance around the
path of travel of a fire door shall be not less than 2 feet.
Material shall not be stored within 36 inches of a fire door
opening.
(5) Material shall be piled in a manner so as to prevent
the spread of fire and to permit access for fire fighting.
(6) A clearance of not less than 3 feet shall be maintained
between stored material and sprinklers.
(7) Clearance shall be maintained around lights and
heating units to prevent ignition of a flammable or
combustible material and liquids.
(8) Materials shall be stored, handled, and piled with due
regard to their fire characteristics.
R 408.41884 Heating Devices.
Rule 1884. (1) A temporary heating device shall not
produce combustion products that will increase the air
contaminants above the maximum allowable limits
established by the occupational health division of the
Michigan department of consumer and industry services.
(2) A heating device, including a temporary heating
device, shall be located at a distance sufficient to prevent
ignition of any material in its proximity or the material shall be
insulated.
(3) A temporary heating device shall not be located less
than 50 feet from a point where a flammable or combustible
liquid is used or dispensed.
(4) A temporary heating device that is set on a
combustible floor shall be separated from the floor by an
insulating material or 1 inch of concrete. The insulating
material shall extend not less than 2 feet beyond the heater
in all directions.
(5) A temporary heating device shall be located not less
than 10 feet from a combustible covering, such as, but not
limited to, canvas or tarpaulins, unless the covering is
fastened to prevent its dislodgement due to wind action.
(6) A temporary heating device using L.P. gas, other than
in an integral heater-container unit, shall be located not less
than 6 feet from any L.P. gas container.
(7) Integral heaters may be used if designed and installed
so as to prevent direct or radiant heat application to the
container.
(8) Blower-and radiant-type units shall not be directed
toward any L.P. gas container that is less than 20 feet away.
(9) If 2 or more heater units are located within the same
unpartitioned area, then the containers of each unit shall be
separated from the containers of any such other unit by not
less than 20 feet.
(10) If containers are manifolded together and serve 1
heater on the same floor, then the total water capacity of the
containers shall not be more than 735 pounds (nominal 300
pounds L.P. gas capacity). If more than 1 such manifold is
used they shall be separated by not less than 20 feet.
11
(11) On floors on which no heaters are connected for use,
containers may be manifolded together if the total water
capacity is not more than 2,450 pounds (nominal 1,000
pounds L.P. gas capacity). Manifolds of more than 735
pounds water capacity shall be separated by not less than 50
feet.
(12) Heating devices, including portable heaters and
salamanders using a liquid flammable fuel such as, but not
limited to, fuel oil or kerosene, shall be equipped with an
approved automatic shutoff safety control device which will,
in the event of flame failure, shut off the flow of fuel to the
main burner and pilot if used. The device shall not be relit
while the combustion chamber is hot.
(13) Portable heaters including salamanders that have
inputs above 50,000 British thermal unit's (B.T.U.) per hour,
shall be equipped with either a pilot, that is lighted and
proved before the main burner can be turned on, or an
electric ignition system, except the provisions of this rule do
not apply to any of the following:
(a) Tar kettles, hand torches, melting pots, or portable
heaters of less than 7,500 British thermal unit's
(B.T.U.), if used with 2 1/2 pound containers.
(b)
Manufactured tent heaters, as utilized by, and in

applications common to, public utilities or
telecommunication companies, with 12,000 British
Thermal Unit's (B.T.U.) input or less, when used
out-of-doors and if constantly attended.
(14) A temporary heating device shall be installed
horizontally level.
(15) A solid fuel salamander shall not be used in a
building or on a scaffold.
(16) L.P. gas containers valves, connectors, regulators
and manifolds, piping, and tubing shall not be used as
structural supports for heaters and shall be located to
minimize exposure to high temperatures or physical damage.
(17) A heating device, including a temporary heating
device, designed for barometric or gravity oil feed shall be
used only with an integral tank.
(18) Heaters specifically designed and approved for use
with separate supply tanks may be connected for gravity
feed, or an automatic pump, from a supply tank.
(19) L.P. containers may be used in buildings for
temporary emergency heating as provided in this rule and the
equipment shall not be left unattended.
TOTAL COPIES PRINTED:

TOTAL PRINTING COST:
TOTAL COST PER COPY:
1,000
8
GUARDING OF
WALKS AND WORKSITE
MIOSHA-STD-1317 (05/06)
5 Pages

DIRECTOR'S OFFICE
Filed with the Secretary of State on January 20, 1982 (as amended March 21, 1983)
(as amended November 15, 1989) (as amended on July 8, 1993) (as amended September 3, 1996)
R 408.42101, R 408.42121, R 408.42122, R 408.42123, R 408.42145, R 408.42150, and R 408.42160 of the
Michigan Administrative Code are effective as of the date of this amendment.
R 408.42131 is added to read as hereinafter set forth.
R 480.42140, R 408.42141, R 408.42142, R 408.42143, R 408.42144, R 408.42146, R 408.42147, R 408.42148, R
408.42151, R 408.42152, R 408.42153, and R 408.42158 are rescinded.
PART 21. GUARDING OF WALKING AND WORKING AREAS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL PROVISIONS ..................................................... 1
R 408.42101 Scope .............................................................. 1
R 408.42121 Definitions; H to N ........................................... 1
R 408.42122 Definitions; P, R............................................... 2
R 408.42123 Definitions; S, W.............................................. 2
R 408.42127 Access to other elevations............................... 2
R 408.42129 Stairways; landings; installation; rise height and
tread depth; metal pan landings and metal pan
treads; guardrail systems required .................. 2
R 408.42130 Training requirements ..................................... 2
R 408.42131 Roof work ........................................................ 2
GENERAL PROVISIONS
R 408.42101 Scope
Rule 2101. This part pertains to the construction and use
of guardrails, stairways, ramps, and runways for the
protection of employees during construction operations. It
also applies to all stairways that are used in the construction,
alteration, repair, including painting and decorating, and
demolition of workplaces and when stairways are required to
be provided.
R 408.42121 Definitions; H to N
Rule 2121. (1) Handrail means a lengthwise member
which is supported by brackets and which is
suspended from a wall or partition on a stairway or
ramp to furnish a handhold.
R 408.42145 Hatchway and chute-floor openings.................2

R 408.42149 Stairways .........................................................3
R 408.42150 Guardrail specifications for scaffolding and
catch platforms.................................................3
R 408.42154 Runway and ramp specifications .....................3
R 408.42155 Specifications for stair rail ................................3
R 408.42156 Handrail specifications .....................................4
R 408.42157 Temporary stairways........................................4
R 408.42159 Maintenance ....................................................5
R 408.42160 Catch platform specifications ...........................5
(2)
Lower levels means those areas to which an

employee can fall from a stairway, including any of
the following:
(a) Ground levels.
(b) Floors.
(c) Roofs
(d) Ramps.
(e) Runways.
(f) Excavations.
(g) Pits.
(h) Tanks.
(i) Material.
(j) Water.
(k) Equipment.
(l) Similar surfaces.
It does not include the surface from which the
employee falls.
2
(3)
Nosing means that portion of a tread projecting

beyond the face of the riser immediately below it.
R 408.42122 Definitions; P, R
Rule 2122. (1) Point of access means all areas used
by employees for work-related passage from one
area or level to another, including all of the
following:
(a) Doorways.
(b) Passageways.
(c) Stairway openings.
(d) Studded walls.
(e) Other permanent or temporary openings used
for work related passage from one area or
level to another.
(2) Ramp means an inclined runway used to allow
employees to move, or allow equipment to be
moved, from one level to another.
(3) Rise means the vertical distance from the top of a
tread to the top of the next higher tread.
(4) Runway, sometimes called a walkway, means a
passageway that is above floor or ground level,
such as a footwalk between 2 structures.
R 408.42123 Definitions; S, W
Rule 2123. (1) Spiral stairway means a series of
steps attached to a vertical pole and progressing
upward in a winding fashion within a cylindrical
space.
(2) Stair platform means a landing that breaks a
continuous run of stairs.
(3) Stair railing means a vertical barrier that is
erected on an exposed side of a stairway to prevent
employees from falling to lower levels. The top
surface of a stair rail system may also be a handrail.
(4) Tread depth means the horizontal distance from
the front to the back of a tread, excluding nosing, if
any.
R 408.42127 Access to other elevations
Rule 2127. (1) A means of access, such as a stairway,
ladder, or ramp, shall be provided at all personnel
points of access where there is a break in elevation
of 19 inches (48cm) or more and a runway, sloped
embankment, or personnel hoist is not provided.
(2) When a building or structure has only 1 point of
access between levels, that point of access shall be
kept clear to permit the free passage of employees.
When work must be performed or equipment must
be used such that the free passage of employees at
that point of access is restricted, a second point of
access shall be provided and used.
(3) When a building or structure has 2 or more points of
access between levels, at least 1 point of access
shall be kept clear to permit the free passage of
employees.
(4) Employees shall not use any spiral stairways that
will not be a permanent part of the structure on
which construction work is being performed.
R 408.42128 Stairway protection systems
Rule 2128. Employers shall provide and install all
stairway fall protection systems required by this part
and shall comply with all other pertinent
requirements of this part before employees begin
the work that necessitates the installation and use of
stairways and their fall protection systems.
R 408.42129 Stairways; landings; installation; rise

height and tread depth; metal pan
landings and metal pan treads; guardrail
systems required
Rule 2129. (1) Stairways that will not be a permanent
part of the structure on which construction work is
being performed shall have landings that are not
less than 30 inches (76cm) in the direction of
travel and extend not less than 22 inches (56cm)
in width at every 12 feet (3.7m) or less of vertical
rise.
(2) Stairs shall be installed between 30 degrees and
50 degrees from horizontal.
(3) Riser height and tread depth shall be uniform
within each flight of stairs, including any
foundation structure used as one tread depth shall
not be more than 1/4 of an inch (0.6cm) in any
stairway system.
(4) Metal pan landings and metal pan treads, when
used, shall be secured in place before filling with
concrete or other material.
(5) Unprotected sides and edges of stairway landings
shall be provided with guardrail systems.
R 408.42130 Training requirements
Rule 2130. (1) An employer shall provide a training
program for each employee who uses stairways,
as necessary. The program shall enable each
employee to recognize hazards related to
stairways and shall train each employee in the
procedures to be followed to minimize these
hazards.
(2) An employer shall ensure that each employee has
been trained by a competent person in the
following areas, as applicable:
(a) The nature of fall hazards in the work area.
(b) The rules contained in this part.
(3) Retraining shall be provided for each employee as
necessary so that the employee maintains the
understanding and knowledge acquired through
compliance with the provisions of this rule.
R 408.42131 Roof work
Rule 2131. (1) An employer working on a high-pitched
roof shall be provided with and use either roofing
brackets and a working plank or a crawling board,
regardless of the ground-to-eave height.
(2) An employer shall protect employees working on a
dome-type roof as prescribed in Part 45. Fall
Protection, being R 408.44501 et seq. of the
(3) The portion of a roof where employees are
working shall be kept free of ice, snow, or other
slippery conditions.
R 408.42145 Hatchway and chute-floor openings
Rule 2145. (1) A hatchway or chute-floor opening that
is less than 39 inches above the floor shall be
guarded by either of the following:
(a) A hinged cover and a fixed guardrail on not
less than 2 sides. When the opening is not in
use, the cover shall be closed or a
removable guardrail shall guard the exposed
side.
(b) A removable guardrail on 2 sides and fixed
guardrail on the other 2 sides. The
removable guardrail shall be kept in place
when the opening is not in use.
3
(2)
When dumping from mechanical equipment or a

wheelbarrow, the exposed edge of the hatchway,
chute opening, or open-sided floor shall be
protected by a bumper. The bumper shall be not
less than 6 inches nominal size and shall be
secured to the floor.
R 408.42149 Stairways
Rule 2149. (1) A stairway shall be equipped with a stair
railing or handrail as follows:
(a) A stairway which is not more than 44 inches
wide and which has enclosed sides shall have
a handrail on the right descending side.
(b) A stairway which is not more than 44 inches
wide and which has 1 open side shall have a
stair railing on the open side.
(c) A stairway which is not more than 44 inches
wide and which has 2 open sides shall have a
stair railing on each side.
(d) A stairway that is more than 44 inches wide
shall have 1 handrail on each enclosed side
and 1 stair rail on each open side.
(e) A stairway that is 88 or more inches wide shall
have 1 handrail on each enclosed side, 1 stair
rail on each open side, and 1 intermediate stair
rail located in the middle of the stairway.
(2) Where a door or gate opens directly on a stairway
more than 6 feet in height and is used as a required
means of egress, a stair landing shall be provided.
The swing of the door shall not reduce the landing
which leads to the stairway to less than 20 inches
unless specified in another code.
(3) Debris and other loose material shall not be
permitted on a stairway.
R 408.42150 Guardrail specifications for scaffolding and
catch platforms
Rule 2150. (1) A guardrail shall consist of a top rail,
intermediate rail, and supporting posts. The top rail
shall have a smooth surface and shall be located
not less than 36, nor more than 42, inches above
the floor, ramp, platform, or runway. The
intermediate rail shall be located halfway between
the top rail and the floor, ramp, platform, or runway.
The top rail shall not overrun the terminal posts
unless such a projection does not constitute a
hazard.
(2) A top rail and its supporting posts shall be
constructed of wood which is not less than 2- by 4inch nominal size with a 1- by 6-inch or 2- by 4inch nominal size intermediate rail. The construction
and fastenings shall produce a guardrail capable of
withstanding a 200-pound capability. A guardrail
that is subject to additional loads shall be
constructed of heavier stock and the supporting post
shall be more closely spaced.
(3) Vertical supporting posts shall be placed not more
than 8 feet apart.
(4) Banding steel shall not be used for guardrail
construction.
(5) Welded resteel members shall not be used for
guardrail construction.
R 408.42154 Runway and ramp specifications
Rule 2154. (1) A ramp or runway that is used
exclusively by employees as a means of access to
or egress from a walking or working surface shall be
in compliance with all of the following provisions:
(2)
(3)
(4)
(a) Be capable of supporting not less than 2

times the maximum intended load.
(b) Consist of a minimum of two 2-inch by 10inch nominal size planks placed side by side
or other material of equal width that provides
equivalent strength if guardrails are not
required.
(c) Consist of a minimum of three 2-inch by 10inch nominal size planks placed side by side
equivalent strength if guardrails are required.
(d) Not be constructed steeper than the ratio of
1 foot of vertical rise to 2 feet of horizontal
run.
(e) Have a slip-resistant surface or have cleats
which are not more than 2 inches by 4
inches nominal size and which are uniformly
spaced not more than 24 inches apart.
(f) Be constructed to avoid excessive deflection
and springing action.
(g) Be secured at each end to prevent
displacement.
(h) Not be used for the storage of materials or
equipment.
(i) Be maintained free of debris, other loose
materials, and slip or trip hazards.
A ramp or runway used by employees with
wheelbarrows shall be in compliance with both of
the following provisions:
(a) Be constructed and used as prescribed in
subrule (1)(a), (d), (e), (f), (g), (h), and (i) of
this rule.
(b) Consist of three 2-inch by 10-inch nominal
size planks placed side by side or other
material of equal width that provides
equivalent strength.
A ramp or runway used by concrete buggies, fork
lift trucks, or other motorized material handling
equipment shall be in compliance with all of the
(a) Be capable of supporting not less than 4
times the maximum intended load.
(b) Be not less than 5 feet wide.
(c) Be constructed and used as prescribed in
subrule (1)(a), (d), (f), (g), (h), and (i) of this
rule.
A ramp or runway constructed of 2 or more planks
placed side by side shall have the planks securely
fastened together.
R 408.42155 Specifications for stair rail

Rule 2155. (1) A stair railing shall consist of a stair
rail, a vertical support, and an intermediate rail or
its equivalent to prevent an employee from falling
through the opening between the stair rail and the
stairs. The stair rail shall parallel the slope of the
stairway.
(2) A stair rail shall be smooth, made of 2- by 4-inch
nominal-sized lumber, and constructed in a
manner to withstand a side thrust of not less than
200 pounds. The height of a stair rail shall be as
follows:
(a) A stair rail that is installed after March 15,
1991, shall be not less than 36 inches
(91.5cm) from the upper surface of the stair
rail system to the surface of the tread and in
line with the face of the riser at the forward
edge of the tread.
4
(b) A stair rail that is installed before March 15,
1991, shall be not less than 30 inches (76cm)
nor more than 34 inches (86cm) from the
upper surface of the stair rail system to the
surface of the tread and in line with the face of
the riser at the forward edge of the tread.
(3) The vertical post shall be constructed of not less
than 2- by 4-inch nominal-sized lumber and shall be
spaced not more than 6 feet apart.
(4) An intermediate rail or midrail shall be constructed
of not less than 1- by 6-inch or 2- by 4-inch
nominal-sized lumber and shall be installed midway
between the stair rail and the treads.
(5) Screens, mesh, intermediate vertical members, or
equivalent intermediate structural members shall be
provided between the top rail of the stair rail system
and the stairway steps.
(6) Screens or mesh, when used, shall extend from the
top rail to the stairway step and along the entire
opening between the top rail supports.
(7) When intermediate vertical members, such as
balusters, are used between posts, they shall be not
more than 19 inches (48cm) apart.
(8) Other structural members, when used, shall be
installed such that there are no openings in the stair
rail system that are more than 19 inches (48cm)
wide.
(9) A stair rail shall not have protruding nails or rough or
sharp corners and shall not constitute a projection
hazard.
(10) Other material may be used if the stair railing meets
the 200-pound side thrust requirement.
(11) A stairway that has 4 or more risers or rises more
than 30 inches (76cm), whichever is less, shall be
equipped with at least 1 handrail and at least 1 stair
rail system along each unprotected side or edge.
When the top edge of a stair rail system also serves
as a handrail, the provisions of R 408.42156(3) of
these rules apply.
(12) Winding and spiral stairways shall be equipped with
a handrail that is sufficiently offset to prevent
walking on those portions of the stairways where the
tread width is less than 6 inches (15cm).
R 408.42156 Handrail specifications
Rule 2156. (1) A handrail shall be of a configuration that
provides a handhold when grasped to avoid a fall
and shall follow the slope of the stairway.
(2) A handrail shall be vertically installed not more than
37, nor less than 30, inches above the front edge of
the treads.
(3) When the top edge of a stair rail system also serves
as a handrail, the height of the top edge shall be not
more than 37 inches (94cm) nor less than 36 inches
(91.5cm) from the upper surface of the stair rail
system to the surface of the tread and in line with
the face of the riser at the forward edge of the tread.
(4) A handrail shall be supported by brackets to a
distance of not less than 1 1/2 inches from any
object. The assembly of handrail and brackets shall
withstand a load of not less than 200 pounds
applied in any direction.
(5) A handrail shall have a smooth surface along the
top and sides and the ends shall not present a
projection hazard.
(6) Handrails that will not be a permanent part of the
structure being built shall have a minimum
(7)
clearance of 3 inches (3cm) between the handrail

and walls, stair rail systems, and other objects.
The ends of stair rail systems and handrails shall
be constructed so as not to constitute a projection
hazard.
R 408.42157 Temporary stairways

Rule 2157. (1) All wooden components that are
necessary to construct and guard a temporary
stairway shall be of construction-grade lumber.
(2) The minimum size of stringers shall be 2 by 8
inches unless notched. If notched, the stringers
shall have a plate or equivalent means which
provides the same strength that an uncut 2-inch
by 8-inch stringer provides.
(3) The minimum width of a temporary stairway shall
be 22 inches.
(4) Each tread shall rest on 2-inch by 4-inch cleats or
be notched into the stringer, to provide a bearing
surface for the full width of the tread.
(5) For a temporary stairway between 22 and 36
inches wide, a minimum of a 2-inch by 6-inch
plank shall be used for a tread.
(6) For a temporary stairway between 36 and 54
inches wide, a minimum of a 2-inch by 8-inch
plank shall be used for a tread.
(7) For a temporary stairway over 54 inches wide, a
2-inch by 10-inch plank shall be used for a tread.
(8) If the width of a temporary stairway is more than
88 inches, an additional notched stringer shall be
provided at the middle of the stairway.
(9) The total vertical rise of a temporary stairway shall
not be more than 12 feet, unless stair platforms
are provided.
(10) The rise shall be not less than 6 inches nor more
than 8 inches.
(11) The ratio of rise to tread width shall be uniform for
all sets of stairs.
(12) Each tread shall be constructed and maintained of
solid, 1-piece lumber and repairs shall be made
with solid 1-piece lumber.
(13) The sides of a temporary stairway shall be
guarded as required by the provisions of
R 408.42155 and R 408.42156, except that a
stairway used as access to material storage
trailers is required to be guarded on only 1 side.
(14) If used during construction, permanent steel or
other metal stairways and landings with hollow
pan-type treads that are to be filled with concrete
or other materials shall be filled to the level of the
nosing with solid material. This requirement shall
not apply during the period of actual construction
of the stairways. Metal landings shall be secured
in place before filling. Such temporary treads and
landings shall be replaced when worn below the
level of the top edge of the pan.
(15) A stairway shall be free of hazardous projections,
such as nails, sharp top rails, and handrail
projections.
(16) A stairway shall have a minimum vertical
clearance of 7 feet from any overhead object,
unless the overhead object is padded and caution
signs or paint is used on the object, as prescribed
in Part 22. Signals, Signs, Tags, and Barricades,
(17) Except during stairway construction, foot traffic is
prohibited on skeleton metal stairs where
5
permanent treads or landings are to be installed at a
later date, unless the stairs are fitted with secured
temporary treads and landings long enough to cover
the entire tread or landing area.
(18) Treads for temporary service shall be made of wood
or other solid material and shall be installed the full
width and depth of the stair.
R 408.42159 Maintenance
Rule 2159. (1) A floor, platform, stair tread, or landing
shall be maintained free of tripping or slipping
hazards.
(2) Material used to repair floors, platforms, stair treads,
or landings shall meet the design strength of the
original component.
(3) A floor, platform, stair, runway, or ramp shall be free
of hazardous projections.
R 408.42160 Catch platform specifications

Rule 2160. If a catch platform is installed as a means of
fall protection for an employee or employees
working on a roof, the catch platform shall be in
compliance with all of the following provisions:
(a) Consist of a minimum of three 2-inch by 10inch nominal size planks placed side by side
equal strength.
(b) Be installed a maximum of 18 inches
beneath the eave line of the roof.
(c) Have a guardrail that meets the
requirements of R 408.42150 installed on the
outer exposed edge and each end. An
additional intermediate rail, solid material, or
a screen shall be installed between the catch
platform and the midrail.
Michigan Occupational Safety and Health Administration

PO Box 30643
Lansing, Michigan 48909-8143
Ph: 517.322.1814
Fx: 517.322.1775
The Department of Labor & Economic Growth will not discriminate against
any individual or group because of race, sex, religion, age, national origin,
color, marital status, disability, or political beliefs. If you need assistance
with reading, writing, hearing, etc., under the Americans with Disabilities
Act, you may make your needs known to this agency.
9
FALL PROTECTION
MIOSHA-STD-1326 (02/07)
30 Pages

DIRECTORS OFFICE
Filed with the Secretary of State on September 3, 1996
(By authority conferred on the director of the department of consumer and industry services by sections 19 and 21 of Act
154 of the Public Acts of 1974, as amended, and Executive Reorganization Order No. 1996-2, being 408.1019 and
408.1021, and 445.2001 of the Michigan Compiled Laws)
PART 45. FALL PROTECTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
R 408.44501 Scope .........................................................1
R 408.44502 Adoption by reference of federal standard ..2
1926.500 Fall Protection ..................................................2
(a) Scope and application ................................................2
(b) Definitions ...................................................................2
1926.501 Duty to have fall protection ...............................4
(a) General .......................................................................4
(b) Unprotected sides and edges......................................4
(c) Protection from falling objects .....................................6
1926.502 Fall protection systems criteria and practices ...6
(a) General .......................................................................6
(b) Guardrail systems........................................................6
(c) Safety net systems ......................................................7
(d) Personal fall arrest systems ........................................7
(e) Positioning device systems..........................................9
R 408.44501 Scope.
Rule 4501. (1) This part sets forth the minimum
requirements and criteria for fall protection in construction
workplaces, their applications, and definitions that are
applicable to these rules.
(2) These rules do not apply where an employee is
making an inspection, an investigation, or an assessment
of workplace conditions before the actual start of
construction work or after all construction work has been
completed.
(3) The provisions of 29 C.F.R. 1926.501 are
adopted by reference in these rules. The provisions set
forth the workplaces, conditions, operations, and
circumstances for which fall protection is required, except
for the following modifications:
(a) The specifications for fall protection requirements
for an employee working on a scaffold are
contained in construction safety standard Part 12.
Scaffolds, being R 408.41201 et seq. of the
Page
(f) Warning line systems................................................... 9
(g) Controlled access zones .......................................... 10
(h) Safety monitoring systems........................................ 10
(i) Covers........................................................................ 11
(j) Protection from falling objects .................................... 11
(k) Fall protection plan.................................................... 11
1926.503 Training Requirements .................................. 12
(a) Training program ...................................................... 12
(b) Certification of training ............................................. 12
(c) Retraining ................................................................. 12
Appendix A Determining Roof Widths .......................... 12
Appendix B Guardrail Systems ..................................... 14
Appendix C Personal Fall Arrest Systems ................... 14
Appendix D Positioning Device Systems ...................... 19
Appendix E Sample Fall Protection Plan ..................... 19
(b) The specifications for fall protection requirements

for an employee working on certain types of
cranes and derricks are contained in construction
safety standards Part 10. Lifting and Digging,
being R 408.41001a, of the Michigan
Administrative Code, and Part 32. Aerial Lift
Platforms, being R 408.43201 et seq. of the
(c) The specifications for fall protection requirements
for an employee performing steel erection work on
buildings are contained in construction safety
standard Part 26. Steel and Precast Erection,
(d) The specifications for fall protection requirements
for an employee working on certain types of
equipment used in tunneling operations are
Tunnels, Shafts, Cofferdams, and Caissons, being
R 408.41401 et seq. of the Michigan
2
(e) The specifications for fall protection requirements
for an employee engaged in the construction of
electric transmission and distribution lines and
equipment are contained in construction safety
standard Part 16. Power Transmission and
Distribution, being R 408.41601 et seq. of the
(f) The specifications for fall protection requirements
for an employee working on stairways and ladders
are contained in construction safety standard Part
11. Fixed and Portable Ladders, being 408.41101
et seq. of the Michigan Administrative Code.
adopted in these rules by reference. The provisions of 29
C.F.R. 1926.502 set forth the requirements for the
installation, construction, and proper use of fall protection,
except for the following modifications:
(a) The performance requirements for a guardrail
system and for the performance requirements for
falling object protection used on scaffolds are
Scaffolds, being R 408.41201 et seq. of the
(b) The performance requirements for stairways, stair
rail systems, and handrails are contained in
construction safety standards Part 11. Fixed and
Portable Ladders and Part 21. Guarding of
Walking and Working Areas, being R 408.41101
and R 408.42101 et seq., respectively, of the
(c) Additional performance requirements for personal
climbing equipment, linemans body belts, safety
straps, and lanyards are contained in construction
safety standard Part 6. Personal Protective
Equipment, being R 408.10601 et seq. of the
adopted by reference in these rules. The provisions of 29
C.F.R. 1926.503 set forth the requirements for training in
the installation and use of fall protection systems.
R 408.44502. Adoption by reference of federal
standard.
Rule 4502. The provisions of 29 C.F.R. 1926.500
through 1926.503 are adopted in these rules by reference.
The adopted regulations are available from the United
States Department of Labor, 801 South Waverly, Room
306, Lansing, Michigan 48917, or from the Michigan
Standards Division, 7150 Harris Drive, Box 30643,
Lansing, MI 48909, at no charge as of the time of adoption
of these rules.
1926.500 Fall Protection.
(a) Scope and application. (1) This subpart sets
forth requirements and criteria for fall protection in
construction workplaces covered under 29 CFR Part 1926.
Exception: The provisions of this subpart do not apply
when employees are making an inspection, investigation,
or assessment of workplace conditions prior to the actual
start of construction work or after all construction work has
been completed.
(2) Section 1926.501 sets forth those workplaces,
conditions, operations, and circumstances for which fall
protection shall be provided except as follows:
(i) Requirements relating to fall protection for
employees working on scaffolds are provided
in subpart L of this part.
(ii) Requirements relating to fall protection for
employees working on certain cranes and
derricks are provided in subpart N of this part.
(iii) Requirements relating to fall protection for
employees performing steel erection work in
buildings are provided in subpart R of this
part.
(iv) Requirements relating to fall protection for
employees working on certain types of
equipment used in tunneling operations are
provided in subpart S of this part.
(v) Requirements relating to fall protection for
employees engaged in the construction of
electric transmission and distribution lines
and equipment are provided in subpart V of
this part.
(vi) Requirements relating to fall protection for
employees working on stairways and ladders
are provided in subpart X of this part.
(3) Section 1926.502 sets forth the requirements for
the installation, construction, and proper use of fall
protection required by part 1926, except as follows:
(i) Performance requirements for guardrail
systems used on scaffolds and performance
requirements for falling object protection used
on scaffolds are provided in subpart L of this
part.
(ii) Performance requirements for stairways,
stairrail systems, and handrails are provided
in subpart X of this part.
(iii) Additional performance requirements for
personal climbing equipment, linemans body
belts, safety straps, and lanyards are
provided in Subpart V of this part.
(4) Section 1926.503 sets forth requirements for
training in the installation and use of fall protection
systems.
(b) Definitions.
Anchorage means a secure point of attachment for
lifelines, lanyards or deceleration devices.
Body belt (safety belt) means a strap with means
both for securing it about the waist and for attaching it to a
lanyard, lifeline, or deceleration device.
Body harness means straps which may be secured
about the employee in a manner that will distribute the fall
arrest forces over at least the thighs, pelvis, waist, chest
and shoulders with means for attaching it to other
components of a personal fall arrest system.
Buckle means any device for holding the body belt or
body harness closed around the employees body.
Connector means a device which is used to couple
(connect) parts of the personal fall arrest system and
positioning device systems together. It may be an
3
independent component of the system, such as a
carabiner, or it may be an integral component of part of the
system (such as a buckle or dee-ring sewn into a body belt
or body harness, or a snap-hook spliced or sewn to a
lanyard or self-retracting lanyard).
Controlled access zone (CAZ) means an area in
which certain work (e.g., overhand bricklaying) may take
place without the use of guardrail systems, personal fall
arrest systems, or safety net systems and access to the
zone is controlled.
Dangerous equipment means equipment (such as
pickling or galvanizing tanks, degreasing units, machinery,
electrical equipment, and other units) which, as a result of
form or function, may be hazardous to employees who fall
onto or into such equipment.
Deceleration device means any mechanism, such
as a rope grab, rip-stitch lanyard, specially-woven lanyard,
tearing or deforming lanyards, automatic selfretracting
lifelines/lanyards, etc., which serves to dissipate a
substantial amount of energy during a fall arrest, or
otherwise limit the energy imposed on an employee during
fall arrest.
Deceleration distance means the additional vertical
distance a falling employee travels, excluding lifeline
elongation and free fall distance, before stopping, from the
point at which the deceleration device begins to operate. It
is measured as the distance between the location of an
employees body belt or body harness attachment point at
the moment of activation (at the onset of fall arrest forces)
of the deceleration device during a fall, and the location of
that attachment point after the employee comes to a full
stop.
Equivalent means alternative designs, materials, or
methods to protect against a hazard which the employer
can demonstrate will provide an equal or greater degree of
safety for employees than the methods, materials or
designs specified in the standard.
Failure means load refusal, breakage, or separation
of component parts. Load refusal is the point where the
ultimate strength is exceeded.
Free fall means the act of falling before a personal
fall arrest system begins to apply force to arrest the fall.
Free fall distance means the vertical displacement of
the fall arrest attachment point on the employees body belt
or body harness between onset of the fall and just before
the system begins to apply force to arrest the fall. This
distance
excludes
deceleration
distance,
and
lifeline/lanyard elongation, but includes any deceleration
device slide distance or self-retracting lifeline/lanyard
extension before they operate and fall arrest forces occur.
Guardrail system means a barrier erected to prevent
employees from falling to lower levels.
Hole means a gap or void 2 inches (5.1 cm) or more
in its least dimension, in a floor, roof, or other
walking/working surface.
Infeasible means that it is impossible to perform the
construction work using a conventional fall protection
system (i.e., guardrail system, safety net system, or
personal fall arrest system) or that it is technologically
impossible to use any one of these systems to provide fall
protection.
Lanyard means a flexible line of rope, wire rope, or

strap which generally has a connector at each end for
connecting the body belt or body harness to a deceleration
device, lifeline, or anchorage.
Leading edge means the edge of a floor, roof, or
formwork for a floor or other walking/working surface (such
as the deck) which changes locations as additional floor,
roof, decking, or formwork sections are placed, formed, or
constructed. A leading edge is considered to be an
unprotected side and edge during periods when it is not
actively and continuously under construction.
Lifeline means a component consisting of a flexible
line for connection to an anchorage at one end to hang
vertically (vertical lifeline), or for connection to anchorages
at both ends to stretch horizontally (horizontal lifeline), and
which serves as a means for connecting other components
of a personal fall arrest system to the anchorage.
Low-slope roof means a roof having a slope less
than or equal to 4 in 12 (vertical to horizontal).
Lower levels means those areas or surfaces to
which an employee can fall. Such areas or surfaces
include, but are not limited to, ground levels, floors,
platforms, ramps, runways, excavations, pits, tanks,
material, water, equipment, structures, or portions thereof.
Mechanical equipment means all motor or human
propelled wheeled equipment used for roofing work, except
wheelbarrows and mopcarts.
Opening means a gap or void 30 inches (76 cm) or
more high and 18 inches (48 cm) or more wide, in a wall or
partition, through which employees can fall to a lower level.
Overhand bricklaying and related work means the
process of laying bricks and masonry units such that the
surface of the wall to be jointed is on the opposite side of
the wall from the mason, requiring the mason to lean over
the wall to complete the work. Related work includes
mason tending and electrical installation incorporated into
the brick wall during the overhand bricklaying process.
Personal fall arrest system means a system used to
arrest an employee in a fall from a working level. It consists
of an anchorage, connectors, a body belt or body harness
and may include a lanyard, deceleration device, lifeline, or
suitable combinations of these. As of January 1, 1998, the
use of a body belt for fall arrest is prohibited.
Positioning device system means a body belt or
body harness system rigged to allow an employee to be
supported on an elevated vertical surface, such as a wall,
and work with both hands free while leaning.
Rope grab means a deceleration device which
travels on a lifeline and automatically, by friction, engages
the lifeline and locks so as to arrest the fall of an employee.
A rope grab usually employs the principle of inertial locking,
cam/level locking, or both.
Roof means the exterior surface on the top of a
building. This does not include floors or formwork which,
because a building has not been completed, temporarily
become the top surface of a building.
Roofing work means the hoisting, storage,
application, and removal of roofing materials and
equipment, including related insulation, sheet metal, and
vapor barrier work, but not including the construction of the
roof deck.
4
Safety-monitoring system means a safety system in
which a competent person is responsible for recognizing
and warning employees of fall hazards.
Self-retracting lifeline/lanyard means a deceleration
device containing a drum-wound line which can be slowly
extracted from, or retracted onto, the drum under slight
tension during normal employee movement, and which,
after onset of a fall, automatically locks the drum and
arrests the fall.
Snaphook means a connector comprised of a
hookshaped member with a normally closed keeper, or
similar arrangement, which may be opened to permit the
hook to receive an object and, when released,
automatically closes to retain the object. Snaphooks are
generally one of two types:
(1) The locking type with a self-closing, self-locking
keeper which remains closed and locked until
unlocked and pressed open for connection or
disconnection; or
(2) The non-locking type with a self-closing keeper
which remains closed until pressed open for
connection or disconnection. As of January 1,
1998, the use of a non-locking snaphook as part of
personal fall arrest systems and positioning device
systems is prohibited.
Steep roof means a roof having a slope greater than
4 in 12 (vertical to horizontal).
Toeboard means a low protective barrier that will
prevent the fall of materials and equipment to lower levels
and provide protection from falls for personnel.
Unprotected sides and edges means any side or
edge (except at entrances to points of access) of a
walking/working surface, e.g., floor, roof, ramp, or runway
where there is no wall or guardrail system at least 39
inches (1.0 m) high.
Walking/working surface means any surface,
whether horizontal or vertical on which an employee walks
or works, including, but not limited to, floors, roofs, ramps,
bridges, runways, formwork and concrete reinforcing steel
but not including ladders, vehicles, or trailers, on which
employees must be located in order to perform their job
duties.
Warning line system means a barrier erected on a
roof to warn employees that they are approaching an
unprotected roof side or edge without the use of guardrail,
body belt, or safety net systems to protect employees in the
area.
Work area means that portion of a walking/working
surface where job duties are being performed.
*[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6. 1979, as
amended at 45 FR 75625, Nov. 14, 1980; 55 FR 47687,
Nov. 14, 1990; 59 FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994; 60 FR 5131,
Jan. 26, 1995]
1926.501 Duty to have fall protection.
(a) General. (1) This section sets forth requirements
for employers to provide fall protection systems. All fall
protection required by this section shall conform to the
criteria set forth in 1926.502 of this subpart.
(2) The employer shall determine if the

walking/working surfaces on which its employees
are to work have the strength and structural
integrity to support employees safely. Employees
shall be allowed to work on those surfaces only
when the surfaces have the requisite strength and
structural integrity.
(b)(1) Unprotected sides and edges. Each
employee on a walking/working surface (horizontal and
vertical surface) with an unprotected side or edge which is
6 feet (1.8 m) or more above a lower level shall be
protected from falling by the use of guardrail systems,
safety net systems, or personal fall arrest systems.
(2) Leading Edges. (i) Each employee who is
constructing a leading edge 6 feet (1.8 m) or more
above lower levels shall be protected from falling
by guardrail systems, safety net systems, or
personal fall arrest systems. Exception: When the
employer can demonstrate that it is infeasible or
creates a greater hazard to use these systems, the
employer shall develop and implement a fall
protection plan which meets the requirements of
paragraph (k) of 1926.502.
Note: There is a presumption that it is feasible and will
not create a greater hazard to implement at least
one of the above-listed fall protection systems.
Accordingly, the employer has the burden of
establishing that it is appropriate to implement a
fall protection plan which complies with
1926.502(k) for a particular workplace situation, in
lieu of implementing any of those systems.
(ii) Each employee on a walking/working surface
6 feet (1.8 m) or more above a lower level
where leading edges are under construction,
but who is not engaged in the leading edge
work, shall be protected from falling by a
guardrail system, safety net system, or
personal fall arrest system. If a guardrail
system is chosen to provide the fall
protection, and a controlled access zone has
already been established for leading edge
work, the control line may be used in lieu of a
guardrail along the edge that parallels the
leading edge.
(3) Hoist areas. Each employee in a hoist area
shall be protected from falling 6 feet (1.8 m) or
more to lower levels by guardrail systems or
personal fall arrest systems. If guardrail systems,
[or chain, gate, or guardrail] or portions thereof,
are removed to facilitate the hoisting operation
(e.g., during landing of materials), and an
employee must lean through the access opening
or out over the edge of the access opening (to
receive or guide equipment and materials, for
example), that employee shall be protected from
fall hazards by a personal fall arrest system.
(4) Holes. (i) Each employee on walking/working
surfaces shall be protected from falling through
holes (including skylights) more than 6 feet (1.8 m)
above lower levels, by personal fall arrest systems,
5
covers, or guardrail systems erected around such
holes.
(ii) Each employee on a walking/working surface
shall be protected from tripping in or stepping
into or through holes (including skylights) by
covers.
(iii) Each employee on a walking/working surface
shall be protected from objects falling through
holes (including skylights) by covers.
(5) Formwork and reinforcing steel. Each
employee on the face of formwork or reinforcing
steel shall be protected from falling 6 feet (1.8 m)
or more to lower levels by personal fall arrest
systems, safety net systems, or positioning device
systems.
(6) Ramps, runways, and other walkways. Each
employee on ramps, runways, and other walkways
shall be protected from falling 6 feet (1.8 m) or
more to lower levels by guardrail systems.
(7) Excavations. (i) Each employee at the edge of
an excavation 6 feet (1.8 m) or more in depth shall
be protected from falling by guardrail systems,
fences, or barricades when the excavations are
not readily seen because of plant growth or other
visual barrier;
(ii) Each employee at the edge of a well, pit,
shaft, and similar excavation 6 feet (1.8 m) or
more in depth shall be protected from falling
by guardrail systems, fences, barricades, or
covers.
(8) Dangerous equipment. (i) Each employee less
than 6 feet (1.8 m) above dangerous equipment
shall be protected from falling into or onto the
dangerous equipment by guardrail systems or by
equipment guards.
(ii) Each employee 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above
dangerous equipment shall be protected from
fall hazards by guardrail systems, personal
fall arrest systems, or safety net systems.
(9) Overhand bricklaying and related work. (i)
Except as otherwise provided in paragraph (b) of
this section, each employee performing overhand
bricklaying and related work 6 feet (1.8 m) or more
above lower levels, shall be protected from falling
by guardrail systems, safety net systems, personal
fall arrest systems, or shall work in a controlled
access zone.
(ii) Each employee reaching more than 10
inches (25 cm) below the level of the
walking/working surface on which they are
working, shall be protected from falling by a
guardrail system, safety net system, or
personal fall arrest system.
Note:
Bricklaying operations performed on scaffolds
are regulated by subpart L Scaffolds of this
part.
(10) Roofing work on low-slope roofs. Except as
otherwise provided in paragraph (b) of this section,
each employee engaged in roofing activities on
low-slope roofs, with unprotected sides and edges
6 feet (1.8 m) or more above lower levels shall be
(11)
(12)
Note:
(13)
Note:
(14)
protected from falling by guardrail systems, safety

net systems, personal fall arrest systems, or a
combination of warning line system and guardrail
system, warning line system and safety net
system, or warning line system and personal fall
arrest system, or warning line system and safety
monitoring system. Or, on roofs 50-feet (15.25 m)
or less in width (see Appendix A to subpart M of
this part), the use of a safety monitoring system
alone [i.e. without the warning line system] is
permitted.
Steep roofs. Each employee on a steep roof
with unprotected sides and edges 6 feet (1.8 m) or
more above lower levels shall be protected from
falling by guardrail systems with toeboards, safety
net systems, or personal fall arrest systems.
Precast concrete erection. Each employee
engaged in the erection of precast concrete
members (including, but not limited to the erection
of wall panels, columns, beams, and floor and roof
tees) and related operations such as grouting of
precast concrete members, who is 6 feet (1.8 m)
or more above lower levels shall be protected from
falling by guardrail systems, safety net systems, or
personal fall arrest systems, unless another
provision in paragraph (b) of this section provides
for an alternative fall protection measure.
Exception: When the employer can demonstrate
that it is infeasible or creates a greater hazard to
use these systems, the employer shall develop
and implement a fall protection plan which meets
the requirements of paragraph (k) of 1926.502.
There is a presumption that it is feasible and will
Residential construction. Each employee
engaged in residential construction activities 6 feet
(1.8 m) or more above lower levels shall be
protected by guardrail systems, safety net
systems, or personal fall arrest system unless
another provision in paragraph (b) of this section
provides for an alternative fall protection measure.
Exception: When the employer can demonstrate
that it is infeasible or creates a greater hazard to
use these systems, the employer shall develop
and implement a fall protection plan which meets
the requirements of paragraph (k) of 1926.502.
There is a presumption that it is feasible and will
Wall openings. Each employee working on, at,
6
above, or near wall openings (including those with
chutes attached) where the outside bottom edge of
the wall opening is 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above
lower levels and the inside bottom edge of the wall
opening is less than 39 inches (1.0 m) above the
walking/working surface, shall be protected from
falling by the use of a guardrail system, a safety
net system, or a personal fall arrest system.
(15) Walking/working surfaces not otherwise
addressed. Except as provided in 1926.500(a)(2)
or in 1926.501 (b)(1) through (b)(14), each
employee on a walking/working surface 6 feet (1.8
m) or more above lower levels shall be protected
from falling by a guardrail system, safety net
system, or personal fall arrest system.
(c) Protection from falling objects. When an
employee is exposed to falling objects, the employer shall
have each employee wear a hard hat and shall implement
one of the following measures:
(1) Erect toeboards, screens, or guardrail systems to
prevent objects from falling from higher levels; or,
(2) Erect a canopy structure and keep potential fall
objects far enough from the edge of the higher
level so that those objects would not go over the
edge if they were accidentally displaced; or,
(3) Barricade the area to which objects could fall,
prohibit employees from entering the barricaded
area, and keep objects that may fall far enough
away from the edge of a higher level so that those
objects would not go over the edge if they were
accidentally displaced.
*[59 FR 40732, Aug. 9, 1994; 60 FR 5131, Jan. 26, 1995]
1926.502 Fall protection systems criteria and practices.
(a) General. (1) Fall protection systems required by
this part shall comply with the applicable provisions of this
section.
(2) Employers shall provide and install all fall
protection systems required by this subpart for an
employee, and shall comply with all other pertinent
requirements of this subpart before that employee
begins the work that necessitates the fall
protection.
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(b) Guardrail systems. Guardrail systems and their
use shall comply with the following provisions:
(1) Top edge height of top rails, or equivalent guardrail
system members, shall be 42 inches (1.1 m) plus
or minus 3 inches (8 cm) above the
walking/working level. When conditions warrant,
the height of the top edge may exceed the 45-inch
height, provided the guardrail system meets all
other criteria of this paragraph.
Note: When employees are using stilts, the top edge
height of the top rail, or equivalent member, shall
be increased an amount equal to the height of the
stilts.
(2) Midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate vertical
members, or equivalent intermediate structural
members shall be installed between the top edge
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
of the guardrail system and the walking/working

surface when there is no wall or parapet wall at
least 21 inches (53 cm) high.
(i) Midrails, when used, shall be installed at a
height midway between the top edge of the
guardrail system and the walking/ working
level.
(ii) Screens and mesh, when used, shall extend
from the top rail to the walking/working level
and along the entire opening between top rail
supports.
(iii) Intermediate members (such as balusters),
when used between posts, shall not be more
than 19 inches (48 cm) apart.
(iv) Other structural members (such as additional
midrails and architectural panels) shall be
installed such that there are no openings in
the guardrail system that are more than 19
inches (.5 m) wide.
Guardrail systems shall be capable of
withstanding, without failure, a force of at least 200
pounds (890 N) applied within 2 inches (5.1 cm) of
the top edge, in any outward or downward
direction, at any point along the top edge.
When the 200 pound (890 N) test load specified in
paragraph (b)(3) of this section is applied in a
downward direction, the top edge of the guardrail
shall not deflect to a height less than 39 inches
(1.0 m) above the walking/working level. Guardrail
system components selected and constructed in
accordance with the Appendix B to subpart M of
this part will be deemed to meet this requirement.
Midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate vertical
members, solid panels, and equivalent structural
members shall be capable of withstanding, without
failure, a force of at least 150 pounds (666 N)
applied in any downward or outward direction at
any point along the midrail or other member.
Guardrail systems shall be so surfaced as to
prevent injury to an employee from punctures or
lacerations, and to prevent snagging of clothing.
The ends of all top rails and midrails shall not
overhang the terminal posts, except where such
overhang does not constitute a projection hazard.
Steel banding and plastic banding shall not be
used as top rails or midrails.
Top rails and midrails shall be at least one-quarter
inch (0.6 cm) nominal diameter or thickness to
prevent cuts and lacerations. If wire rope is used
for top rails, it shall be flagged at not more than 6foot intervals with high-visibility material.
When guardrail systems are used at hoisting
areas, a chain, gate or removable guardrail section
shall be placed across the access opening
between guardrail sections when hoisting
operations are not taking place.
When guardrail systems are used at holes, they
shall be erected on all unprotected sides or edges
of the hole.
When guardrail systems are used around holes
used for the passage of materials, the hole shall
7
have not more than two sides provided with
removable guardrail sections to allow the passage
of materials. When the hole is not in use, it shall be
closed over with a cover, or a guardrail system
shall be provided along with unprotected sides or
edges.
(13) When guardrail systems are used around holes
which are used as points of access (such as
ladderways), they shall be provided with a gate, or
be so offset that a person cannot walk directly into
the hole.
(14) Guardrail systems used on ramps and runways
shall be erected along each unprotected side or
edge.
(15) Manila, plastic or synthetic rope being used for top
rails or midrails shall be inspected as frequently as
necessary to ensure that it continues to meet the
strength requirements of paragraph (b)(3) of this
section.
(c) Safety net systems. Safety net systems and
their use shall comply with the following provisions:
(1) Safety nets shall be installed as close as
practicable under the walking/working surface on
which employees are working, but in no case more
than 30 feet (9.1 m) below such level. When nets
are used on bridges, the potential fall area from
the walking/working surface to the net shall be
unobstructed.
(2) Safety nets shall extend outward from the
outermost projection of the work surface as
follows:
Vertical distance from
Minimum required
working level to
horizontal distance of outer
horizontal plane of net edge of net from the edge of
the working surface
Up to 5 feet
8 feet
More than 5 feet up to
10 feet
10 feet
More than 10 feet
13 feet
(3) Safety nets shall be installed with sufficient
clearance under them to prevent contact with the
surface or structures below when subjected to an
impact force equal to the drop test specified in
paragraph (c)(4) of this section.
(4) Safety nets and their installations shall be capable
of absorbing an impact force equal to that
produced by the drop test specified in paragraph
(c)(4)(i) of this section.
(i) Except as provided in paragraph (c)(4)(ii) of
this section, safety nets and safety net
installations shall be drop-tested at the jobsite
after initial installation and before being used
as a fall protection system, whenever
relocated, after major repair, and at 6-month
intervals if left in one place. The drop-test
shall consist of a 400 pound (180 kg) bag of
sand 30 + or - 2 inches (76 + or - 5 cm) in
diameter dropped into the net from the
highest walking/working surface at which
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
employees are exposed to fall hazards, but

not from less than 42 inches (1.1 m) above
that level.
(ii) When the employer can demonstrate that it is
unreasonable to perform the drop-test
required by paragraph (c)(4)(i) of this section,
the employer (or a designated competent
person) shall certify that the net and net
installation is in compliance with the
provisions of paragraph (c)(3) and (c)(4)(i) of
this section by preparing a certification record
prior to the net being used as a fall protection
system. The certification record must include
an identification of the net and net installation
for which the certification record is being
prepared; the date that it was determined that
the identified net and net installation were in
compliance with paragraph (c)(3) of this
section and the signature of the person
making the determination and certification.
The most recent certification record for each
net and net installation shall be available at
the jobsite for inspection.
Defective nets shall not be used. Safety nets shall
be inspected at least once a week for wear,
damage, and other deterioration. Defective
components shall be removed from service. Safety
nets shall also be inspected after any occurrence
which could affect the integrity of the safety net
system.
Materials, scrap pieces, equipment, and tools
which have fallen into the safety net shall be
removed as soon as possible from the net and at
least before the next work shift.
The maximum size of each safety net mesh
opening shall not exceed 36 square inches (230
cm) nor be longer than 6 inches (15 cm) on any
side, and the opening, measured center-to-center
of mesh ropes or webbing, shall not be longer than
6 inches (15 cm). All mesh crossings shall be
secured to prevent enlargement of the mesh
opening.
Each safety net (or section of it) shall have a
border rope for webbing with a minimum breaking
strength of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN).
Connections between safety net panels shall be as
strong as integral net components and shall be
spaced not more than 6 inches (15 cm) apart.
(d) Personal fall arrest systems. Personal fall arrest

systems and their use shall comply with the provisions set
forth below. Effective January 1, 1998, body belts are not
acceptable as part of a personal fall arrest system. Note:
The use of a body belt in a positioning device system is
acceptable and is regulated under paragraph (e) of this
section.
(1) Connectors shall be drop forged, pressed or
formed steel, or made of equivalent materials.
(2) Connectors shall have a corrosion-resistant finish,
and all surfaces and edges shall be smooth to
prevent damage to interfacing parts of the system.
8
(3) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall have a minimum
tensile strength of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN).
(4) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall be proof-tested to
a minimum tensile load of 3,600 pounds (16 kN)
without cracking, breaking, or taking permanent
deformation.
(5) Snaphooks shall be sized to be compatible with
the member to which they are connected to
prevent unintentional disengagement of the
snaphook by depression of the snaphook keeper
by the connected member, or shall be a locking
type snaphook designed and used to prevent
disengagement of the snaphook by the contact of
the snaphook keeper by the connected member.
Effective January 1, 1998, only locking type
snaphooks shall be used.
(6) Unless the snaphook is a locking type and
designed for the following connections, snaphooks
shall not be engaged:
(i) directly to webbing, rope or wire rope;
(ii) to each other;
(iii) to a dee-ring to which another snaphook or
other connector is attached;
(iv) to a horizontal lifeline; or
(v) to any object which is incompatibly shaped or
dimensioned in relation to the snaphook such
that unintentional disengagement could occur
by the connected object being able to
depress the snaphook keeper and release
itself.
(7) On suspended scaffolds or similar work platforms
with horizontal lifelines which may become vertical
lifelines, the devices used to connect to a
horizontal lifeline shall be capable of locking in
both directions on the lifeline.
(8) Horizontal lifelines shall be designed, installed,
and used, under the supervision of a qualified
person, as part of a complete personal fall arrest
system, which maintains a safety factor of at least
two.
(9) Lanyards and vertical lifelines shall have a
minimum breaking strength of 5,000 pounds (22.2
kN).
(10) (i)Except as provided in paragraph (d)(10)(ii) of
this section, when vertical lifelines are used, each
employee shall be attached to a separate lifeline.
(ii) During the construction of elevator shafts, two
employees may be attached to the same
lifeline in the hoistway, provided both
employees are working atop a false car that
is equipped with guardrails; the strength of
the lifeline is 10,000 pounds [5,000 pounds
per employee attached] (44.4 kN); and all
other criteria specified in this paragraph for
lifelines have been met.
(11) Lifelines shall be protected against being cut or
braded.
(12) Self-retracting lifelines and lanyards which
automatically limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61
m) or less shall be capable of sustaining a
minimum tensile load of 3,000 pounds (13.3 kN)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
Note:
(17)
applied to the device with the lifeline or -lanyard in

the fully extended position.
Self-retracting lifelines and lanyards which do not
limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less,
ripstitch lanyards, and tearing and deforming
lanyards shall be capable of sustaining a minimum
tensile load of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN) applied to
the device with the lifeline or lanyard in the fully
extended position.
Ropes and straps (webbing) used in lanyards,
lifelines, and strength components of body belts
and body harnesses shall be made from synthetic
fibers.
Anchorages used for attachment of personal fall
arrest equipment shall be independent of any
anchorage being used to support or suspend
platforms and capable of supporting at least 5,000
pounds (22.2 kN) per employee attached, or shall
be designed, installed, and used as follows:
(i) as part of a complete personal fall arrest
system which maintains a safety factor of at
least two; and
(ii) under the supervision of a qualified person.
Personal fall arrest systems, when stopping a fall,
shall:
(i) limit maximum arresting force on an
employee to 900 pounds (4 kN) when used
with a body belt;
(ii) limit maximum arresting force on an
employee to 1,800 pounds (8 kN) when used
with a body harness;
(iii) be rigged such that an employee can neither
free fall more than 6 feet (1.8 m),nor contact
any lower level;
(iv) bring an employee to complete stop and limit
maximum deceleration distance an employee
travels to 3.5 feet (1.07 m); and
(v) have sufficient strength to withstand twice the
potential impact energy of an employee free
falling a distance of 6 feet (1.8 m), or the free
fall distance permitted by the systems,
whichever is less.
If the personal fall arrest system meets the criteria
and protocols contained in Appendix C to subpart
M, and if the system is being used by an employee
having a combined person and tool weight of less
than 310 pounds (140 kg), the system will be
considered to be in compliance with the provisions
of paragraph (d)(16) of this section. If the system is
used by an employee having a combined tool and
body weight of 310 pounds (140 kg) or more, then
the employer must appropriately modify the criteria
and protocols of the Appendix to provide proper
protection for such heavier weights, or the system
will not be deemed to be in compliance with the
requirements of paragraph (d)(16) of this section.
The attachment point of the body belt shall be
located in the center of the wearers back. The
attachment point of the body harness shall be
located in the center of the wearers back near
shoulder level, or above the wearers head.
9
(18) Body belts, harnesses, and components shall be
used only for employee protection (as part of a
personal fall arrest system or positioning device
system) and not to hoist materials.
(19) Personal fall arrest systems and components
subjected to impact loading shall be immediately
removed from service and shall not be used again
for employee protection until inspected and
determined by a competent person to be
undamaged and suitable for reuse.
(20) The employer shall provide for prompt rescue of
employees in the event of a fall or shall assure that
employees are able to rescue themselves.
(21) Personal fall arrest systems shall be inspected
prior to each use for wear, damage and other
deterioration, and defective components shall be
removed from service.
(22) Body belts shall be at least one and five-eighths
(1 5/8) inches (4.1 cm) wide.
(23) Personal fall arrest systems shall not be attached
to guardrail systems, nor shall they be attached to
hoists except as specified in other subparts of this
Part.
(24) When a personal fall arrest system is used at hoist
areas, it shall be rigged to allow the movement of
the employee only as far as the edge of the
(e) Positioning device systems. Positioning device
systems and their use shall conform to the following
provisions:
(1) Positioning devices shall be rigged such that an
employee cannot free fall more than 2 feet (.9 m).
(2) Positioning devices shall be secured to an
anchorage capable of supporting at least twice the
potential impact load of an employees fall or 3,000
pounds (13.3 kN), whichever is greater.
(3) Connectors shall be drop forged, pressed or
formed steel, or made of equivalent materials.
(4) Connectors shall have a corrosion-resistant finish,
and all surfaces and edges shall be smooth to
prevent damage to interfacing parts of this system.
(5) Connecting assemblies shall have a minimum
tensile strength of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN).
(6) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall be proof-tested to
a minimum tensile load of 3,600 pounds (16 kN)
without cracking, breaking, or taking permanent
deformation.
(7) Snaphooks shall be sized to be compatible with
the member to which they are connected to
prevent unintentional disengagement of the
snaphook by depression of the snaphook keeper
by the connected member, or shall be a locking
type snaphook designed and used to prevent
disengagement of the snaphook by the contact of
the snaphook keeper by the connected member.
As of January 1, 1998, only locking type
snaphooks shall be used.
(8) Unless the snaphook is a locking type and
designed for the following connections, snaphooks
shall not be engaged:
(i) directly to webbing, rope or wire rope;

(ii) to each other;
(iii) to a dee-ring to which another snaphook or
other connector is attached;
(iv) to a horizontal lifeline; or
(v) to any object which is incompatibly shaped or
dimensioned in relation to the snaphook such
that unintentional disengagement could occur
by the connected object being able to
depress the snaphook keeper and release
itself.
(9) Positioning device systems shall be inspected prior
to each use for wear, damage, and other
deterioration, and defective components shall be
removed from service.
(10) Body belts, harnesses, and components shall be
used only for employee protection (as part of a
personal fall arrest system or positioning device
system) and not to hoist materials.
(f) Warning line systems. Warning line systems
[See 1926.501(b)(10)] and their use shall comply with the
(1) The warning line shall be erected around all sides
of the roof work area.
(i) When mechanical equipment is not being
used, the warning line shall be erected not
less than 6 feet (1.8 m) from the roof edge.
(ii) When mechanical equipment is being used,
the warning line shall be erected not less than
6 feet (1.8 m) from the roof edge which is
parallel to the direction of mechanical
equipment operation, and not less than 10
feet (3.1 m) from the roof edge which is
perpendicular to the direction of mechanical
equipment operation.
(iii) Points of access, materials handling areas,
storage areas, and hoisting areas shall be
connected to the work area by an access
path formed by two warning lines.
(iv) When the path to a point of access is not in
use, a rope, wire, chain, or other barricade,
equivalent in strength and height to the
warning line, shall be placed across the path
at the point where the path shall be offset
such that a person cannot walk directly into
the work area.
(2) Warning lines shall consist of ropes, wires, or
chains, and supporting stanchions erected as
follows:
(i) The rope, wire, or chain shall be flagged at
not more than 6-foot (1.8 m) intervals with
high-visibility material;
(ii) The rope, wire, or chain shall be rigged and
supported in such a way that its lowest point
(including sag) is no less than 34 inches (.9
m) from the walking/working surface and its
highest point is no more than 39 inches (1.0
m) from the walking/working surface;
(iii) After being erected, with the rope, wire, or
chain attached, stanchions shall be capable
10
of resisting, without tipping over, a force of at
least 16 pounds (71 N) applied horizontally
against the stanchion, 30 inches (.8 m) above
the walking/working surface, perpendicular to
the warning line, and in the direction of the
floor, roof, or platform edge;
(iv) The rope, wire, or chain shall have a
minimum tensile strength of 500 pounds (2.22
kN), and after being attached to the
stanchions, shall be capable of supporting,
without breaking, the loads applied to the
stanchions as prescribed in paragraph
(f)(2)(iii) of this section; and
(v) The line shall be attached at each stanchion
in such a way that pulling on one section of
the line between stanchions will not result in
slack being taken up in adjacent sections
before the stanchion tips over.
(3) No employee shall be allowed in the area between
a roof edge and a warning line unless the
employee is performing roofing work in that area.
(4) Mechanical equipment on roofs shall be used or
stored only in areas where employees are
protected by a warning line system, guardrail
system, or personal fall arrest system.
(g) Controlled access zones. Controlled access
zones [See 1926.501(b)(9) and 1926.502(k)] and their use
shall conform to the following provisions.
(1) When used to control access to areas where
leading edge and other operations are taking place the
controlled access zone shall be defined by a control line or
by any other means that restricts access.
(i) When control lines are used, they shall be
erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 m) nor more
than 25 feet (7.7 m) from the unprotected or
leading edge, except when erecting precast
concrete members.
(ii) When erecting precast concrete members,
the control line shall be erected not less than
6 feet (1.8 m) nor more than 60 feet (18 m) or
half the length of the member being erected,
whichever is less, from the leading edge.
(iii) The control line shall extend along the entire
length of the unprotected or leading edge and
shall be approximately parallel to the
unprotected or leading edge.
(iv) The control line shall be connected on each
side to a guardrail system or wall.
(2) When used to control access to areas where
overhand bricklaying and related work are taking
place:
(i) The controlled access zone shall be defined
by a control line erected not less than 10 feet
(3.1 m) nor more than 15 feet (4.5 m) from
the working edge.
(ii) The control line shall extend for a distance
sufficient for the controlled access zone to
enclose all employees performing overhand
bricklaying and related work at the working
edge and shall be approximately parallel to
the working edge.

(iii) Additional control lines shall be erected at
each end to enclose the controlled access
zone.
(iv) Only employees engaged in overhand
bricklaying or related work shall be permitted
in the controlled access zone.
(3) Control lines shall consist of ropes, wires, tapes, or
equivalent materials, and supporting stanchions as
follows:
(i) Each line shall be flagged or otherwise clearly
marked at not more than 6-foot (1.8 m)
intervals with high-visibility material.
(ii) Each line shall be rigged and supported in
such a way that its lowest point (including
sag) is not less than 39 inches (1 m) from the
walking/working surface and its highest point
is not more than 45 inches (1.3 m) [50 inches
(1.3 m) when overhand bricklaying operations
are
being
performed]
from
the
(iii) Each line shall have a minimum breaking
strength of 200 pounds (.88 kN).
(4) On floors and roofs where guardrail systems are
not in place prior to the beginning of overhand
bricklaying operations, controlled access zones
shall be enlarged, as necessary, to enclose all
points of access, material handling areas, and
storage areas.
(5) On floors and roofs where guardrail systems are in
place, but need to be removed to allow overhand
bricklaying work or leading edge work to take
place, only that portion of the guardrail necessary
to accomplish the days work shall be removed.
(h) Safety monitoring systems. Safety monitoring
systems [See 1926.501(b)(10) and 1926.502(k)] and their
use shall comply with the following provisions:
(1) The employer shall designate a competent person
to monitor the safety of other employees and the
employer shall ensure that the safety monitor
complies with the following requirements:
(i) The safety monitor shall be competent to
recognize fall hazards;
(ii) The safety monitor shall warn the employee
when it appears that the employee is
unaware of a fall hazard or is acting in an
unsafe manner;
(iii) The safety monitor shall be on the same
walking/working surface and within visual
sighting distance of the employee being
monitored;
(iv) The safety monitor shall be close enough to
communicate orally with the employee; and
(v) The safety monitor shall not have other
responsibilities which could take the monitors
attention from the monitoring function.
(2) Mechanical equipment shall not be used or stored
in areas where safety monitoring systems are
being used to monitor employees engaged in roof
operations on low-slope roofs.
11
(3) No employee, other than an employee engaged in
roofing work [on low-sloped roofs] or an employee
covered by a fall protection plan, shall be allowed
in an area where an employee is being protected
by a safety monitoring system.
(4) Each employee working in a controlled access
zone shall be directed to comply promptly with fall
hazard warnings from safety monitors.
(i) Covers. Covers for holes in floors, roofs, and other
walking/working surfaces shall meet the following
requirements:
(1) Covers located in roadways and vehicular aisles
shall be capable of supporting, without failure, at
least twice the maximum axle load of the largest
vehicle expected to cross over the cover.
(2) All other covers shall be capable of supporting,
without failure, at least twice the weight of
employees, equipment, and materials that may be
imposed on the cover at any one time.
(3) All covers shall be secured when installed so as to
prevent accidental displacement by the wind,
equipment, or employees.
(4) All covers shall be color coded or they shall be
marked with the word HOLE or COVER to
provide warning of the hazard.
Note: This provision does not apply to cast iron manhole
covers or steel grates used on streets or
roadways.
(j) Protection from falling objects. Falling object
protection shall comply with the following provisions:
(1) Toeboards, when used as falling object protection,
shall be erected along the edge of the overhead
walking/working surface for a distance sufficient to
protect employees below.
(2) Toeboards shall be capable of withstanding,
without failure, a force of at least 50 pounds (222
N) applied in any downward or outward direction at
any point along the toeboard.
(3) Toeboards shall be a minimum of 3 inches (9
cm) in vertical height from their top edge to the
level of the walking/working surface. They shall
have not more than 1/4inch (0.6 cm) clearance
above the walking/working surface. They shall be
solid or have openings not over 1 inch (2.5 cm) in
greatest dimension.
(4) Where tools, equipment, or materials are piled
higher than the top edge of a toeboard, paneling or
screening shall be erected from the walking/
working surface or toeboard to the top of a
guardrail systems top rail or midrail, for a distance
sufficient to protect employees below.
(5) Guardrail systems, when used as falling object
protection, shall have all openings small enough to
prevent passage of potential falling objects.
(6) During the performance of overhand bricklaying
and related work:
(i) No materials or equipment except masonry
and mortar shall be stored within 4 feet (1.2
m) of the working edge.
(ii)
Excess mortar, broken or scattered masonry

units, and all other materials and debris shall
be kept clear from the work area by removal
at regular intervals.
(7) During the performance of roofing work:
(i) Materials and equipment shall not be stored
within 6 feet (1.8 m) of a roof edge unless
guardrails are erected at the edge.
(ii) Materials which are piled, grouped, or
stacked near a roof edge shall be stable and
self-supporting.
(8) Canopies, when used as falling object protection,
shall be strong enough to prevent collapse and to
prevent penetration by any objects which may fall
onto the canopy.
(k) Fall protection plan. This option is available only
to employees engaged in leading edge work, precast
concrete erection work, or residential construction work
(See 1926.501(b)(2), (b)(12), and (b)(13)) who can
demonstrate that it is infeasible or it creates a greater
hazard to use conventional fall protection equipment. The
fall protection plan must conform to the following
provisions:
(1) The fall protection plan shall be prepared by a
qualified person and developed specifically for the
site where the leading edge work is done, precast
concrete work, or residential construction work is
being performed and the plan must be maintained
up to date.
(2) Any changes to the fall protection plan shall be
approved by a qualified person.
(3) A copy of the fall protection plan with all approved
changes shall be maintained at the job site.
(4) The implementation of the fall protection plan shall
be under the supervision of a competent person.
(5) The fall protection plan shall document the
reasons why the use of conventional fall protection
systems (guardrail systems, personal fall arrest
systems, or safety nets systems) are infeasible or
why their use would create a greater hazard.
(6) The fall protection plan shall include a written
discussion of other measures that will be taken to
reduce or eliminate the fall hazard for workers who
cannot be provided with protection from the
conventional fall protection systems. For example,
the employer shall discuss the extent to which
scaffolds, ladders, or vehicle mounted work
platforms can be used to provide a safer working
surface and thereby reduce the hazard of falling.
(7) The fall protection plan shall identify each location
where conventional fall protection methods cannot
be used. These locations shall then be classified
as controlled access zones and the employer must
comply with the criteria in paragraph (g) of this
section.
(8) Where no other alternative measure has been
implemented, the employer shall implement a
safety monitoring system in conformance with
1926.502(h).
(9) The fall protection plan must include a statement
12
which provides the name or other method of
identification for each employee who is designated
to work in controlled access zones. No other
employees may enter controlled access zones.
(10) In the event an employee falls, or some other
related, serious incident occurs, (e.g., a near miss)
the employer shall investigate the circumstances
of the fall or other incident to determine if the fall
protection plan needs to be changed (e.g., new
practices, procedures, or training) and shall
implement those changes to prevent similar types
of falls or incidents.
*[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as
amended at 45 FR 75626, Nov. 14, 1980; 55 FR 47687,
Nov. 14, 1990; 59 FR 40733, Aug. 9, 1994; 60 FR 5131,
Jan. 26, 1995]
1926.503 Training requirements
The following training provisions supplement and clarify
the requirements of 1926.21 regarding the hazards
addressed in subpart M of this part.
(a) Training program. (1) The employer shall provide
a training program for each employee who might be
exposed to fall hazards. The program shall enable each
employee to recognize the hazards of falling and shall train
each employee in the procedures to be followed in order to
minimize these hazards.
(2) The employer shall assure that each employee has
been trained, as necessary, by a competent person
qualified in the following areas:
(i) The nature of fall hazards in the work area;
(ii) The correct procedures for erecting,
maintaining, disassembling, and inspecting
the fall protection systems to be used;
(iii) The use and operation of guardrail systems,
personal fall arrest systems, safety net
systems, warning line systems, safety
monitoring systems, controlled access zones,
and other protection to be used;
(iv) The role of each employee in the safety
monitoring system when this system is used;
(v) The limitations on the use of mechanical
equipment during the performance of roofing
work on low-sloped roofs;
(vi) The correct procedures for the handling and
storage of equipment and materials and the
erection of overhead protection; and
(vii) The role of employees in fall protection plans;
(viii) The standards contained in this subpart.
(b) Certification of training. (1) The employer shall
verify compliance with paragraph (a) of this section by
preparing a written certification record. The written
certification record shall contain the name or other identity
of the employee trained, the date(s) of the training, and the
signature of the person who conducted the training or the
signature of the employer. If the employer relies on training
conducted by another employer or completed prior to the
effective date of this section, the certification record shall
indicate the date the employer determined the prior training
was adequate rather than the date of actual training.

(2) The latest training certification shall be maintained.
(c) Retraining. When the employer has reason to
believe that any affected employee who has already been
trained does not have the understanding and skill required
by paragraph (a) of this section, the employer shall retrain
each such employee. Circumstances where retraining is
required include, but are not limited to, situations where:
(1) Changes in the workplace render previous training
obsolete; or
(2) Changes in the types of fall protection systems or
equipment to be used render previous training
obsolete; or
(3) Inadequacies in an affected employees
knowledge or use of fall protection systems or
equipment indicate that the employee has not
retained the requisite understanding or skill.
APPENDIX A
Determining Roof Widths Non-mandatory Guidelines
for Complying with 1926.501(b)(10)
(1) This appendix serves as a guideline to assist
employers complying with the requirements of
1926.501(b)(10). Section 1910.501(b)(10) allows
the use of a safety monitoring system alone as a
means of providing fall protection during the
performance of roofing operations on low-sloped
roofs 50 feet (15.25 m) or less in width. Each
example in the appendix shows a roof plan or
plans and indicates where each roof or roof area is
to be measured to determine its width. Section
views or elevation views are shown where
appropriate. Some examples show correct and
incorrect subdivisions of irregularly shaped roofs
divided into smaller, regularly shaped areas. In all
examples, the dimension selected to be the width
of an area is the lesser of the two primary
dimensions of the area, as viewed from above.
Example A shows that on a simple rectangular
roof, width is the lesser of the two primary overall
dimensions. This is also the case with roofs which
are sloped toward or away from the roof center, as
shown in Example B.
(2) Many roofs are not simple rectangles. Such roofs
may be broken down into subareas as shown in
Example C. The process of dividing a roof area
can produce many different configurations.
Example C gives the general rule of using dividing
lines of minimum length to minimize the size and
number of areas which are potentially less than 50
feet (15.25 m) wide. The intent is to minimize the
number of roof areas where safety monitoring
systems alone are sufficient protection.
(3) Roofs which are comprised of several separate,
non-contiguous roof areas, as in Example D, may
be considered as a series of individual roofs.
Some roofs have penthouses, additional floors,
courtyard openings, or similar architectural
features. Example E shows how the rule for
13
dividing roofs into subareas is applied to such
configurations. Irregular, non- rectangular roofs
must be considered on an individual basis, as
shown in Example F.
Such roofs are to be divided into sub-areas by using
dividing lines of minimum length to minimize the size and
number of areas which are potentially less than or equal to
50 feet (15.25 meters) in width, in order to limit the size of
the roof areas where the safety monitoring system alone
can be used (1926.502(b)(10)). Dotted lines are used in the
examples to show the location of dividing lines.
denotes incorrect measurements of width.
EXAMPLE C
IRREGULARLY SHAPED ROOFS WITH
RECTANGLUAR SHAPED SECTIONS
14
EXAMPLE E.
ROOFS WITH PENTHOUSES, OPEN COURTYARDS,
ADDITIONAL FLOORS, ETC.
EXAMPLE F.
IRREGULAR, NON-RECTANGULAR SHAPED ROOFS
requirements of 1926.502(b)(3), (4), and (5). This Appendix

serves as a non-mandatory guideline to assist employers in
complying with these requirements. An employer may use
these guidelines as a starting point for designing guardrail
systems. However, the guidelines do not provide all the
information necessary to build a complete system, and the
employer is still responsible for designing and assembling
these components in such a way that the completed
system will meet the requirements of 1926.502(b)(3), (4),
and (5). Components for which no specific guidelines are
given in this Appendix (e.g., joints, base connections,
components made with other materials, and components
with other dimensions) must also be designed and
constructed in such a way that the completed system
meets the requirements of 1926.502.
(1) For wood railings: Wood components shall be
minimum 1500 lb-ft/in(2) fiber (stress grade)
construction grade lumber; the posts shall be at
least 2-inch by 4-inch (5 cm x 10 cm) lumber
spaced not more than 8 feet (2.4 m) apart on
centers; the top rail shall be at least 2-inch by 4inch (5 cm x 10 cm) lumber, the intermediate rail
shall be at least 1-inch by 6-inch (2.5 cm x 15 cm)
lumber. All lumber dimensions are nominal sizes
as provided by the American Softwood Lumber
Standards, dated January 1970.
(2) For pipe railings: posts, top rails, and intermediate
railings shall be at least one and one-half inches
nominal diameter (schedule 40 pipe) with posts
spaced not more than 8 feet (2.4 m) apart on
centers.
(3) For structural steel railings: posts, top rails, and
intermediate rails shall be at least 2-inch by 2-inch
(5 cm x 10 cm) by 3.8 inch (1.1 cm) angles, with
posts spaced not more than 8 feet (2.4 m) apart on
centers.
*[59 FR 40743, Aug. 9, 1994; 60 FR 5131, Jan. 26, 1995]
APPENDIX C
Personal Fall Arrest Systems Non-Mandatory
Guidelines for Complying with 1926.502(d)
APPENDIX B
Guardrail Systems Non-Mandatory Guidelines for
Complying with 1926.502(b)
The standard requires guardrail systems and
components to be designed and built to meet the
I. Test methods for personal fall arrest systems and

positioning device systems
(a) General. This appendix serves as a
nonmandatory guideline to assist employers in complying
with the requirements in 1926.502(d). Paragraphs (b), (c),
(d) and (e) of this Appendix describe test procedures which
may be used to determine compliance with the
requirements in 1926.502 (d)(16). As noted in Appendix D
of this subpart, the test methods listed here in Appendix C
can also be used to assist employers in complying with the
requirements in 1926.502(e) (3) and (4) for positioning
device systems.
(b) General conditions for all tests in the Appendix
to 1926.502(d).
(1) Lifelines, lanyards and deceleration devices should
be attached to an anchorage and connected to the
body-belt or body harness in the same manner as
they would be when used to protect employees.
15
(2) The anchorage should be rigid, and should not
have a deflection greater than 0.04 inches (1 mm)
when a force of 2,250 pounds (10 kN) is applied.
(3) The frequency response of the load measuring
instrumentation should be 500 Hz.
(4) The test weight used in the strength and force
tests should be a rigid, metal, cylindrical or
torsoshaped object with a girth of 38 inches plus or
minus 4 inches (96 cm plus or minus 10 cm).
(5) The lanyard or lifeline used to create the free fall
distance should be supplied with the system, or in
its absence, the least elastic lanyard or lifeline
available to be used with the system.
(6) The test weight for each test should be hoisted to
the required level and should be quickly released
without having any appreciable motion imparted to
it.
(7) The systems performance should be evaluated
taking into account the range of environmental
conditions for which it is designed to be used.
(8) Following the test, the system need not be capable
of further operation.
(c) Strength test. (1) During the testing of all
systems, a test weight of 300 pounds plus or minus 5
pounds (135 kg plus or minus 2.5 kg) should be used.
(See paragraph (b)(4) of this section.)
(2) The test consists of dropping the test weight once.
A new unused system should be used for each
test.
(3) For lanyard systems, the lanyard length should be
6 feet plus or minus 2 inches (1.83 m plus or
minus 5 cm) as measured from the fixed
anchorage to the attachment on the body belt or
body harness.
(4) For rope-grab-type deceleration systems, the
length of the lifeline above the centerline of the
grabbing mechanism to the lifelines anchorage
point should not exceed 2 feet (0.61 m).
(5) For lanyard systems, for systems with deceleration
devices which do not automatically limit free fall
distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less, and for systems
with deceleration devices which have a connection
distance in excess of 1 foot (0.3 m) (measured
between the centerline of the lifeline and the
attachment point to the body belt or harness), the
test weight should be rigged to free fall a distance
of 7.5 feet (2.3 m) from a point that is 1.5 feet (.46
m) above the anchorage point, to its hanging
location (6 feet below the anchorage). The test
weight should fall without interference, obstruction,
or hitting the floor or ground during the test. In
some cases a non-elastic wire lanyard of sufficient
length may need to be added to the system (for
test purposes) to create the necessary free fall
distance.
(6) For deceleration device systems with integral
lifelines or lanyards which automatically limit free
fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less, the test
weight should be rigged to free fall a distance of 4
feet (1.22 m).
(7) Any weight which detaches from the belt or

harness has failed the strength test.
(d) Force test (1) General. The test consists of
dropping the respective test weight once as specified in
paragraph (d)(2)(i) or (d)(3)(i) of this section. A new,
unused system should be used for each test.
(2) For lanyard systems. (i) A test weight of 220
pounds plus or minus 3 pounds (100 kg plus or
minus 1.6 kg) should be used. (See paragraph
(b)(4) of this appendix).
(ii) Lanyard length should be 6 feet plus or minus
two inches (1.83 m plus or minus 5 cm) as
measured from the fixed anchorage to the
attachment on the body belt or body harness.
(iii) The test weight should free fall from the
anchorage level to its hanging location (a
total of 6 feet (1.83 m) free fall distance)
without interference, obstruction, or hitting the
floor or ground during the test.
(3) For all other systems. (i) A test weight of 220
pounds plus or minus 3 pounds (100 kg plus or
minus 1.6 kg) should be used. (See paragraph
(b)(4) of this appendix)
(ii) The free fall distance to be used in the test
should be the maximum fall distance
physically permitted by the system during
normal use conditions, up to a maximum free
fall distance for the test weight of 6 feet (1.83
m), except as follows:
(A) For deceleration systems which have a
connection link or lanyard, the test weight
should free fall a distance equal to the
connection distance (measured between
the centerline of the lifeline and the
attachment point to the body belt or
harness).
(B) For deceleration device systems with
integral lifelines or lanyards which
automatically limit free fall distance to 2
feet (0.61 m) or less, the test weight
should free fall a distance equal to that
permitted by the system in normal use.
(For example, to test a system with a selfretracting lifeline or lanyard, the test
weight should be supported and the
system allowed to retract the lifeline or
lanyard as it would in normal use. The test
weight would then be released and the
force
and
deceleration
distance
measured).
(4) A system fails the force test if the recorded
maximum arresting force exceeds 1,260 pounds
(5.6 kN) when using a body belt, and/or exceeds
2,520 pounds (11.2 kN) when using a body
harness.
(5) The maximum elongation and deceleration
distance should be recorded during the force test.
(e) Deceleration device tests. (1) General. The
device should be evaluated or tested under the
environmental conditions, (such as rain, ice, grease, dirt,
type of lifeline, etc.), for which the device is designed.
16
(2) Rope-grab-type deceleration devices.
(i) Devices should be moved on a lifeline 1,000
times over the same length of line a distance
of not less than 1 foot (30.5 cm), and the
mechanism should lock each time.
(ii) Unless the device is permanently marked to
indicate the type(s) of lifeline which must be
used, several types (different diameters and
different materials), of lifelines should be
used to test the device.
(3) Other
self-activating-type
deceleration
devices. The locking mechanisms of other
selfactivating-type-deceleration devices designed
for more than one arrest should lock each of 1,000
times as they would in normal service.
II. Additional non-mandatory guidelines for personal
fall arrest systems. The following information
constitutes additional guidelines for use in complying
with requirements for a personal fall arrest system.
(a) Selection and use considerations. (1) The kind
of personal fall arrest system selected should match the
particular work situation, and any possible free fall distance
should be kept to a minimum. Consideration should be
given to the particular work environment. For example, the
presence of acids, dirt, moisture, oil, grease, etc., and their
effect on the system, should it be evaluated. Hot or cold
environments may also have an adverse effect on the
system. Wire rope should not be used where an electrical
hazard is anticipated. As required by the standard, the
employer must plan to have means available to promptly
rescue an employee should a fall occur, since the
suspended employee may not be able to reach a work level
independently.
(2) Where lanyards, connectors, and lifelines are
subject to damage by work operations such as
welding, chemical cleaning, and sandblasting, the
component should be protected, or other securing
systems should be used. The employer should
fully evaluate the work conditions and environment
(including seasonal weather changes) before
selecting the appropriate personal fall protection
system. Once in use, the systems effectiveness
should be monitored. In some cases, a program
for cleaning and maintenance of the system may
be necessary.
(b) Testing considerations. Before purchasing or
putting into use a personal fall arrest system, an employer
should obtain from the supplier information about the
system based on its performance during testing so that the
employer can know if the system meets this standard.
Testing should be done using recognized test methods.
This Appendix contains test methods recognized for
evaluating the performance of fall arrest systems. Not all
systems may need to be individually tested; the
performance of some systems may be based on data and
calculations derived from testing of similar systems
provided that enough information is available to
demonstrate similarity of function and design.
(c) Component compatibility considerations.
Ideally, a personal fall arrest system is designed, tested,
and supplied as a complete system. However, it is common

practice for lanyards, connectors, lifelines, deceleration
devices, body belts and body harnesses to be interchanged
since some components wear out before others. The
employer and employee should realize that not all
components are interchangeable. For instance, a lanyard
should not be connected between a body belt (or harness)
and a deceleration device of the selfretracting type since
this can result in additional free fall for which the system
was not designed. Any substitution or change to a personal
fall arrest system should be fully evaluated or tested by a
competent person to determine that it meets the standard,
before the modified system is put in use.
(d) Employee training considerations. Thorough
employee training in the selection and use of personal fall
arrest systems is imperative. Employees must be trained in
the safe use of the system. This should include the
following: application limits; proper anchoring and tie-off
techniques; estimation of free fall distance, including
determination of deceleration distance, and total fall
distance to prevent striking a lower level; methods of use;
and inspection and storage of the system. Careless or
improper use of the equipment can result in serious injury
or death. Employers and employees should become
familiar with the material in this Appendix, as well as
manufacturers recommendations, before a system is used.
Of uppermost importance is the reduction in strength
caused by certain tie-offs (such as using knots, tying
around sharp edges, etc.) and maximum permitted free fall
distance. Also, to be stressed are the importance of
inspections prior to use, the limitations of the equipment,
and unique conditions at the worksite which may be
important in determining the type of system to use.
(e) Instruction considerations. Employers should
obtain comprehensive instructions from the supplier as to
the systems proper use and application, including, where
applicable:
(1) The force measured during the sample force test;
(2) The maximum elongation measured for lanyards
during the force test;
(3) The deceleration distance measured for
deceleration devices during the force test;
(4) Caution statements on critical use limitations;
(5) Application limits;
(6) Proper hook-up, anchoring and tie-off techniques,
including the proper dee-ring or other attachment
point to use on the body belt and harness for fall
arrest;
(7) Proper climbing techniques;
(8) Methods of inspection, use, cleaning, and storage;
and
(9) Specific lifelines which may be used.
This information should be provided to employees
during training.
(f) Rescue considerations. As required by
1926.502(d)(20), when personal fall arrest systems are
used, the employer must assure that employees can be
promptly rescued or can rescue themselves should a fall
occur. The availability of rescue personnel, ladders or other
rescue equipment should be evaluated. In some situations,
equipment which allows employees to rescue themselves
17
after the fall has been arrested may be desirable, such as
devices which have descent capability.
(g) Inspection considerations. As required by
1926.502(d)(21), personal fall arrest systems must be
regularly inspected. Any component with any significant
defect, such as cuts, tears, abrasions, mold, or undue
stretching; alterations or additions which might affect its
efficiency; damage due to corrosives; distorted hooks or
faulty look springs; tongues unfitted to the shoulder of
buckles; loose or damaged mountings; non-functioning
parts; or wearing or internal deterioration in the ropes must
be withdrawn from service immediately, and should be
tagged or marked as unusable, or destroyed.
(h) Tie-off considerations. (1) One of the most
important aspects of personal fall protection systems is fully
planning the system before it is put into use. Probably the
most overlooked component is planning for suitable
anchorage points. Such planning should ideally be done
before the structure or building is constructed so that
anchorage points can be incorporated during construction
for use later for window cleaning or other building
maintenance. If properly planned, these anchorage points
may be used during construction, as well as afterwards.
(i) Properly planned anchorages should be used
if they are available. In some cases,
anchorages must be installed immediately
prior to use. In some cases, a registered
professional engineer with experience in
designing fall protection systems, or another
qualified person with appropriate education
and experience should design an anchor
point to be installed.
(ii) In some cases, the Agency recognizes that
there will be a need to devise an anchor point
from existing structures. Examples of what
might be appropriate anchor points are steel
members or I-beams if an acceptable strap is
available for the connection (do not use a
lanyard with a snaphook clipped onto itself);
large eye-bolts made of an appropriate grade
steel; guardrails or railings if they have been
designed for use as an anchor point; or
masonry or wood members only if the
attachment point is substantial and
precautions have been taken to assure that
bolts or other connectors will not pull through.
A qualified person should be used to
evaluate the suitability of these make shift
anchorages with a focus on proper strength.
(2) Employers and employees should at all times be
aware that the strength of a personal fall arrest
system is based on its being attached to an
anchoring system which does not reduce the
strength of the system (such as a properly
dimensioned eye-bolt/snap-hook anchorage).
Therefore, if a means of attachment is used that
will reduce the strength of the system, that
component should be replaced by a stronger one,
but one that will also maintain the appropriate
maximum arrest force characteristics.
(3) Tie-off using a knot in a rope lanyard or lifeline (at

any location) can reduce the lifeline or lanyard
strength by 50 percent or more. Therefore, a
stronger lanyard or lifeline should be used to
compensate for the weakening effect of the knot,
or the lanyard length should be reduced (or the tieoff location raised) to minimize free fall distance, or
the lanyard or lifeline should be replaced by one
which has an appropriately incorporated connector
to eliminate the need for a knot.
(4) Tie-off of a rope lanyard or lifeline around an H or
I beam or similar support can reduce its strength
as much as 70 percent due to the cutting action of
the beam edges. Therefore, use should be made
of a webbing lanyard or wire core lifeline around
the beam; or the lanyard or lifeline should be
protected from the edge; or free fall distance
should be greatly minimized.
(5) Tie-off where the line passes over or around rough
or sharp surfaces reduces strength drastically.
Such a tie-off should be avoided or an alternative
tie-off rigging should be used. Such alternatives
may include use of a snaphook/dee ring
connection, wire rope tie-off, an effective padding
of the surfaces, or an abrasion-resistance strap
around or over the problem surface.
(6) Horizontal lifelines may, depending on their
geometry and angle of sag, be subjected to
greater loads than the impact load imposed by an
attached component. When the angle of horizontal
lifeline sag is less than 30 degrees, the impact
force imparted to the lifeline by an attached
lanyard is greatly amplified. For example, with a
sag angle of 15 degrees, the force amplification is
about 2:1 and at 5 degrees sag, it is about 6:1.
Depending on the angle of the sag, and the lines
elasticity, the strength of the horizontal lifeline and
the anchorages to which it is attached should be
increased a number of times over that of the
lanyard. Extreme care should be taken in
considering a horizontal lifeline for multiple tie-offs.
The reason for this is that in multiple tie-offs to a
horizontal lifeline, if one employee falls, the
movement of the falling employee and the
horizontal lifeline during arrest of the fall may
cause other employees to fall also. Horizontal
lifeline and anchorage strength should be
increased for each additional employee to be tied
off. For these and other reasons, the design of
systems using horizontal lifelines must be done by
qualified persons. Testing of installed lifelines and
anchors prior to use is recommended.
(7) The strength of an eye-bolt is rated along the axis
of the bolt and its strength is greatly reduced if the
force is applied at an angle to this axis (in the
direction of shear). Also, care should be exercised
in selecting the proper diameter of the eye to avoid
accidental disengagement of snap-hooks not
designed to be compatible for the connection.
(8) Due to the significant reduction in the strength of
the lifeline/lanyard (in some cases, as much as a
18
70 percent reduction), the sliding hitch knot
(prusik) should not be used for lifeline/ lanyard
connections except in emergency situations where
no other available system is practical. The oneand-one sliding hitch knot should never be used
because it is unreliable in stopping a fall. The twoand-two, or three-and- three knot (preferable)
may be used in emergency situations; however,
care should be taken to limit free fall distance to a
minimum because of reduced lifeline/lanyard
strength.
(i) Vertical lifeline considerations. As required by
the standard, each employee must have a separate lifeline
[except employees engaged in constructing elevator shafts
who are permitted to have two employees on one lifeline]
when the lifeline is vertical. The reason for this is that in
multiple tie-offs to a single lifeline, if one employee falls, the
movement of the lifeline during the arrest of the fall may
pull other employees lanyards, causing them to fall as well.
(j) Snap-hook considerations. (1) Although not
required by this standard for all connections until January
1, 1998, locking snaphooks designed for connection to
suitable objects (of sufficient strength) are highly
recommended in lieu of the nonlocking type. Locking
snaphooks incorporate a positive locking mechanism in
addition to the spring loaded keeper, which will not allow
the keeper to open under moderate pressure without
someone first releasing the mechanism. Such a feature,
properly designed, effectively prevents roll-out from
occurring.
(2) As required by 1926.502(d)(6), the following
connections must be avoided (unless properly
designed locking snaphooks are used) because
they are conditions which can result in roll-out
when a nonlocking snaphook is used:
(i) Direct connection of a snaphook to a
horizontal lifeline.
(ii) Two (or more) snaphooks connected to one
dee-ring.
(iii) Two snaphooks connected to each other.
(iv) A snaphook connected back on its integral
lanyard.
(v) A snaphook connected to a webbing loop or
webbing lanyard.
(vi) Improper dimensions of the dee-ring, rebar,
or other connection point in relation to the
snaphook dimensions which would allow the
snaphook keeper to be depressed by a
turning motion of the snaphook.
(k) Free fall considerations. The employer and
employee should at all times be aware that a systems
maximum arresting force is evaluated under normal use
conditions established by the manufacturer, and in no case
using a free fall distance in excess of 6 feet (1.8 m). A few
extra feet of free fall can significantly increase the arresting
force on the employee, possibly to the point of causing
injury. Because of this, the free fall distance should be kept
at a minimum, and, as required by the standard, in no case
greater than 6 feet (1.8 m). To help assure this, the tie-off
attachment point to the lifeline or anchor should be located
at or above the connection point of the fall arrest equipment
to belt or harness. (Since otherwise additional free fall

distance is added to the length of the connecting means
(i.e. lanyard)). Attaching to the working surface will often
result in a free fall greater than 6 feet (1.8 m). For instance,
if a 6 foot (1.8 m) lanyard is used, the total free fall distance
will be the distance from the working level to the body belt
(or harness) attachment point plus the 6 feet (1.8 m) of
lanyard length. Another important consideration is that the
arresting force which the fall system must withstand also
goes up with greater distances of free fall, possibly
exceeding the strength of the system.
(l) Elongation and deceleration distance
considerations. Other factors involved in a proper tieoff
are elongation and deceleration distance. During the
arresting of a fall, a lanyard will experience a length of
stretching or elongation, whereas activation of a
deceleration device will result in a certain stopping
distance. These distances should be available with the
lanyard or devices instructions and must be added to the
free fall distance to arrive at the total fall distance before
and employee is fully stopped. The additional stopping
distance may be very significant if the lanyard or
deceleration device is attached near or at the end of a long
lifeline, which may itself add considerable distance due to
its own elongation. As required by the standard, sufficient
distance to allow for all of these factors must also be
maintained between the employee and obstructions below,
to prevent an injury due to impact before the system fully
arrests the fall. In addition, a minimum of 12 feet (3.7 m) of
lifeline should be allowed below the securing point of a
rope grab type deceleration device, and the end terminated
to prevent the device from sliding off the lifeline.
Alternatively, the lifeline should extend to the ground or the
next working level below. These measures are suggested
to prevent the worker from inadvertently moving past the
end of the lifeline and having the rope grab become
disengaged from the lifeline.
(m) Obstruction considerations. The location of
the tie-off should also consider the hazard of obstructions
in the potential fall path of the employee. Tie-offs which
minimize the possibilities of exaggerated swinging should
be considered. In addition, when a body belt is used, the
employees body will go through a horizontal position to a
jack-knifed position during the arrest of all falls. Thus,
obstructions which might interfere with this motion should
be avoided or a severe injury could occur.
(n) Other considerations. Because of the design of
some personal fall arrest systems, additional
considerations may be required for proper tie-off. For
example, heavy deceleration devices of the self-retracting
type should be secured overhead in order to avoid the
weight of the device having to be supported by the
employee. Also, if self-retracting equipment is connected to
a horizontal lifeline, the sag in the lifeline should be
minimized to prevent the device from sliding down the
lifeline to a position which creates a swing hazard during
fall arrest. In all cases, manufacturers instructions should
be followed.
*[59 FR 40743, Aug. 9, 1994; 60 FR 5131, Jan. 26, 1995]
19
APPENDIX D
Positioning Device Systems Non-Mandatory
Guidelines for Complying with 1926.502(e)
APPENDIX E
Sample Fall Protection Plan Non-Mandatory
Guidelines for Complying with 1926.502(k)
I. Testing Methods for Positioning Device Systems

This appendix serves as a non-mandatory guideline to
assist employers in complying with the requirements for
positioning device systems in 1926.502(e). Paragraphs (b),
(c), (d) and (e) of Appendix C of subpart M relating to
1926.502(d) Personal Fall Arrest Systems set forth test
procedures which may be used, along with the procedures
listed below, to determine compliance with the
requirements for positioning device systems in
1926.502(e)(3) and (4) of Subpart M.
(a) General. (1) Single strap positioning devices shall
have one end attached to a fixed anchorage and the other
end connected to a body belt or harness in the same
manner as they would be used to protect employees.
Double strap positioning devices, similar to window
cleaners belts, shall have one end of the strap attached to
a fixed anchorage and the other end shall hang free. The
body belt or harness shall be attached to the strap in the
same manner as it would be used to protect employees.
The two strap ends shall be adjusted to their maximum
span.
(2) The fixed anchorage shall be rigid, and shall not
have a deflection greater than .04 inches (1 mm)
when a force of 2,250 pounds (10 kN) is applied.
(3) During the testing of all systems, a test weight of
250 pounds plus or minus 3 pounds (113 kg plus
or minus 1.6 kg) shall be used. The weight shall be
a rigid object with a girth of 38 inches plus or
minus 4 inches (96 cm plus or minus 10 cm).
(4) Each test shall consist of dropping the specified
weight one time without failure of the system being
tested. A new system shall be used for each test.
(5) The test weight for each test shall be hoisted
exactly 4 feet (1.2 m above its at rest position),
and shall be dropped so as to permit a vertical free
fall of 4 feet (1.2 m).
(6) The test is failed whenever any breakage or
slippage occurs which permits the weight to fall
free of the system.
(7) Following the test, the system need not be capable
of further operation; however, all such incapacities
shall be readily apparent.
Employers engaged in leading edge work, precast concrete

construction work and residential construction work who
can demonstrate that it is infeasible or creates a greater
hazard to use conventional fall protection systems must
develop and follow a fall protection plan. Below are sample
fall protection plans developed for precast concrete
construction and residential work that could be tailored to
be site specific for other precast concrete or residential
jobsite. This sample plan can be modified to be used for
other work involving leading edge work. The sample plan
outlines the elements that must be addressed in any
protection plan. The reasons outlined in this sample fall
protection plan are for illustrative purposes only and are not
necessarily a valid, acceptable rationale (unless the
conditions at the job site are the same as those covered by
these sample plans) for not using conventional fall
protection systems for a particular precast concrete or
residential construction worksite. However, the sample
plans provide guidance to employers on the type of
information that is required to be discussed in fall protection
plans.
II. Inspection Considerations.

As required in 1926.502(e)(5), positioning device systems
must be regularly inspected. Any component with any
significant defect, such as cuts, tears, abrasions, mold, or
undue stretching; alterations or additions which might affect
its efficiency; damage due to deterioration; contact with fire,
acids, or other corrosives; distorted hooks or fault hook
springs; tongues unfitted to the shoulder of buckets; loose
or damaged mountings; non-functioning parts; or wearing
or internal deterioration in the ropes must be withdrawn
from service immediately, and should be tagged or marked
as unusable, or destroyed.
*[59 FR 40746, Aug. 9, 1994; 60 FR 5131, Jan. 26,
1995]
Sample Fall Protection Plans

Fall Protection Plan For Precast/Prestress Concrete
Structures
This fall protection plan is specific for the following
project:
Location of job
Erecting company
Date plan prepared or modified
Plan prepared by
Plan approved by
Plan supervised by
The following fall protection plan is a sample program
prepared for the prevention of injuries associated with falls.
A fall protection plan must be developed and evaluated on
a site by site basis. It is recommended that erectors
discuss the written fall protection plan with their OSHA area
office prior to going on a jobsite.
I. Statement of Company Policy
(Company Name) is dedicated to the protection of its
employees from on-the-job injuries. All employees of
(Company Name) have the responsibility to work safely on
the job. The purpose of this plan is: (a) To supplement our
standard safety policy by providing safety standards
specifically designed to cover fall protection on this job and;
(b) to ensure that each employee is trained and made
aware of the safety provisions which are to be implemented
by this plan prior to the start of erection. This fall protection
plan addresses the use of other than conventional fall
protection at a number of areas on the project, as well as
identifying specific activities that require non-conventional
means of fall protection. These areas include:
a. Connecting activity (point of erection).
b. Leading edge work.
20
c. Unprotected sides or edge.
d. Grouting.
This plan is designed to enable employers and
employees to recognize the fall hazards on this job and to
establish the procedures that are to be followed in order to
prevent falls to lower levels or through holes and openings
in walking/working surfaces. Each employee will be trained
in these procedures and strictly adhere to them except
when doing so would expose the employee to a greater
hazard. If, in the employees opinion, this is the case, the
employee is to notify the foreman of the concern and the
concern addressed before proceeding.
Safety policy and procedure on any one project cannot
be administered, implemented, monitored and enforced by
any one individual. The total objective of a safe, accident
free work environment can only be accomplished by a
dedicated, concerted effort by every individual involved with
the project from management down to the last employee.
Each employee must understand their value to the
company; the costs of accident, both monetary, physical,
and emotional; the objective of the safety policy and
procedures; the safety rules that apply to the safety policy
and procedures; and what their individual role is in
administering, implementing, monitoring, and compliance of
their safety policy and procedures. This allows for a more
personal approach to compliance through planning,
training, understanding and cooperative effort, rather than
by strict enforcement. If for any reason an unsafe act
persists, strict enforcement will be implemented.
It is the responsibility of (name of competent person) to
implement this fall protection plan. (Name of competent
person) is responsible for continual observational safety
checks of their work operations and to enforce the safety
policy and procedures. The foreman also is responsible to
correct any unsafe acts or conditions immediately. It is the
responsibility of the employee to understand and adhere to
the procedures of this plan and to follow the instructions of
the foreman. It is also the responsibility of the employee to
bring to managements attention any unsafe or hazardous
conditions or acts that may cause injury to either
themselves or any other employees. Any changes to this
fall protection plan must be approved by (name of Qualified
Person).
II. Fall Protection Systems to Be Used on This Project
Where conventional fall protection is infeasible or
creates a greater hazard at the leading edge and during
initial connecting activity, we plan to do this work using a
safety monitoring system and expose only a minimum
number of employees for the time necessary to actually
accomplish the job. The maximum number of workers to be
monitored by one safety monitor is six (6). We are
designating the following trained employees as designated
erectors and they are permitted to enter the controlled
access zones and work without the use of conventional fall
protection.
Safety monitor:
Designated erector:
Designated erector:
Designated erector:
Designated erector:
Designated erector:
Designated erector:
The safety monitor shall be identified by wearing an
orange hard hat. The designated erectors will be identified
by one of the following methods:
1. They will wear a blue colored arm band, or
2. They will wear a blue colored hard hat, or
3. They will wear a blue colored vest.
Only individuals with the appropriate experience, skills,
and training will be working as designated erectors. All
employees that will be working as designated erectors
under the safety monitoring system shall have been trained
and instructed in the following areas:
1. Recognition of the fall hazards in the work area (at
the leading edge and when making initial
connections-point of erection).
2. Avoidance of fall hazards using established work
practices which have been made known to the
employees.
3. Recognition of unsafe practices or working
conditions that could lead to a fall, such as windy
conditions.
4. The function, use, and operation of safety
monitoring systems, guardrail systems, body
belt/harness systems, control zones and other
protection to be used.
5. The correct procedure for erecting, maintaining,
disassembling and inspecting the system(s) to be
used.
6. Knowledge of construction sequence or the
erection plan.
A conference will take place prior to starting work
involving all members of the erection crew, crane crew and
supervisors of any other concerned contractors. This
conference will be conducted by the precast concrete
erection supervisor in charge of the project. During the prework conference, erection procedures and sequences to
this job will be thoroughly discussed and safety practices to
be used throughout the project will be specified. Further, all
personnel will be informed that the controlled access zones
are off limits to all personnel other than those designated
erectors specifically trained to work in that area.
Safety Monitoring System
A safety monitoring system means a fall protection
system in which a competent person is responsible for
recognizing and warning employees of fall hazards. The
duties of the safety monitor are to:
1. Warn by voice when approaching the open edge in
an unsafe manner.
2. Warn by voice if there is a dangerous situation
developing which cannot be seen by another
person involved with product placement, such as a
member getting out of control.
3. Make the designated erectors aware they are in a
dangerous area.
4. Be competent in recognizing fall hazards.
5. Warn employees when they appear to be unaware
of a fall hazard or are acting in an unsafe manner.
6. Be on the same walking/working surface as the
monitored employees and within visual sighting
distance of the monitored employees.
21
7.
Be close enough to communicate orally with the

employees.
8. Not allow other responsibilities to encumber
monitoring. If the safety monitor shall (1) stop the
erection process; and (2) turn over other
responsibilities to a designated erector; or (3) turn
over the safety monitoring function to another
designated, competent person. The safety
monitoring system shall not be used when the
wind is strong enough to cause loads with large
surface areas to swing out of radius, or result in
loss of control of the load, or when weather
conditions cause the walking-working surfaces to
become icy or slippery.
Control Zone System
A controlled access zone means an area designated
and clearly marked, in which leading edge work may take
place without the use of guardrail, safety net or personal
fall arrest systems to protect the employees in the area.
Control zone systems shall comply with the following
provisions:
1. When used to control access to areas where
leading edge and other operations are taking place
the controlled access zone shall be defined by a
control line or by any other means that restricts
access.
When control files are used, they shall be erected
not less than 6 feet (1.8 m) nor more than 60 feet
(18 m) or half the length of the member being
erected, whichever is less, from the leading edge.
2. The control line shall extend along the entire
length of the unprotected or leading edge and shall
be approximately parallel to the unprotected or
leading edge.
3. The control line shall be connected on each side to
a guardrail system or wall.
4. Control lines shall consist of ropes, wires, tapes, or
equivalent materials, and supporting stanchions as
follows:
5. Each line shall be flagged or otherwise clearly
marked at not more than 6-foot (1.8 m) intervals
with high-visibility material.
6. Each line shall be rigged and supported in such a
way that its lowest point (including sag) is not less
than 39 inches (1 m) from the walking/ working
surface and its highest point is not more than 45
inches (1.3 m) from the walking/working surface.
7. Each line shall have a minimum breaking strength
of 200 pounds (.88 kN).
Holes All openings greater than 12 in. x 12 in. will
have perimeter guarding or covering. All predetermined
holes will have the plywood covers made in the precasters
yard and shipped with the member to the jobsite. Prior to
cutting holes on the job, proper protection for the hole must
be provided to protect the workers. Perimeter guarding or
covers will not be removed without the approval of the
erection foreman.
Precast concrete column erection through the existing
deck requires that many holes be provided through this
deck. These are to be covered and protected. Except for
the opening being currently used to erect a column, all
opening protection is left undisturbed. The opening being

uncovered to erect a column will become part of the point
of erection and will be addressed as part of this fall
protection plan. This uncovering is to be done at the
erection foremans direction and will only occur immediately
prior to feeding the column through the opening. Once the
end of the column is through the slab opening, there will no
longer exist a fall hazard at this location.
III. Implementation of Fall Protection Plan
The structure being erected is a multistory total precast
concrete building consisting of columns, beams, wall
panels and hollow core slabs and double tee floor and roof
members.
The following is a list of the products and erection
situations on this job:
Columns For columns 10 ft to 36 ft long, employees
disconnecting crane hooks from columns will work from a
ladder and wear a body belt/harness with lanyard and be
tied off when both hands are needed to disconnect. For
tying off, a vertical lifeline will be connected to the lifting
eye at the top of the column, prior to lifting, to be used with
a manually operated or mobile rope grab. For columns too
high for the use of a ladder, 36 ft and higher, an added
cable will be used to reduce the height of the disconnecting
point so that a ladder can be used. This cable will be left in
place until a point in erection that it can be removed safely.
In some cases, columns will be unhooked from the crane
by using an erection tube or shackle with a pull pin which is
released from the ground after the column is stabilized.
The column will be adequately connected and/or braced
to safely support the weight of the ladder with an employee
on it.
Inverted Tee Beams Employees erecting inverted tee
beams, at a height of 6 to 40 ft, will erect the beam, make
initial connections, and final alignment from a ladder. If the
employee needs to reach over the side of the beam to bar
or make an adjustment to the alignment of the beam, they
will mount the beam and be tied off to the lifting device in
the beam after ensuring the load has been stabilized on its
bearing. To disconnect the crane from the beam an
employee will stand a ladder against the beam. Because
the use of ladders is not practical at heights above 40 ft,
beams will be initially placed with the use of tag lines and
their final alignment made by a person on a manlift or
similar employee positioning systems.
Spandrel Beams Spandrel beams at the exterior of
the building will be aligned as closely as possible with the
use of tag lines with the final placement of the spandrel
beam made from a ladder at the open end of the structure.
A ladder will be used to make the initial connections and a
ladder will be used to disconnect the crane. The other end
of the beam will be placed by the designated erector from
the double tee deck under the observation of the safety
monitor.
The beams will be adequately connected and/or braced
to safely support the weight of a ladder with an employee
on it.
Floor and Roof Members During installation of the
precast concrete floor and/or roof members, the work deck
continuously increases in area as more and more units are
22
being erected and positioned. Thus, the unprotected
floor/roof perimeter is constantly modified with the leading
edge changing location as each member is installed. The
fall protection for workers at the leading edge shall be
assured by properly constructed and maintained control
zone lines not more than 60 ft away from the leading edge
supplemented by a safety monitoring system to ensure the
safety of all designated erectors working within the area
defined by the control zone lines.
The hollow core slabs erected on the masonry portion of
the building will be erected and grouted using the safety
monitoring system. Grout will be placed in the space
between the end of the slab and face shell of the concrete
masonry by dumping from a wheelbarrow. The grout in the
keyways between the slabs will be dumped from a
wheelbarrow and then spread with long handled tools,
allowing the worker to stand erect facing toward the
unprotected edge and back from any work deck edge.
Whenever possible, the designated erectors will
approach the incoming member at the leading edge only
after it is below waist height so that the member itself
provides protection against falls.
Except for the situations described below, when the
arriving floor or roof member is within 2 to 3 inches of its
final position, the designated erectors can then proceed to
their position of erection at each end of the member under
control of the safety monitor. Crane hooks will be unhooked
from double tee members by designated erectors under the
direction and supervision of the safety monitor.
Designated erectors, while waiting for the next floor or
roof member, will be constantly under the control of the
safety monitor for fall protection and are directed to stay a
minimum of six (6) ft from the edge. In the event a
designated erector must move from one end of a member,
which has just been placed at the leading edge, they must
first move away from the leading edge a minimum of six (6)
ft and then progress to the other end while maintaining the
minimum distance of six (6) ft at all times.
Erection of double tees, where conditions require
bearing of one end into a closed pocket and the other end
on a beam ledge, restricting the tee legs from going directly
into the pockets, require special considerations. The tee
legs that are to bear in the closed pocket must hang lower
than those at the beam bearing. The double tee will be
two-lined in order to elevate one end higher than the other
to allow for the low end to be ducked into the closed pocket
using the following procedure.
The double tee will be rigged with a standard fourway
spreader off of the main load line. An additional choker will
be attached to the married point of the twolegged spreader
at the end of the tee that is to be elevated. The double tee
will be hoisted with the main load line and swung into a
position and stabilized, the whip line load block will be
lowered to just above the tee deck. At this time, two
erectors will walk out on the suspended tee deck at
midspan of the tee member and pull the load block to the
end of the tee to be elevated and attach the additional
choker to the load block. The possibility of entanglement
with the crane lines and other obstacles during this two
lining process while raising and lowering the crane block on
that second line could be hazardous to an encumbered
employee. Therefore, the designated erectors will not tie off

during any part of this process. While the designated
erectors are on the double tee, the safety monitoring
system will be used. After attaching the choker, the two
erectors then step back on the previously erected tee deck
and signal the crane operator to hoist the load with the
whip line to the elevation that will allow for enough
clearance to let the low end tee legs slide into the pockets
when the main load line is lowered. The erector, who is
handling the lowered end of the tee at the closed pocket
bearing, will step out on the suspended tee. An erection bar
will then be placed between the end of the tee leg and the
inside face of the pocketed spandrel member. The tee is
barred away from the pocketed member to reduce the
friction and lateral force against the pocketed member. As
the tee is being lowered, the other erector remains on the
tee which was previously erected to handle the other end.
At this point the tee is slowly lowered by the crane to a
point where the tee legs can freely slide into the pockets.
The erector working the lowered end of the tee must keep
pressure on the bar between the tee and the face of the
pocketed spandrel member to very gradually let the tee
legs slide into the pocket to its proper bearing dimension.
The tee is then slowly lowered into its final erected position.
The designated erector should be allowed onto the
suspended double tee, otherwise there is no control over
the horizontal movement of the double tee and this
movement could knock the spandrell off of its bearing or
the column out of plumb. The control necessary to prevent
hitting the spandrel can only be done safely from the top of
the double tee being erected.
Loadbearing Wall Panels The erection of the
loadbearing wall panels on the elevated decks requires the
use of a safety monitor and a controlled access zone that is
a minimum of 25 ft and a maximum of the length of the
wall panels away from the unprotected edge, so that
designated erectors can move freely and unencumbered
when receiving the panels. Bracing, if required for stability,
will be installed by ladder. After the braces are secured, the
crane will be disconnected from the wall by using a ladder.
The wall to wall connections will also be performed from a
ladder.
Non-Loadbearing Panels (Cladding) The locating of
survey lines, panel layout and other installation
prerequisites (prewelding, etc.) for non-loadbearing panels
(cladding) will not commence until floor perimeter and floor
openings have been protected. In some areas, it is
necessary because of panel configuration to remove the
perimeter protection as the cladding is being installed.
Removal of perimeter protection will be performed on a bay
to bay basis, just ahead of cladding erection to minimize
temporarily unprotected floor edges. Those workers within
6 ft of the edge, receiving and positioning the cladding
when the perimeter protection is removed shall be tied off.
Detailing Employees exposed to falls of six (6) feet or
more to lower levels, who are not actively engaged in
leading edge work or connecting activity, such as welding,
bolting, cutting, bracing, guying, patching, painting or other
operations, and who are working less than six (6) ft. from
an unprotected edge will be tied off at all times or
guardrails will be installed. Employees engaged in these
23
activities but who are more than six (6) ft. from an
unprotected edge as defined by the control zone lines, do
not require fall protection but a warning line or control lines
must be erected to remind employees they are
approaching an area where fall protection is required.
3.
IV. Conventional Fall Protection Considered for the

Point of Erection or Leading Edge Erection Operations
A. Personal Fall Arrest Systems
In this particular erection sequence and procedure,
personal fall arrest systems requiring body belt/harness
systems, lifelines and lanyards will not reduce possible
hazards to workers and will create offsetting hazards during
their usage at the leading edge of precast/prestressed
concrete construction.
Leading edge erection and initial connections are
conducted by employees who are specifically trained to do
this type of work and are trained to recognize the fall
hazards. The nature of such work normally exposes the
employee to the fall hazard for a short period of time and
installation of fall protection systems for a short duration is
not feasible because it exposes the installers of the system
to the same fall hazard, but for a longer period of time.
1. It is necessary that the employee be able to move
freely without encumbrance in order to guide the
sections of precast concrete into their final position
without having lifelines attached which will restrict
the employees ability to move about at the point of
erection.
2. A typical procedure requires 2 or more workers to
maneuver around each other as a concrete
member is positioned to fit into the structure. If
they are each attached to a lifeline, part of their
attention must be diverted from their main task of
positioning a member weighing several tons to the
task of avoiding entanglements of their lifelines or
avoiding tripping over lanyards. Therefore, if these
workers are attached to lanyards, more fall
potential would result than from not using such a
device.
In this specific erection sequence and procedure,
retractable lifelines do not solve the problem of two
workers becoming tangled. In fact, such a tangle
could prevent the lifeline from retracting as the
worker moved, thus potentially exposing the
worker to a fall greater than 6 ft. Also, a worker
crossing over the lifeline of another worker can
create a hazard because the movement of one
person can unbalance the other. In the event of a
fall by one person there is a likelihood that the
other person will be caused to fall as well. In
addition, if contamination such as grout (during
hollow core grouting) enters the retractable
housing it can cause excessive wear and damage
to the device and could clog the retracting
mechanism as the lanyard is dragged across the
deck. Obstructing the cable orifice can defeat the
devices shock absorbing function, produce cable
slack and damage, and adversely affect cable
extraction and retraction.
4.
Employees tied to a lifeline can be trapped and

crushed by moving structural members if the
employee becomes restrained by the lanyard or
retractable lifeline and cannot get out of the path of
the moving load. The sudden movement of a
precast concrete member being raised by a crane
can be caused by a number of factors. When this
happens, a connector may immediately have to
move a considerable distance to avoid injury. If a
tied off body belt/harness is being used, the
connector could be trapped. Therefore, there is a
greater risk of injury if the connector is tied to the
structure for this specific erection sequence and
procedure.
When necessary to move away from a retractable
device, the worker cannot move at a rate greater
than the device locking speed typically 3.5 to 4.5
ft/sec. When moving toward the device it is
necessary to move at a rate which does not permit
cable slack to build up. This slack may cause
cable retraction acceleration and cause a worker
to lose their balance by applying a higher than
normal jerking force on the body when the cable
suddenly becomes taut after building up
momentum. This slack can also cause damage to
the internal spring-loaded drum, uneven coiling of
cable on the drum, and possible cable damage.
The factors causing sudden movements for this
location include:
(a) Cranes
(1) Operator error.
(2) Site conditions (soft or unstable ground).
(3) Mechanical failure.
(4) Structural failure.
(5) Rigging failure.
(6) Crane signal/radio communication failure.
(b) Weather Conditions
(1) Wind (strong wind/sudden gusting)
particularly a problem with the large
surface areas of precast concrete
members.
(2) Snow/rain (visibility).
(3) Fog (visibility).
(4) Cold causing slowed reactions or
mechanical problems.
(c) Structure/Product Conditions
(1) Lifting Eye failure.
(2) Bearing failure or slippage.
(3) Structure shifting.
(4) Bracing failure.
(5) Product failure.
(d) Human error
(1) Incorrect tag line procedure.
(2) Tag line hang-up.
(3) Incorrect or misunderstood crane signals.
(4) Misjudged elevation of member.
(5) Misjudged speed of member.
(6) Misjudged angle of member.
Anchorages or special attachment points could be
cast into the precast concrete members if sufficient
preplanning and consideration of erectors position
24
5.
is done before the members are cast. Any hole or

other attachment must be approved by the
engineer who designed the member. It is possible
that some design restrictions will not allow a
member to be weakened by an additional hole;
however, it is anticipated that such situations
would be the exception, not the rule. Attachment
points, other than on the deck surface, will require
removal and/or patching. In order to remove and/or
patch these points, requires the employee to be
exposed to an additional fall hazard at an
unprotected perimeter. The fact that attachment
points could be available anywhere on the
structure does not eliminate the hazards of using
these points for tying off as discussed above. A
logical point for tying off on double tees would be
using the lifting loops, except that they must be cut
off to eliminate a tripping hazard at an appropriate
time.
Providing attachment at a point above the
walking/working surface would also create fall
exposures for employees installing their devices.
Final positioning of a precast concrete member
requires it to be moved in such a way that it must
pass through the area that would be occupied by
the lifeline and the lanyards attached to the point
above. Resulting entanglements of lifelines and
lanyards on a moving member could pull
employees from the work surface. Also, the
structure is being created and, in most cases,
there is no structure above the members being
placed.
(a) Temporary structural supports, installed to
provide attaching points for lifelines limit the
space which is essential for orderly
positioning, alignment and placement of the
precast concrete members. To keep the
lanyards a reasonable and manageable
length, lifeline supports would necessarily
need to be in proximity to the positioning
process. A sudden shift of the precast
concrete member being positioned because
of wind pressure or crane movement could
make it strike the temporary supporting
structure, moving it suddenly and causing tied
off employees to fall.
(b) The time in manhours which would be
expended in placing and maintaining
temporary structural supports for lifeline
attaching points could exceed the expended
manhours involved in placing the precast
concrete members. No protection could be
provided for the employees erecting the
temporary structural supports and these
supports would have to be moved for each
successive step in the construction process,
thus greatly increasing the employees
exposure to the fall hazard.
(c) The use of a cable strung horizontally
between two columns to provide tie off lines
for erecting or walking a beam for connecting
6.
work is not feasible and creates a greater

hazard on this multi-story building for the
following reasons:
(1) If a connector is to use such a line, it must
be installed between the two columns. To
perform this installation requires an
erector to have more fall exposure time
attaching the cable to the columns than
would be spent to make the beam to
column connection itself.
(2) If such a line is to be installed so that an
erector can walk along a beam, it must be
overhead or below him. For example, if a
connector must walk along a 24 in. wide
beam, the presence of a line next to the
connector at waist level, attached directly
to the columns, would prevent the
connector from centering their weight over
the beam and balancing themselves.
Installing the line above the connector
might be possible on the first level of a
two-story column; however, the column
may extend only a few feet above the floor
level at the second level or be flush with
the floor level. Attaching the line to the
side of the beam could be a solution;
however, it would require the connector to
attach the lanyard below foot level which
would most likely extend a fall farther than
6 ft.
(3) When lines are strung over every beam, it
becomes more and more difficult for the
crane operator to lower a precast concrete
member into position without the member
becoming fouled. Should the member
become entangled, it could easily dislodge
the line from a column. If a worker is tied
to it at the time, a fall could be caused.
The ANSI A10.14-1991 American National
Standard for Construction and Demolition
Operations Requirements for Safety Belts,
Harnesses,
Lanyards
and
Lifelines
for
Construction and Demolition Use, states that the
anchor point of a lanyard or deceleration device
should, if possible, be located above the wearers
belt or harness attachment. ANSI A10.14 also
states that a suitable anchorage point is one which
is located as high as possible to prevent contact
with an obstruction below should the worker fall.
Most manufacturers also warn in the users
handbook that the safety block/retractable lifeline
must be positioned above the D-ring (above the
work space of the intended user) and OSHA
recommends that fall arrest and restraint
equipment be used in accordance with the
manufacturers instructions. Attachment of a
retractable device to a horizontal cable near floor
level or using the inserts in the floor or roof
members may result in increased free fall due to
the dorsal D-ring of the fullbody harness riding
higher than the attachment point of the snaphook
25
to the cable or insert (e.g., 6 foot tall worker with a
dorsal D-ring at 5 feet above the floor or surface,
reduces the working length to only one foot, by
placing the anchorage five feet away from the fall
hazard). In addition, impact loads may exceed
maximum fall arrest forces (MAF) because the fall
arrest D-ring would be 4 to 5 feet higher than the
safety block/retractable lifeline anchored to the
walking-working surface; and the potential for
swing hazards is increased. Manufacturers also
require that workers not work at a level where the
point of snaphook attachment to the body harness
is above the device because this will increase the
free fall distance and the deceleration distance and
will cause higher forces on the body in the event of
an accidental fall. Manufacturers recommend an
anchorage for the retractable lifeline which is
immovably fixed in space and is independent of
the users support systems. A moveable
anchorage is one which can be moved around
(such as equipment or wheeled vehicles) or which
can deflect substantially under shock loading (such
as a horizontal cable or very flexible beam). In the
case of a very flexible anchorage, a shock load
applied to the anchorage during fall arrest can
cause oscillation of the flexible anchorage such
that the retractable brake mechanism may
undergo
one
or
more
cycles
of
locking/unlocking/locking (ratchet effect) until the
anchorage deflection is dampened. Therefore, use
of a moveable anchorage involves critical
engineering and safety factors and should only be
considered after fixed anchorage has been
determined to be not feasible.
Horizontal cables used as an anchorage present
an additional hazard due to amplification of the
horizontal component of maximum arrest force (of
a fall) transmitted to the points where the
horizontal cable is attached to the structure. This
amplification is due to the angle of sag of a
horizontal cable and is most severe for small
angles of sag. For a cable sag angle of 2 degrees
the horizontal force on the points of cable
attachment can be amplified by a factor of 15.
It is also necessary to install the retractable device
vertically overhead to minimize swing falls. If an
object is in the workers swing path (or that of the
cable) hazardous situations exist: (1) due to the
swing, horizontal speed of the user may be high
enough to cause injury when an obstacle in the
swing fall path is struck by either the user or the
cable; (2) the total vertical fall distance of the user
may be much greater than if the user had fallen
only vertically without a swing fall path.
With retractable lines, overconfidence may cause
the worker to engage in inappropriate behavior,
such as approaching the perimeter of a floor or
roof at a distance appreciably greater than the
shortest distance between the anchorage point
and the leading edge. Though the retractable
lifeline may arrest a workers fall before he or she
7.
has fallen a few feet, the lifeline may drag along

the edge of the floor or beam and swing the worker
like a pendulum until the line has moved to a
position where the distance between the
anchorage point and floor edge is the shortest
distance
between
those
two
points.
Accompanying this pendulum swing is a lowering
of the worker, with the attendant danger that he or
she may violently impact the floor or some
obstruction below.
The risk of a cable breaking is increased if a
lifeline is dragged sideways across the rough
surface or edge of a concrete member at the same
moment that the lifeline is being subjected to a
maximum impact loading during a fall. The typical
3/16 in. cable in a retractable lifeline has a
breaking strength of from 3000 to 3700 lbs.
The competent person, who can take into account
the specialized operations being performed on this
project, should determine when and where a
designated erector cannot use a personal fall
arrest system.
B. Safety Net Systems

The nature of this particular precast concrete erection
worksite precludes the safe use of safety nets where point
of erection or leading edge work must take place.
1. To install safety nets in the interior high bay of the
single story portion of the building poses rigging
attachment problems. Structural members do not
exist to which supporting devices for nets can be
attached in the area where protection is required.
As the erection operation advances, the location of
point of erection or leading edge work changes
constantly as each member is attached to the
structure. Due to this constant change it is not
feasible to set net sections and build separate
structures to support the nets.
2. The nature of the erection process for the precast
concrete members is such that an installed net
would protect workers as they position and secure
only one structural member. After each member is
stabilized the net would have to be moved to a
new location (this could mean a move of 8 to 10 ft
or the possibility of a move to a different level or
area of the structure) to protect workers placing
the next piece in the construction sequence. The
result would be the installation and dismantling of
safety nets repeatedly throughout the normal work
day. As the time necessary to install a net, test,
and remove it is significantly greater than the time
necessary to position and secure a precast
concrete member, the exposure time for the
worker installing the safety net would be far longer
than for the workers whom the net is intended to
protect. The time exposure repeats itself each time
the nets and supporting hardware must be moved
laterally or upward to provide protection at the
point of erection or leading edge.
3. Strict interpretation of 1926.502(c) requires that
operations shall not be undertaken until the net is
26
4.
5.
6.
7.
in place and has been tested. With the point of

erection constantly changing, the time necessary
to install and test a safety net significantly exceeds
the time necessary to position and secure the
concrete member.
Use of safety nets on exposed perimeter wall
openings and opensided floors, causes attachment
points to be left in architectural concrete which
must be patched and filled with matching material
after the net supporting hardware is removed. In
order to patch these openings, additional numbers
of employees must be suspended by swing
stages, boatswain chairs or other devices, thereby
increasing the amount of fall exposure time to
employees.
Installed safety nets pose an additional hazard at
the perimeter of the erected structure where
limited space is available in which members can
be turned after being lifted from the ground by the
crane. There would be a high probability that the
member being lifted could become entangled in
net hardware, cables, etc.
The use of safety nets where structural wall panels
are being erected would prevent movement of
panels to point of installation. To be effective, nets
would necessarily have to provide protection
across the area where structural supporting wall
panels would be set and plumbed before roof units
could be placed.
Use of a tower crane for the erection of the high
rise portion of the structure poses a particular
hazard in that the crane operator cannot see or
judge the proximity of the load in relation to the
structure or nets. If the signaler is looking through
nets and supporting structural devices while giving
instructions to the crane operator, it is not possible
to judge precise relationships between the load
and the structure itself or to nets and supporting
structural devices. This could cause the load to
become entangled in the net or hit the structure
causing potential damage.
C. Guardrail Systems
On this particular worksite, guardrails, barricades,
ropes, cables or other perimeter guarding devices or
methods on the erection floor will pose problems to safe
erection procedures. Typically, a floor or roof is erected by
placing 4 to 10 ft wide structural members next to one
another and welding or grouting them together. The
perimeter of a floor and roof changes each time a new
member is placed into position. It is unreasonable and
virtually impossible to erect guardrails and toe boards at
the ever changing leading edge of a floor or roof.
1. To position a member safely it is necessary to
remove all obstructions extending above the floor
level near the point of erection. Such a procedure
allows workers to swing a new member across the
erected surface as necessary to position it properly
without worrying about knocking material off of this
surface.
2.
3.
4.
Hollow core slab erection on the masonry wall

requires installation of the perimeter protection
where the masonry wall has to be constructed.
This means the guardrail is installed then
subsequently removed to continue the masonry
construction. The erector will be exposed to a fall
hazard for a longer period of time while installing
and removing perimeter protection than while
erecting the slabs.
In hollow core work, as in other precast concrete
erection, others are not typically on the work deck
until the precast concrete erection is complete.
The deck is not complete until the leveling,
aligning, and grouting of the joints is done. It is
normal practice to keep others off the deck until at
least the next day after the installation is complete
to allow the grout to harden.
There is not permanent boundary until all structural
members have been placed in the floor or roof. At
the leading edge, workers are operating at the
temporary edge of the structure as they work to
position the next member in the sequence.
Compliance with the standard would require a
guardrail and toe board to be installed along this
edge. However, the presence of such a device
would prevent a new member from being swung
over the erected surface low enough to allow
workers to control it safely during the positioning
process. Further, these employees would have to
work through the guardrail to align the new
member and connect it to the structure. The
guardrail would not protect an employee who must
lean through it to do the necessary work, rather it
would hinder the employee to such a degree that a
greater hazard is created than if the guardrail were
absent.
Guardrail requirements pose a hazard at the
leading edge of installed floor or roof sections by
creating the possibility of employees being caught
between guardrails and suspended loads. The lack
of a clear work area in which to guide the
suspended load into position for placement and
welding of members into the existing structure
creates still further hazards.
Where erection processes require precast
concrete stairways or openings to be installed as
an integral part of the overall erection process, it
must also be recognized that guardrails or
handrails must not project above the surface of the
erection floor. Such guardrails should be
terminated at the level of the erection floor to avoid
placing hazardous obstacles in the path of a
member being positioned.
V. Other Fall Protection Measures Considered for This

Job
The following is a list and explanation of other fall
protection measures available and an explanation of
limitations for use on this particular jobsite. If during the
course of erecting the building the employee sees an area
27
that could be erected more safely by the use of these fall
protection measures, the foreman should be notified.
A. Scaffolds are not used because:
1. The leading edge of the building is constantly
changing and the scaffolding would have to be
moved at very frequent intervals. Employees
erecting and dismantling the scaffolding would be
exposed to fall hazards for a greater length of time
than they would by merely erecting the precast
concrete member.
2. A scaffold tower could interfere with the safe
swinging of a load by the crane.
3. Power lines, terrain and site do not allow for the
safe use of scaffolding.
B. Vehicle mounted platforms are not used because:
1. A vehicle mounted platform will not reach areas on
the deck that are erected over other levels.
2. The leading edge of the building is usually over a
lower level of the building and this lower level will
not support the weight of a vehicle mounted
platform.
3. A vehicle mounted platform could interfere with the
safe swinging of a load by crane, either by the
crane swinging the load over or into the
equipment.
4. Power lines and surrounding site work do not allow
for the safe use of a vehicle mounted platform.
C. Crane suspended personnel platforms are not used
because:
1. A second crane close enough to suspend any
employee in the working and erecting area could interfere
with the safe swinging of a load by the crane hoisting the
product to be erected.
2. Power lines and surrounding site work do not allow
for the safe use of a second crane on the job.
VI. Enforcement
Constant awareness of and respect for fall hazards, and
compliance with all safety rules are considered conditions
of employment. The jobsite superintendent, as well as
individuals in the safety and personnel department, reserve
the right to issue disciplinary warnings to employees, up to
and including termination, for failure to follow the guidelines
of this program.
VII. Changes to Plan
Any changes to the plan will be approved by (name of
the qualified person). This plan shall be reviewed by a
qualified person as the job progresses to determine if
additional practices, procedures or training needs to be
implemented by the competent person to improve or
provide additional fall protection. Workers shall be notified
and trained, if necessary, in the new procedures. A copy of
this plan and all approved changes shall be maintained at
the jobsite.
Sample Fall Protection

Construction
(Insert Company Name)
Plan
for
Residential
This fall protection plan is specific for the following

project:
Location of job
Date plan prepared or modified
Plan prepared by
Plan approved by
Plan supervised by
The following fall protection plan is a sample program
prepared for the prevention of injuries associated with falls.
A fall protection plan must be developed and evaluated on
a site by site basis. It is recommended that builders discuss
the written fall protection plan with their OSHA area office
prior to going on a jobsite.
I. Statement of Company Policy
(Your company name here) is dedicated to the
protection of its employees from on-the-job injuries. All
employees of (your company name here) have the
responsibility to work safely on the job. The purpose of the
plan is to supplement our existing safety and health
program and to ensure that every employee who works for
(your company name here) recognizes workplace fall
hazards and takes the appropriate measures to address
those hazards.
This fall protection plan addresses the use of
conventional fall protection at a number of areas on the
project, as well as identifies specific activities that require
non-conventional means of fall protection. During the
construction of residential buildings under 48 feet in height,
it is sometimes infeasible or it creates a greater hazard to
use conventional fall protection systems at specific areas or
for specific tasks. The areas or tasks may include, but are
not limited to:
a. Setting and bracing of roof trusses and rafters;
b. Installation of floor sheathing and joists;
c. Roof sheathing operations; and
d. Erecting exterior walls.
In these cases, conventional fall protection systems
may not be the safest choice for builders. This plan is
designed to enable employers and employees to recognize
the fall hazards associated with this job and to establish the
safest procedures that are to be followed in order to
prevent falls to lower levels or through holes and openings
in walking/working surfaces.
Each employee will be trained in these procedures and
will strictly adhere to them except when doing so would
expose the employee to a greater hazard. If, in the
employees opinion, this is the case, the employee is to
notify the competent person of their concern and have the
concern addressed before proceeding.
It is the responsibility of (name of competent person) to
implement this fall protection plan. Continual observational
safety checks of work operations and the enforcement of
the safety policy and procedures shall be regularly
enforced. The crew supervisor or foreman (insert name) is
responsible for correcting any unsafe practices or
conditions immediately.
28
It is the responsibility of the employer to ensure that all
employees understand and adhere to the procedures of
this plan and to follow the instructions of the crew
supervisor. It is also the responsibility of the employee to
bring to managements attention any unsafe or hazardous
conditions or practices that may cause injury to either
themselves or any other employees. Any changes to the
fall protection plan must be approved by (name of qualified
person).
II. Fall Protection Systems To Be Used on This Job
Installation of roof trusses/rafters, exterior wall erection,
roof sheathing, floor sheathing and joist/truss activities will
be conducted by employees who are specifically trained to
do this type of work and are trained to recognize fall
hazards. The nature of such work normally exposes the
employee to the fall hazard for a short period of time. This
Plan details how (your company name here) will minimize
these standards.
Control Access Zones
When using the plan to implement the fall protection
options available, workers must be protected through
limited access to high hazard locations. Before any
nonconventional fall protection systems are used as part of
the work plan, a controlled access zone (CAZ) shall be
clearly defined by the competent person as an area where
a recognized hazard exists. The demarcation of the CAZ
shall be communicated by the competent person in a
recognized manner, either through signs, wires, tapes,
ropes or chains.
(Your company name here) shall take the following
steps to ensure that the CAZ is clearly marked or controlled
by the competent person:
All access to CAZ must be restricted to authorized
entrants;
All workers who are permitted in the CAZ shall be listed
in the appropriate sections of the Plan (or be visibly
identifiable by the competent person) prior to
implementation;
The competent person shall ensure that all protective
elements of the CAZ be implemented prior to the beginning
of work.
Installation Procedures for Roof Truss and Rafter
Erection
During the erection and bracing of roof trusses/rafters,
conventional fall protection may present a greater hazard to
workers. On this job, safety nets, guardrails and personal
fall arrest systems will not provide adequate fall protection
because the nets will cause the walls to collapse, while
there are no suitable attachment or anchorage points for
guardrails or personal fall arrest systems.
On this job, requiring workers to use a ladder for the
entire installation process will cause a greater hazard
because the worker must stand with his back or side to the
front of the ladder. While erecting the truss or rafter the
worker will need both hands to maneuver the truss and
therefore cannot hold onto the ladder. In addition, ladders
cannot be adequately protected from movement while
trusses are being maneuvered into place. Many workers
may experience additional fatigue because of the increase

in overhead work with heavy materials, which can also lead
to a greater hazard.
Exterior scaffolds cannot be utilized on this job because
the ground, after recent backfilling, cannot support the
scaffolding. In most cases, the erection and dismantling of
the scaffold would expose workers to a greater fall hazard
than erection of the trusses/rafters.
On all walls eight feet or less, workers will install interior
scaffolds along the interior wall below the location where
the trusses/rafters will be erected. Sawhorse scaffolds
constructed of 46 inch sawhorses and 2x10 planks will
often allow workers to be elevated high enough to allow for
the erection of trusses and rafters without working on the
top plate of the wall.
In structures that have walls higher than eight feet and
where the use of scaffolds and ladders would create a
greater hazard, safe working procedures will be utilized
when working on the top plate and will be monitored by the
crew supervisor. During all stages of truss/rafter erection
the stability of the trusses/rafters will be ensured at all
times.
steps to protect workers who are exposed to fall hazards
while working from the top plate installing trusses/rafters:
Only the following trained workers will be allowed to
work on the top plate during roof truss or rafter installation:
Workers shall have no other duties to perform during
truss/rafter erection procedures;
All trusses/rafters will be adequately braced before any
worker can use the truss/rafter as a support;
Workers will remain on the top plate using the
previously stabilized truss/rafter as a support while other
trusses/rafters are being erected;
Workers will leave the area of the secured trusses only
when it is necessary to secure another truss/rafter;
The first two trusses/rafters will be set from ladders
leaning on side walls at points where the walls can support
the weight of the ladder; and
A worker will climb onto the interior top plate via a
ladder to secure the peaks of the first two trusses/rafters
being set.
The workers responsible for detaching trusses from
cranes and/or securing trusses at the peaks traditionally
are positioned at the peak of the trusses/rafters. There are
also situations where workers securing rafters to ridge
beams will be positioned on top of the ridge beam.
while securing trusses/rafters at the peak of the
trusses/ridge beam:
work at the peak during roof truss or rafter installation:
Once truss or rafter installation begins, workers not
involved in that activity shall not stand or walk below or
adjacent to the roof opening or exterior walls in any area
where they could be struck by falling objects;
Workers shall have no other duties than
securing/bracing the trusses/ridge beam;
Workers positioned at the peaks or in the webs of
trusses or on top of the ridge beam shall work from a stable
29
position, either by sitting on a ridge seat or other
equivalent surface that provides additional stability or by
positioning
themselves
in
previously
stabilized
trusses/rafters and leaning into and reaching through the
trusses/rafters;
Workers shall not remain on or in the peak/ridge any
longer than necessary to safely complete the task.
Roof Sheathing Operations
Workers typically install roof sheathing after all
trusses/rafters and any permanent truss bracing is in place.
Roof structures are unstable until some sheathing is
installed, so workers installing roof sheathing cannot be
protected from fall hazards by conventional fall protection
systems until it is determined that the roofing system can
be used as an anchorage point. At that point, employees
shall be protected by a personal fall arrest system.
Trusses/rafters are subject to collapse if a worker falls
while attached to a single truss with a belt/harness. Nets
could also cause collapse, and there is no place to attach
guardrails.
All workers will ensure that they have secure footing
before they attempt to walk on the sheathing, including
cleaning shoes/boots of mud or other slip hazards.
To minimize the time workers must be exposed to a fall
hazard, materials will be staged to allow for the quickest
installation of sheathing.
while installing roof sheathing:
Once roof sheathing installation begins, workers not
involved in that activity shall not stand or walk below or
adjacent to the roof opening or exterior walls in any area
where they could be struck by falling objects;
The competent person shall determine the limits of this
area, which shall be clearly communicated to workers prior
to placement of the first piece of roof sheathing;
The competent person may order work on the roof to be
suspended for brief periods as necessary to allow other
workers to pass through such areas when this would not
create a greater hazard;
Only qualified workers shall install roof sheathing;
The bottom row of roof sheathing may be installed by
workers standing in truss webs;
After the bottom row of roof sheathing is installed, a
slide guard extending the width of the roof shall be securely
attached to the roof. Slide guards are to be constructed of
no less than nominal 4" height capable of limiting the
uncontrolled slide of workers. Workers should install the
slide guard while standing in truss webs and leaning over
the sheathing;
Additional rows of roof sheathing may be installed by
workers positioned on previously installed rows of
sheathing. A slide guard can be used to assist workers in
retaining their footing during successive sheathing
operations;
Additional slide guards shall be securely attached to the
roof at intervals not to exceed 13 feet as successive rows
of sheathing are installed. For roofs with pitches in excess
of 9-in-12, slide guards will be installed at four-foot
intervals.
When wet weather (rain, snow, or sleet) are present,

roof sheathing operations shall be suspended unless safe
footing can be assured for those workers installing
sheathing.
When strong winds (above 40 miles per hour) are
present, roof sheathing operations are to be suspended
unless wind breakers are erected.
Installation of floor joists and sheathing during the
installation of floor sheathing/joists (leading edge
construction), the following steps shall be taken to protect
workers:
Materials for the operations shall be conveniently
staged to allow for easy access to workers; The first floor
joists or trusses will be rolled into position and secured
either from the ground, ladders or sawhorse scaffolds;
Each successive floor joist or truss will be rolled into
place and secured from a platform created from a sheet of
plywood laid over the previously secured floor joists or
trusses;
Except for the first row of sheathing which will be
installed from ladders or the ground, workers shall work
from the established deck; and
Any workers not assisting in the leading edge
construction while leading edges still exist (e.g. cutting the
decking for the installers) shall not be permitted within six
feet of the leading edge under construction.
Erection of Exterior Walls
During the construction and erection of exterior walls,
employers shall take the following steps to protect workers:
erect exterior walls:
A painted line six feet from the perimeter will be clearly
marked prior to any wall erection activities to warn of the
approaching unprotected edge;
Materials for operations shall be conveniently staged to
minimize fall hazards; and
Workers constructing exterior walls shall complete as
much cutting of materials and other preparation as possible
away from the edge of the deck.
III. Enforcement
Constant awareness of and respect for fall hazards, and
compliance with all safety rules are considered conditions
of employment. The crew supervisor or foreman, as well as
individuals in the safety and personnel department, reserve
the right to issue disciplinary warnings to employees, up to
and including termination, for failure to follow the guidelines
of this program.
IV. Accident Investigations
All accidents that result in injury to workers, regardless
of their nature, shall be investigated and reported. It is an
integral part of any safety program that documentation take
place as soon as possible so that the cause and means of
prevention can be identified to prevent a reoccurrence.
In the event that an employee falls or there is some
other related, serious incident occurring, this plan shall be
reviewed to determine if additional practices, procedures,
or training need to be implemented to prevent similar types
of falls or incidents from occurring.
30
V. Changes to Plan
Any changes to the plan will be approved by (name of
the qualified person) as the job progresses to determine if
additional practices, procedures or training needs to be
implemented by the competent person to improve or
provide additional fall protection. Workers shall be notified

and trained, if necessary, in the new procedures. A copy of
this plan and all approved changes shall be maintained at
the jobsite.
*[59 FR 40746, Aug. 9, 1994; 60 FR 5131, Jan. 26, 1995]
Michigan Occupational Safety and Health Administration

PO Box 30643
Lansing, Michigan 48909-8143
Ph: 517.322.1814
Fx: 517.322.1775
The Department of Labor & Economic Growth will not discriminate against
any individual or group because of race, sex, religion, age, national origin,
color, marital status, disability, or political beliefs. If you need assistance
with reading, writing, hearing, etc., under the Americans with Disabilities
Act, you may make your needs known to this agency.
10
SAFETY CHECKLISTS
CONSTRUCTION SAFETY CHECKLIST
JOB NAME/JOB #
DATE
INSPECTOR
SIGNED
First Aid and Emergency

First Aid Kit
Certified First Aid Person/CPR
Emergency help posted #s
Emergency communication system
Stretcher
Housekeeping and Sanitation
Work areas/passage clear
Toilets adequate/clean/gender
Drinking water/cups/garbage
Schedule dumpster removal
Fire Prevention & Protection
Fire code posted
Adequate fire extinguishers
Standpipes required level
Flammable storage marked
No open fires
Gas cylinders; use & storage
Personal Protect Equipment
Hard hats worn/sign posted
Eye and ear protection used
Dust masks/respirators used
Safety harness/lanyards
Electrical Installation
Electrical dangers posted
Temporary lighting adequate
GFI or assured grounding
Outlets secured
Lockout/tagout
Public Protection
Signs posted
Flagging
Permits
Overhead protection
Required Posters: Fed & State
EEO
Min. Wage/Overtime/Child
Fed. Financed/Fed Contract
Polygraph
Work Comp/wage-age-days
Unemployment Insurance
Fed. Med Leave Act
OK
Action Needed
CONSTRUCTION SAFETY CHECKLIST
JOB NAME/JOB #
DATE
INSPECTOR
SIGNED
Ladders and Scaffolding

Inspected and proper
Proper location and tied
Guardrails/toe boards/screen
Working levels debris free
Signs posted
Hoist, Cranes, Derricks
Adequate clearances
Load capacity & trained employee
Clearances from electric
Swing radius 360 protect
Excavation & Shoring
Shoring, box for depth/salt
Traffic control
Spoil bank and equip away
Ladders 3 above each 25
Water pumped/inspected
Competent person on site
Material Handling & Storage
Pre-job storage plan
Stacks secure/neat/protect
4 to 1 base to height stack
Away from edge/walkways
Tools, Hand & Power
Proper tool for each task
Inspection and maintenance
Training: laser, power act
Guarding in place
Electrical ground test
Barricades & Railings
Secure and clearly separate
Floor openings protected
Stairway railings/steps
Open sided floors protected
OSHA
OSHA
OSHA HAZCOM
Assured Grounding
MSDS
Safety Policy
OSHA 300
OSHA Jobsite Inspection Form
OK
Action Needed
JOBSITE INSPECTION FORM

Client Name:
Date:
Superintendent:
Jobsite:
Standard
Description
Corrective Measures
Description
Corrective Measures
Description
Corrective Measures
Description
Corrective Measures
Subcontractor #1
Standard
Subcontractor #2
Standard
Subcontractor #3
Standard
Completed By:
Project Name:
Project Location:
Completed by:
Date:
JOB START-UP CHECKLIST

ToolBoxTopics.com
Worksite
OSHA/TWCC Posters displayed in prominent location?
Emergency telephone numbers posted?
Emergency evacuation routes identified and posted?
Local fire department notified of job activities?
Safety signs/warnings posted where appropriate?
First aid kits available, adequately stocked, and identified?
List of employees with current CPR/First Aid cards posted?
Occupational clinic identified and introductory visit made?
Local hospitals identified?
Fire extinguishers located, identified, and regularly inspected?
M.S.D.S. station established and identified?
Eye wash station established and identified?
Yes
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
No
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
Management Programs
Corporate safety manual on site?
Written policy statement signed by management?
Copy of signed policy provided to new employees?
Individual(s) responsible for implementation and enforcement of the accident
prevention plan identified?
Written drug/substance abuse policy distributed to employees?
Employee/Supervisor responsibilities and authority assigned?
Procedures established for employee safety and health complaints?
Yes
___
___
___
___
No
__
__
__
__
Recordkeeping
OSHA 200 log available with procedures/responsibilities established?
Procedures in place to conduct and maintain records of:
Site/facility safety inspections?
Safety meeting minutes?
Yes No
___ __
___ __
___ __
___ __
___ __
___ __
Job Hazard Analysis?

Accident investigations
Emergency response drills
Hot work permits?
Confined space entry permits?
Utility locates?
Equipment and Tools?
Vehicle inspections?
Fire suppression equipment?
Employee records file contains:
up-to-date medical records in accordance with OSHA requirement?
exposure records t hazardous substances or harmful physical agents?
training records which are available for review?
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
Employee Health & Safety Training

All workers received job site safety orientation?
All new employees received company orientation training?
All employees received and documented required training:
Emergency action plan?
Equipment operation?
Hazard communication?
Hearing conservation?
Location and use of emergency equipment?
Personal protective equipment?
Work area hazards?
Employees receive refresher training at least annually?
Employees participate in regularly scheduled safety meetings/training?
Management participates and provides resources in employee training?
Employees instructed on procedures to report unsafe conditions, acts, etc?
Yes No
___ __
___ __
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
Accident Investigation
Have accident investigation guidelines been established and are forms available?
Will all accidents and "near misses" investigated?
Have supervisors received training on accident investigation/ hazard abatement?
Have responsibilities been assigned for all phases of investigation process:
Who conducts investigations/completes report?
Who completes records/logs?
Who ensures corrective action recommendations have been implemented?
Yes
___
___
___
No
__
__
__
___ __
___ __
___ __
Project Name:
Project Location:
Inspected by:
Date of Inspection:
CONTRACTORS JOB SITE CHECKLIST
Manual Material Handling

Are mechanical devices being used in place of manual handling of material?
Are ropes, slings, chains, hook, cables, and chokers in good condition?
Proper staging of materials to minimize lifting and carrying?
Rigging equipment inspected regularly and in good condition?
Is the handling of bagged material limited to 50 lbs?
Are carrying handles being used when a single worker is carrying sheeted
materials?
Yes
___
___
___
___
___
No
__
__
__
__
__
Housekeeping: Slips, Trips and Falls

Are walking and working surfaces clear and free of debris?
Are waste and trash containers provided, and used?
Is there regular removal of waste and trash from the containers?
Does each trade clean up after themselves?
Is adequate temporary lighting provided?
Is temporary storage of materials and supplies done in an organized fashion?
Yes
___
___
___
___
___
___
No
__
__
__
__
__
__
Fire Protection and Prevention

Are all flammable liquid containers clearly identified?
Are all flammable liquid containers UL of FM listed?
Have proper storage practices for flammables been observed?
Are extinguishers readily accessible and serviced regularly?
Are hydrants clear and accessible for fire department personnel?
Have gas cylinders been chained upright with valve caps securely fastened?
Has there been proper segregation between flammable gasses?
Proper labeling of full and empty cylinders?
Are temporary heaters located at a safe distance from combustibles?
Is ventilation adequate for temporary heaters?
Yes
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
No
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
___ __
Yes No
Electrical
Are all switch gear, panels, and devices that are energized marked and/or guarded? ___ __
Lockout devices available/used on circuits that could become energized while
being worked?
___ __
Are all temporary circuits properly guarded and grounded?
___ __
Are extension cords in continuous lengths without splice?
___ __
Are GFCI's and/or Assured Equipment Grounding Conductor Program being used? ___ __
If temporary lighting is provided, are bulbs protected against accidental breakage? ___ __
Are working surfaces clear of cords so as not to create a tripping hazard?
___ __
Is there a sufficient number of temporary outlets on the job site?
___ __
Any visual signs of outlet overloading?
___ __
Hazard Communication Does the Program include:

A list of hazardous chemicals.
Container labeling.
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)
Employee training.
Informing other contractors.
Posting.
Yes
___
___
___
___
___
___
No
__
__
__
__
__
__
Excavation/Trenching
Have utility companies been notified of proposed excavation work?
Are all tools, equipment, and shoring materials readily available prior to job start
up?
Are overhead utility lines noted and precautions taken to avoid contact with
equipment?
Is the spoil pile at least two feet from the edge of the excavation?
Is the excavation inspected daily or more frequently when conditions could affect
the soil?
If needed, are barricades, stop logs, properly placed?
Has soil classification been made by a competent person?
Are excavations five feet or deeper correctly sloped, benched, shored or is a trench
box used?
Is a ladder or other means of egress provided in trenches or excavations six feet or
deeper?
When ladders are used, do they extend three feet above the surface and are they
secured?
Are shoring and shielding systems inspected daily by a competent person?
Is the trench backfilled as soon a work is completed?
Yes No
___ __
___ __
___ __
___ __
___ __
___ __
___ __
___ __
___ __
___ __
___ __
___ __
Barricading
Are floor openings planked and secured or barricaded?
Are direction signs used to inform the public of upcoming construction work?
Is the sidewalk protection effective?
Is a flag person provided to direct traffic when needed?
Has the person been trained on how to direct traffic and the public?
Are open excavation, road drop offs, manholes, uneven surfaces barricaded?
Yes
___
___
___
___
___
___
No
__
__
__
__
__
__
Ladders
Is the proper ladder for the job being used?
Are ladders in good condition (no missing or broken rungs)?
Are there safety shoes/cleats on the bottom of ladders? Are they needed?
Are non-conductive ladders available for use around live wiring?
Are ladders tied-off at top or otherwise secured?
Do side rails extend 36 inches above top of landing?
Rungs or cleats uniformly spaced 10 - 14 inches apart?
Are step ladders fully open when in use?
Yes
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
No
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
Scaffolding
Are scaffold components visibly free of any physical damage? (no bent supports or
bracing)
Is scaffold properly erected with all pins and braces in place and locked?
Are rolling scaffolds equipped with locking wheels?
Are wheels locked when scaffold is in use?
Is scaffold erected on a firm and substantial surface?
Is planking of a scaffold grade?
Planking in good condition and properly installed?
Are toe boards and guardrails in place on scaffolds over 10 feet?
Are workers on scaffolding protected from falling objects if overhead hazards exist?
Ladder provided for access to scaffold work platform?
Yes No
Personal Protective Equipment

Is hearing protection available for personnel that may be exposed to noisy
conditions?
Is respiratory protection available to personnel and being used when conditions
require them?
Are safety harnesses, lifelines and shock absorbing lanyards available and being
used?
Are personnel using gloves when handling sharp or rough material?
Where required, rubber gloves with protectors-insulators being used?
Yes No
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
___ __
___ __
___ __
___ __
___ __
Is life saving equipment available for work over or near water?
___ __
Medical
Are first-aid kits available and properly stocked?
Are all emergency phone numbers posted?
Are employees aware of the address of the site/ capable of giving directions to
emergency crew?
Is anyone trained in first aid and CPR?
Yes No
___ __
___ __
Tools: Hand and Power

Are tools free of any obvious physical damage?
Are tools inspected for frayed or damaged cords?
Are tools and cords properly grounded (ground pins are in good condition?
Are double insulated tools in use and in good condition?
Are the handles on all tools in good condition (not bent, splintered or broken)?
Are all hoses on air or hydraulic tools in good condition?
Are all shields and guards in place on the tools and in good condition?
Operator qualified and instructed to use powder actuated tools?
Yes
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
Welding and Cutting

Are non-combustible enclosures, (screens/shields) provided and used when
welding?
Welding goggles, gloves, and clothing being used by welder?
Inspection for fire hazards after welding stops?
Are gas cylinder, hoses, regulators, torches, torch tips and welding carts, in good
condition?
Welding and ground cables properly insulated, sized and located to avoid tripping
hazards?
Natural or mechanical ventilation adequate?
Surrounding areas free of flammables and combustibles?
Proper storage of gas cylinders?
Yes No
___
___
___
___
__
__
__
__
Hoist, Cranes and Derricks

Are cables and sheaves checked?
Are slings, hooks, eyelets, chokes inspected?
Are load capacities posted in cab?
Are power lines at a safe distance?
Do cranes have proper barricades around swing radius?
Yes
___
___
___
___
___
No
__
__
__
__
__
___ __
___ __
No
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
___ __
___ __
___ __
___ __
Are crane inspection logs with crane?
___ __
Floor, Wall Openings, Stairways

Floor and roof openings guarded by guardrails and toe boards or a secured cover?
Open-sided floors/platforms six feet or higher guarded with railing, toe boards or
equivalent?
Are stairs with four or more risers equipped with standard hand rail protection?
Runways four feet or more above ground properly guarded?
Anchor posts and framing capable of withstanding 200lb load in any direction?
Yes No
___ __
___
___
___
___
__
__
__
__
Powder Activated Tools

. Operators properly trained and authorized?
Operators use eye, face, hearing and hand protection?
Tools inspected and tested daily before use to assure safety devices operational?
Anchors and charges comply with tool manufacturer's specs?
Anchorage limited to recommended materials?
Tools loaded immediately prior to use?
Other employees warned to expect loud noise and possible airborne debris?
Employees who may be in harms way relocated?
Unattended and stored tools always rendered unloaded and secure?
Yes
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
No
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
Concrete
. Employees working with concrete properly clothed to protect skin?
PPE (gloves, boots, hard hats, eye/face protection) used where required?
Employees trained to avoid hazards of cement burns and inhalation?
Form work designed, fabricated, erected, supported, braced and maintained to
support vertical and lateral loads?
Shoring inspected prior to, during and after concrete placement?
Scaffolding or platforms used by employees properly designed and constructed to
support load?
Scaffold platforms equipped with standard guard rails?
Raising or lowering of concrete buckets over heads of people prohibited?
Employees forbidden from riding concrete buckets?
Safe access provided for equipment and vehicles?
Safe shoring and form removal procedures established?
Vertical reinforcing steel protected from impalement hazards?
Lift slab operations designed and planned by a PE with all employees trained?
Required distances maintained between overhead electrical power lines and
concrete placement equipment?
Yes
___
___
___
No
__
__
__
___ __
___ __
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
___ __
Masonry
Limited access zone established on the un-scaffold side of the wall?
Walls properly supported to prevent overturn or collapse?
Dust protection used during sawing, mortar mixing, or other dust generating
activities?
Yes No
___ __
___ __
Structural Steel
Permanent and/or temporary flooring requirements been met?
Temporary planking sized and installed correctly?
Employees using the required fall protection equipment?
Company approved fall protection program in place?
Danger zone beneath the steel erection designated to limit unauthorized employee?
Hoisting equipment and accessories inspected as required?
Tag lines used to control loads?
Proper erection bolting and bracing procedures followed?
Floor, roof and wall openings protected immediately as they appear?
Ladders, stairways, approved personnel lifts or other safe means or access?
Yes
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
No
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
Heavy Equipment
Operators properly trained and authorized?
Inspection and maintenance performed on a regular schedule?
Bi-directional machines have operational signal horns?
Back-up alarms operational?
Roll over protection provided as required and with seat belts?
Equipment clean and free of grease, oil, mud, fluids and other slipping hazards?
Moving parts protected by guards?
Engines shut off during refueling?
Glass free of defects and rated as safety glass or equivalent?
Lights, reflectors, wipers, defrosters, brakes, tires, etc. in good condition?
Employees prohibited from riding on heavy equipment without a proper seat?
Are haul roads properly maintained?
Yes
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
No
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
__
Aerial Lifts
Employees using aerial lifts are trained and authorized?
Manufacture's operation and safety rules obeyed?
Unit safety inspected and all controls tested prior to each days use?
Unit positioned on solid, level ground?
Boom and basket load limits within manufacture's specs?
Yes
___
___
___
___
___
No
__
__
__
__
__
___ __
Everyone in lift basket standing firmly on the floor, wearing fall prevention or
protection equipment?
Brakes set and outriggers positioned as required?
___ __
___ __
Weekly Project Safety Audit Report

Pr oject:
Contr act No:
Pr oject Manager :
Safety Coor dinator :
Date:
Auditor :
No.
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
Item
SITE PRESENTATION & WELFARE
Public Safety
Signage
Compund/Site/Housekeeping
Washing/Toilet Conditions
Canteen Conditions
Drying Room Conditions
Drinking Water Available
First Aid Facilities
Personnel/Inducted- Random Check
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUPMENT

Hard Hats
Safety Footwear
Eye Protection
Gloves
Hi Vis Vests
Ear Protection
Face Masks
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
EXCAVATION
Edge Protection In Place
Sides Shaped/Sloped/Propped
Soil 1m From Edge
Proper Access/Egress
CR Forms Completed
Services Identified
4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
WORKING AREAS**
Site/Work Area Access
Barriers/Warning Signs, etc.
OPEs Securely Guarded
Adequate Lighting
Housekeeping/Material Storage
5
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
SCAFFOLDS
Firm Foundations
Properly Boarded
Handrails/Toe Boards/Guardrails
Scaffold Tied to Structure
CR Form Completed
Alloy Towers Used Correctly
Trestle Scaffolds Used Correctly
6
6.1
6.2
6.3
LADDERS
Condition/Length/Angle
Tied/Footed
Correct Use
Y/N
Comments
7
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
WORKING AT HEIGHTS**
Barriers Adequate
Harnesses Being Worn
OPEs Guarded
MEWPs- Use, Trained Personnel
8
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
LIFTING APPLIANCES
Relevant Certs Submitted
Slings/Shackles- General Condition
S.W.L. Marked
Banksmen Employed
CR Forms Completed
9
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
POWER TOOLS/ELECTRICITY
Power Tools- General Condition
Power Tools- Guards/Deadmans Switch
Leads- General Condition
All Tools 110v or Less
Distribution Boards Protected
Signage/Goalposts
10
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES
Hazardous Substances Identified
Storage Adequate
Correct PPE
Data Sheet Available
11
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.6
11.7
FIRE & EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

Flammable Material Storage
Cylinders Upright & Secure
Welding Screens/Blankets/Extinguishers
Adequate Fire Extinguishers
Emergency Numbers Posted
Emergency/Evacuation Plans
First Aiders Available
12
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7
DOCUMENTATION- MONTHLY
Safety Policy Displayed
HSE Notification Posted
Health & Safety Plan Updated
Subcontractor Safety Statements Submitted
Induction's- Happening
Tool Box Talks Happening
Accident Reports- Updated
Other Comments:
www.4-Safety.com
906-228-9109
Rolling Tower Scaffolding Inspection

Date: ___________ Job Location: ______________ Job Number: ___________
Inspector is to initial each inspection in the appropriate space.

ITEMS:
Yes No ACTION/COMMENTS
Are scaffold components and planking in safe
condition for use?
Have competent persons been in charge of
erection?
Is the tower plumb?
Is the tower height less than 4 times the
minimum base with?
Are casters of proper size with locking device?
Has proper access been provided?
Is tower fully braced on both sides?
Have horizontal diagonal bracing been position
properly at base and intermediate levels of 20
feet?
Has proper guard railing been installed?
Have hazardous conditions been provided for?
Power Lines?
Wind Loading?
Possible wash out of footings?
Is platform fully planked and toe boards
installed?
Are planks secured to prevent movement or
uplift?
Have personnel been instructed in the safe use of
the scaffolding?
THIS TO CERTIFY THAT I HAVE INSPECTED THIS SCAFFOLDING ____________________
CC: Post, File
www.4-Safety.com
906-228-9109
Scaffolding Inspection
Date: ___________ Job Location: ______________ Job Number: ___________
Inspector is to initial each inspection in the appropriate space.

ITEMS:
Yes No ACTION/COMMENTS
Are scaffold components and planking in safe
condition for use?
Have competent persons been in charge of
erection?
Is the tower plumb?
Is the tower height less than 4 times the
minimum base with?
Are sills properly place and adequate size?
Are screw jacks extended less than 12?
Has proper access been provided?
Is tower fully braced on both sides?
Have freestanding towers been guyed or tied
off?
Has scaffold been tied to structure at least every
30 feet in length and 26 feet in height?
Have horizontal diagonal bracing been position
properly at base and intermediate levels of 20
feet?
Has proper guard railing been installed?
Have hazardous conditions been provided for?
Power Lines?
Wind Loading?
Possible wash out of footings?
Is platform fully planked and toe boards
installed?
Are planks secured to prevent movement or
uplift?
Have personnel been instructed in the safe use of
the scaffolding?
THIS TO CERTIFY THAT I HAVE INSPECTED THIS SCAFFOLDING ____________________
CC: Post, File
www.4-Safety.com
906-228-9109
SUPPORTED SCAFFOLDING
Scaffolds are to be erected, moved, altered, and dismantled by competent and experienced personnel or
under the Supervision of competent persons.
On scaffolds that are 10 feet above the ground or floor, handrails, midrails, and toe boards are to be
installed and scaffolds completely decked.
Guardrails shall be 2" x 4", or the equivalent, and be approximately 42 inches high with a midrails. All
guardrails must be capable of withstanding a 200-pound force applied in any direction.
Supports shall be at intervals not to exceed eight feet.
Toe boards shall be minimum of four inches in height.
All planking shall be Scaffold Grade or equivalent.
If for some reason a platform or scaffold cannot be equipped with standard handrails or completely
decked, then safety harnesses must be worn and properly tied off.
When scaffold heights exceed four (three) times the smallest base dimension (or 26 feet), it must be
secured to the building or structure at the second lift and every other lift there after. Running scaffold is to
be anchored every 30 feet horizontally at the heights established in the preceding sentence. "Outriggers"
or guys may be used where it is impractical to secure scaffold to a building or structure.
The footing or anchorage for scaffolds shall be sound, rigid, and capable
of carrying four times the maximum intended load without settling or
displacement. Unstable objects such as barrels, boxes, loose bricks, or
concrete blocks will not be used to support scaffolds. Mudsills 12 x
24 and base plates are recommended. When using leveling jacks, the
adjusting screws shall not be extended more than 12 with 1/2 of its
length remaining inside the scaffold leg.
Scaffolds are to be capable of supporting at least four times the maximum intended load.
The poles, legs, or uprights of scaffolds shall be plumb and securely and rigidly braced to prevent
swaying and displacement.
Do not stack brick, tile, block, or similar material higher than 4" on the scaffold deck.
A safe access ladder extending 36" above the landing or equivalent safe access shall be provided.
Rope and No. 9 wire is not acceptable handrail material for scaffolds or elevated platforms,
Scaffolds shall not be moved or dismantled until all loose tools, equipment and materials resting on the
scaffold deck, are first removed.
1
www.4-Safety.com
906-228-9109
All scaffolds shall rest on a suitable footing and shall stand level. Movable scaffolds shall have the casters
or wheels locked to prevent movement. Unstable objects such as loose brick or concrete blocks shall not
be used to support scaffolds or planks.
Never work on a scaffold in high winds or storms.
Do not climb bracing of scaffold.
Scaffolds shall never be altered or moved while they are in use or occupied,
Overhead protection shall be provided for men on a scaffold exposed to overhead hazards.
Where practical, the area beneath shall be barricaded and Men Working Over Head signs shall be
posted in all approach directions.
Scaffold Planking
Scaffold planks may be painted 2" on each end to denote use for scaffold
decking only.
(A 2" x 10" or 2" x 12" scaffold grade material only will be used.)
Scaffold planks are not to extend over their end supports more than 12" or
less than 6"
All planking on platforms shall be overlapped (minimum 12 inch) or
secured from movement.
Do not use cleated boards with cleats turned up.
Inspection
Before erecting and during dismantling, inspect all scaffold components.
Those found with defects must be discarded immediately.
Handrails, midrails, cross bracing, and steel tubing shall be inspected for
nicks, especially near center span, and indications where a welding arc
has struck,
Scaffold components shall be straight and free from bends, kinks, dents,
and severe rusting.
Scaffold frame weld zones shall be inspected for cracks and ends of tubing for splitting or cracking.
Manufactured decking shall be inspected for loose bolt or rivet connections and bent, kinked, or dented
frame. Plywood surface should be checked for softening due to rot or wear, and peeling or laminated
layers at edges. Safety planks should be checked out for rot, cracks, and other damage. Also, inspect the
rod or bolt and cleat.
www.4-Safety.com
906-228-9109
Each quick-connecting device, whether spring, threaded connection, or toggle pin arrangement, should be
inspected to see that it operates properly.
Casters, if used, should be inspected for smooth rolling surfaces, free
turning, free acting swivel, and to be sure that the locking mechanism is in
good working order.
Any scaffold over 25' high should have the access ladder turned inside the
framing, and alternate sides of landing. (At no time will a person be
required to climb the outside of a scaffold over 25' high.)
Design drawings must be made prior to erection and kept on site for any scaffold over 125' high. (They
must be made by a licensed professional engineer competent in this field.)
Rolling Scaffolds See illustrations on next page
1. Scaffolds and their components are capable of supporting without failure at least four times intended
maximum load.
2. Scaffold height does not exceed four times the minimum base. Out-riggers would be included as a
minimum base or the unit is securely tied off to prevent tipping.
3. Scaffold is level/plumb at all times and used only on level, smooth surface, free of major defects.
4. Use of ladders or makeshift devices to increase the height of the scaffold on the working platform is
prohibited.
5. Casters with effective locking devices are provided and all casters are locked
when unit is in use.
6. The platform decking covers the full width of the unit and is secured against
displacement.
7. Scaffold bracing is not used to ascend or descend the units unless the bracing is specifically designed
for climbing. An access ladder is provided and installed so as not to cause the unit to tip and must
extend 36 inches above the deck.
8. Guard rails, midrails, toe boards are installed on all open sides and ends of the scaffold.
9. Where persons are required to work or pass under a scaffold, the unit is provided with a screen or
equivalent protective device to prevent materials from falling.
10. Overhead protection is provided for workers exposed to overhead hazards.
11. No one is to ride on the scaffold that is being moved.
12. Adjusting screws shall never be used with casters on rolling scaffolding.
3
www.4-Safety.com
Use of ladders or makeshift

devices to increase the
height of the scaffold on the
working platform is
prohibited.
906-228-9109
Overhead protection is provided for workers

exposed to overhead hazards.
Ladder Must Extend 36

Above the Deck
Guard rails, midrails, toe
boards are installed on all
open sides and ends of the
scaffold.
The platform decking covers

the full width of the unit and is
secured against displacement.
Where persons are

required to work or pass
under a scaffold, the unit
is provided with a screen
or equivalent protective
device to prevent
materials from falling.
Scaffolds and their

components are capable of
supporting without failure at
least four times intended
maximum load
Scaffold bracing is not used

to ascend or descend the
units unless the bracing is
specifically designed for
climbing.
Scaffold height does

not exceed four times
the minimum base.
Out-riggers would be
included as a
minimum base or the
unit is securely tied
off to prevent tipping.
An access ladder is
provided and installed so as
not to cause the unit to tip.
Casters with effective locking

devices are provided and all
casters are locked when unit
is not in use.
Scaffold is level/plumb at all times and used only on level, smooth

surface, free of major defects.
www.4-Safety.com
906-228-9109
Allowable spans shall be determined in compliance with the

National Design Specification for Wood Construction published by
the National Forest Products
Maximum permissible Maximum permissible

Maximum intended
span using full
span using nominal
nominal load (lb/ft
thickness undressed
thickness lumber
(2))
lumber (ft)
(ft)
25
10
8
50
8
6
75
6
Association; paragraph 5 of ANSI A10.8-1988 Scaffolding-Safety Requirements published by the
American National Standards Institute; or for 2 x 10 inch (nominal) or 2 x 9 inch (rough) solid sawn wood
planks, as shown in the following table:
(ii) The maximum permissible span for 1 1/4 x 9-inch or wider wood plank of full thickness with a
maximum intended load of 50 lb/ft. (2) shall be 4 feet.
(c) Fabricated planks and platforms may be used in lieu of solid sawn wood planks. Maximum spans for
such units shall be as recommended by the manufacturer based on the maximum intended load being
calculated as follows:
Rated load capacity
Intended load
Light-duty
Medium-duty
Heavy-duty
* 25 pounds per square foot applied uniformly over the entire span area
* 50 pounds per square foot applied uniformly over the entire span area.
* 75 pounds per square foot applied uniformly over the entire span area.
One-person
* 250 pounds placed at the center of the span (total 250 pounds).
Two-person
* 250 pounds placed 18 inches to the left and right of the center of the span
(total 500 pounds).
* 250 pounds placed at the center of the span and 250 pounds placed 18
inches to the left and right of the center of the span (total 750 pounds).
Three-person
Note: Platform units used to make scaffold platforms intended for light-duty use shall be capable of
supporting at least 25 pounds per square foot applied uniformly over the entire unit-span area, or a 250pound point load placed on the unit at the center of the span, whichever load produces the greater shear
force.
www.4-Safety.com
906-228-9109
Tied to structure every 26

vertically and 30 horizontally
Guardrail
Completely
decked
Midrail
Toe board
Make sure correctly braced
Screw jacks max. 12

exposed and on sill plates
Use when height of tower over 4

times width
www.4-Safety.com
906-228-9109
All scaffolding inspected daily?

Erected on sound rigid footing?
Tied to structure as required?
Guardrails, intermediate rails, toeboards and/or
screens in place?
Planking is sound and sturdy?
Proper access provided?
Employees below protected from falling objects,
hard hats being worn?
For additional information:
29 CFR 1926 Subpart L, MIOSHA Part 12
General Requirements:
Support own weight and 4 X max.
intended load.
Platforms fully planked or decked
(no gaps greater than 1).
Front edge of platforms no more
than 14 from the face of work (18
for plastering and lathing operations.
Planks extend at least 6 but not
more than 12 past support unless
designed and installed and /or
guarded properly.
Overlap planks not less than 12
only over supports, unless
restrained to prevent movement.
No mixed scaffold components used
unless compatible and integrity
maintained.
Higher than 4:1 ratio restrained from
tipping by guys, ties, or equivalent
(mobile scaffolds require a height to
base ratio of no more than 2:1).
Must have safe access with bottom
rung of ladder not more than 24
high.
Rest platforms at 35 intervals.
Maintain power line clearances.
No work during storms or high
winds.
Fall protection required at 10.
Brake
Horizontal Brace
Base plate
centered and
secured.
Casters or base
plate & mudsills.
Sills are fully

bearing on the
ground.
9

Kasco Safety Manual Current

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Kasco Safety Manual Current

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Kasco Safety Manual Current

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SAFETY POLICY

Safety and Health Policy .................................................... 1

SAFETY AND HEALTH POLICY

SAFETY AND HEALTH OBJECTIVES

Using a qualified safety person

Making regular job site safety inspections

Enforcing the use of safety equipment

Following safety procedures and rules

Providing on-going safety training

Enforcing safety rules and using appropriate discipline

Using MIOSHA Standards as a minimum guideline

JOB SITE INSPECTIONS

Pre task planning

Removing the hazard

Guarding against the hazard as required by MIOSHA

Providing/requiring personal protective equipment and enforcing its use

Training workers in safe work practices

Coordinating protection of workers through other contractors

Providing fire extinguishers in the appropriate location

Provide adequate lighting and ventilation

Promote good housekeeping practices

CONTRACTOR SAFETY PERSON

Geoffrey Hutchison, V.P Operations

Being knowledgeable of potential job hazards

Making regular safety inspections

Establishing safety procedures

Correlating regular safety training with lead persons

Maintaining safety records

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

ALL OF OUR SAFETY RULES MUST BE OBEYED- FAILURE TO DO SO WILL RESULT IN

Watch where you are walking. Don't run.

Do not enter an area which has been barricaded.

Never oil, lubricate, or fuel equipment while it is running or in motion.

Before servicing, repairing, or adjusting any powered tool or piece of equipment,

Barricade danger areas. Guard rails or perimeter cables may be required.

Defective ladders must be properly tagged and removed from service.

Keep ladder bases free of debris, hoses, wires, materials, etc.

Build scaffolds according to manufacturers' recommendations

Scaffold planks shall be properly lapped, cleated or otherwise secured to prevent

Open fires are prohibited.

JOB SAFETY TRAINING

Injury Severity potential

Appropriate Training will be given

Hazards will be pointed out

Necessary precautions will be explained

Use of the safety checklist located in the Superintendent's binder.

Written warning; suspension for 1/2 or full day

Written report for file and immediate termination

A record will be maintained of all discipline

POWER LOCKOUT PROCEDURE

Lockout procedure for Kasco Inc.

Each supervisor shall effectively enforce compliance of this lockout procedure

Prior to setting up, adjusting, repairing, servicing, installing, or performing

Employees shall comply with the lockout procedure.

Employees shall consult with their supervisor or other appropriate knowledgeable

The power source of any equipment, machine, tool, or process to be set-up,

Personal locks shall contain a tag with employee's name on it.

Any questions concerning the lockout procedure should be directed to the